222PS 222PS

PowerScout PowerScout
Power Systems Oscilloscope Power Systems Oscilloscope
Operator Manual Operator Manual
070-8097-02 070-8097-02

Please check for change information at the rear Please check for change information at the rear
of this manual. of this manual.

Second Edition: December 1993 Second Edition: December 1993

Last Revised: September 29, 1994 Last Revised: September 29, 1994
Instrument Serial Numbers Instrument Serial Numbers
Each instrument manufactured by Tektronix has a serial number on a panel Each instrument manufactured by Tektronix has a serial number on a panel
insert or tag, or stamped on the chassis. The first letter in the serial number insert or tag, or stamped on the chassis. The first letter in the serial number
designates the country of manufacture. The last five digits of the serial number designates the country of manufacture. The last five digits of the serial number
are assigned sequentially and are unique to each instrument. Those are assigned sequentially and are unique to each instrument. Those
manufactured in the United States have six unique digits. The country of manufactured in the United States have six unique digits. The country of
manufacture is identified as follows: manufacture is identified as follows:

B010000 Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon, USA B010000 Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oregon, USA
E200000 Tektronix United Kingdom, Ltd., London E200000 Tektronix United Kingdom, Ltd., London
J300000 Sony/Tektronix, Japan J300000 Sony/Tektronix, Japan
H700000 Tektronix Holland, NV, Heerenveen, The Netherlands H700000 Tektronix Holland, NV, Heerenveen, The Netherlands

Instruments manufactured for Tektronix by external vendors outside the United Instruments manufactured for Tektronix by external vendors outside the United
States are assigned a two digit alpha code to identify the country of manufacture States are assigned a two digit alpha code to identify the country of manufacture
(e.g., JP for Japan, HK for Hong Kong, IL for Israel, etc.). (e.g., JP for Japan, HK for Hong Kong, IL for Israel, etc.).

Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077 Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077

Printed in U.S.A. Printed in U.S.A.

Copyright E Tektronix, Inc., 1991, 1993. All rights reserved. Tektronix products Copyright E Tektronix, Inc., 1991, 1993. All rights reserved. Tektronix products
are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. The following are are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. The following are
registered trademarks: TEKTRONIX, TEK, TEKPROBE, and SCOPEĆMOBILE. registered trademarks: TEKTRONIX, TEK, TEKPROBE, and SCOPEĆMOBILE.
 WARRANTY WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials Tektronix warrants that this product will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from the date of
shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty shipment. If any such product proves defective during this warranty
period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product period, Tektronix, at its option, either will repair the defective product
without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product. exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify
Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period and
make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer
shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to shall be responsible for packaging and shipping the defective product to
the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid. the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the
shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service shipment is to a location within the country in which the Tektronix service
center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping
charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any charges, duties, taxes, and any other charges for products returned to any
other locations. other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by
improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix improper use or improper or inadequate maintenance and care. Tektronix
shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair
damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix damage resulting from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix
representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible
equipment; or c) to service a product that has been modified or integrated equipment; or c) to service a product that has been modified or integrated
with other products when the effect of such modification or integration with other products when the effect of such modification or integration
increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product. increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX WITH RESPECT TO THIS
PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR PRODUCT IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX' RESPONSIBILITY TO REPAIR
OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH
OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE OF WHETHER
TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
 Certificate of the Manufacturer/Importer Certificate of the Manufacturer/Importer

We hereby certify that the 222PS PowerScout POWER We hereby certify that the 222PS PowerScout POWER

SYSTEMS OSCILLOSCOPE AND ALL INSTALLED OPTIONS SYSTEMS OSCILLOSCOPE AND ALL INSTALLED OPTIONS

complies with the RF Interference Suppression requirements complies with the RF Interference Suppression requirements
of Amtsbl.ĆVfg 1046/1984. of Amtsbl.ĆVfg 1046/1984.

The German Postal Service was notified that the equipment is The German Postal Service was notified that the equipment is
being marketed. being marketed.

The German Postal Service has the right to reĆtest the series The German Postal Service has the right to reĆtest the series
and to verify that it complies. and to verify that it complies.

TEKTRONIX TEKTRONIX

Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs Bescheinigung des Herstellers/Importeurs

Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß der/die/das 222PS PowerScout Hiermit wird bescheinigt, daß der/die/das 222PS PowerScout

POWER SYSTEMS OSCILLOSCOPE AND ALL INSTALLED OPTIONS POWER SYSTEMS OSCILLOSCOPE AND ALL INSTALLED OPTIONS

in Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der AamtsblattĆ in Übereinstimmung mit den Bestimmungen der AamtsblattĆ
Verfugüng 1046/1984 funkentstört ist. Verfugüng 1046/1984 funkentstört ist.

Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen Der Deutschen Bundespost wurde das Inverkehrbringen
dieses Gerätes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur ÜberĆ dieses Gerätes angezeigt und die Berechtigung zur ÜberĆ
prufüng der Serie auf Einhalten der Bestimmungen einĆ prufüng der Serie auf Einhalten der Bestimmungen einĆ
geräumt. geräumt.

TEKTRONIX TEKTRONIX
NOTICE to the user/operator: NOTICE to the user/operator:

The German Postal Service requires that Systems assembled The German Postal Service requires that Systems assembled
by the operator/user of this instrument must also comply with by the operator/user of this instrument must also comply with
Postal Regulation, Vfg. 1046/1984, Par. 2, Sect. 1. Postal Regulation, Vfg. 1046/1984, Par. 2, Sect. 1.

HINWEIS für den Benutzer/Betreiber: HINWEIS für den Benutzer/Betreiber:

Die vom Betreiber zusammengestellte Anlage, innerhalb Die vom Betreiber zusammengestellte Anlage, innerhalb
derer dies Gerät eingesetzt wird, muß ebenfalls den derer dies Gerät eingesetzt wird, muß ebenfalls den
Voraussetzungen nach Par. 2, Ziff. 1 der Vfg. 1046/1984 Voraussetzungen nach Par. 2, Ziff. 1 der Vfg. 1046/1984
genugen. genugen.

NOTICE to the user/operator: NOTICE to the user/operator:

The German Postal Service requires that this equipment, The German Postal Service requires that this equipment,
when used in a test setup, may only be operated if the when used in a test setup, may only be operated if the
requirements of Postal Regulation, Vfg. 1046/1984, Par. 2, requirements of Postal Regulation, Vfg. 1046/1984, Par. 2,
Sect. 1.7.1 are complied with. Sect. 1.7.1 are complied with.

HINWEIS für den Benutzer/Betreiber: HINWEIS für den Benutzer/Betreiber:

Dies Gerät darf in Meßaufbauten nur betrieben werden, wenn Dies Gerät darf in Meßaufbauten nur betrieben werden, wenn
die Voraussetzungen des Par. 2, Ziff. 1.7.1 der Vfg. 1046/1984 die Voraussetzungen des Par. 2, Ziff. 1.7.1 der Vfg. 1046/1984
eingehalten werden. eingehalten werden.
 Welcome Welcome
This manual contains the following sections: This manual contains the following sections:

H Overview describes the 222PS PowerScout and provides safety H Overview describes the 222PS PowerScout and provides safety
information. information.

H At A Glance describes the controls and connectors for the 222PS. H At A Glance describes the controls and connectors for the 222PS.

H In Detail provides further detail on some aspects of the 222PS, H In Detail provides further detail on some aspects of the 222PS,
building on the information contained in At A Glance. The 15 building on the information contained in At A Glance. The 15
topics of this chapter are in alphabetical order for your conveĆ topics of this chapter are in alphabetical order for your conveĆ
nience: nience:

H Acquisition Modes H Acquisition Modes

H Auto Setup H Auto Setup

H Calibration H Calibration

H Capturing Random Events H Capturing Random Events

H Channels H Channels

H The Display H The Display

H Horizontal Operation H Horizontal Operation

H Maintenance and Repair H Maintenance and Repair

H Power H Power

H Probes H Probes

H Saving and Recalling Data H Saving and Recalling Data

H Store Mode H Store Mode

H Triggering H Triggering

H Vertical Operation H Vertical Operation

H XY Mode H XY Mode

H Tutorial: Measuring Signals provides stepĆbyĆstep instructions to H Tutorial: Measuring Signals provides stepĆbyĆstep instructions to
get you started making measurements quickly. get you started making measurements quickly.

222PS Operator Manual i 222PS Operator Manual i

 H Remote Communication provides information on RSĆ232 commuĆ H Remote Communication provides information on RSĆ232 commuĆ
nication procedures between the 222PS and a PC. nication procedures between the 222PS and a PC.

H Performance Verification describes the procedures necessary to H Performance Verification describes the procedures necessary to
verify that the 222PS is performing according to specifications. verify that the 222PS is performing according to specifications.

H Specifications provides complete specifications for the 222PS H Specifications provides complete specifications for the 222PS
PowerScout. PowerScout.

H Accessories describes the standard and optional accessories H Accessories describes the standard and optional accessories
available for the 222PS. available for the 222PS.

H Glossary defines various words used in the text. H Glossary defines various words used in the text.

H The Index helps you locate information quickly. H The Index helps you locate information quickly.

NOTE NOTE
If you have never used an oscilloscope before, please If you have never used an oscilloscope before, please
read the tutorial in Appendix A before using the 222PS. read the tutorial in Appendix A before using the 222PS.

ii Welcome ii Welcome
 Contents Contents

List of Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix List of Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii

Overview Overview
About the 222PS PowerScout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć1 About the 222PS PowerScout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2
Symbols and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2 Symbols and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć2
Specific Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3 Specific Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Ć3

At a Glance At a Glance
Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2
Vertical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3 Vertical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3
Trigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Trigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4
Horizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć5 Horizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć5
The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć6 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć6
Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć6 Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć6
Menus and Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć9 Menus and Menu Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć9
Top Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć11 Top Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć11
Side Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć13 Side Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć13
Rear Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć14 Rear Panel Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć14
The Tilt Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć16 The Tilt Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć16

In Detail In Detail
Acquisition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1 Acquisition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1
Kinds of Acquisition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1 Kinds of Acquisition Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1
Normal Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1 Normal Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1
Average Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1 Average Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1

222PS Operator Manual iii 222PS Operator Manual iii

 Envelope Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2 Envelope Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2
Continuous Envelope Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2 Continuous Envelope Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2
Selecting an Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć3 Selecting an Acquisition Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć3
Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 Auto Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5
Parameter Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 Parameter Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5
Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć5
Vertical Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 Vertical Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6
Horizontal Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 Horizontal Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6
Low and High Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6 Low and High Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9
Running the SelfĆCalibration Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9 Running the SelfĆCalibration Routine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć9
Capturing Random Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15 Capturing Random Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć15

Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17 Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17

Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17 Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17
Displaying a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18 Displaying a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18
Setting Channel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć19 Setting Channel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć19
The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21 The Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21
Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21 Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21
Displaying and Clearing the Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21 Displaying and Clearing the Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21
Inverting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć22 Inverting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć22
Varying the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć23 Varying the Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć23
Horizontal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć25 Horizontal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć25
Horizontal Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć25 Horizontal Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć25
Seconds per Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć26 Seconds per Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć26
Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć26 Aliasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć26
TimeĆBase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć27 TimeĆBase Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć27
Magnifying the Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć29 Magnifying the Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć29
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć31 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć31
Identifying the Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć31 Identifying the Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć31
Repackaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć33 Repackaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć33
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć35 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć35
Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć35 Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć35
Connecting the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć35 Connecting the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć35
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć37 Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć37

iv Contents iv Contents
 Charging the Battery Externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć37 Charging the Battery Externally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć37
Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć37 Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć37
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć39 Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć39
Storing the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć40 Storing the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć40
Deep Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć40 Deep Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć40
External Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć41 External Power Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć41
AC Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć41 AC Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć41
Other Sources of External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć42 Other Sources of External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć42
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć43 Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć43
Connecting the Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć44 Connecting the Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć44
Configuring the Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć45 Configuring the Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć45
Probe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć47 Probe Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć47
Saving and Recalling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć51 Saving and Recalling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć51
Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć51 Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć51
Saving a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć51 Saving a Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć51
Recalling a Saved Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć53 Recalling a Saved Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć53
Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć55 Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć55
Saving a Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć55 Saving a Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć55
Recalling a Saved Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć57 Recalling a Saved Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć57
Erasing a Saved Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć58 Erasing a Saved Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć58
Store Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć61 Store Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć61

Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć63 Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć63

The Trigger Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć63 The Trigger Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć63
Trigger Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć64 Trigger Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć64
External Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć65 External Triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć65
Motor Trigger Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67 Motor Trigger Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67
Triggering on Motor Drive Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67 Triggering on Motor Drive Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67
Triggering on 50/60 Hz Line Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67 Triggering on 50/60 Hz Line Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć67
Trigger Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69 Trigger Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69
Trigger Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69 Trigger Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69
Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69 Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć69
AutoĆLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć70 AutoĆLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć70
Trigger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć70 Trigger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć70
Trigger Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć71 Trigger Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć71
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72 Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72
AutoĆBaseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72 AutoĆBaseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72
AutoĆLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72 AutoĆLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć72

222PS Operator Manual v 222PS Operator Manual v

 SingleĆSequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć73 SingleĆSequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć73
Setting the Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć73 Setting the Trigger Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć73
Vertical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75 Vertical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75
Vertical Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75 Vertical Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75
Volts per Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć76 Volts per Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć76
Variable Volts per Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć76 Variable Volts per Division . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć76
XY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć79 XY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć79
Entering and Exiting XY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć79 Entering and Exiting XY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć79
Positioning XY Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć80 Positioning XY Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć80

Appendices Appendices
Appendix A: Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ1 Appendix A: Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ1
The Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ1 The Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ1
Measuring Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Measuring Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2
Measuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3 Measuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3
Using a Ground Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4 Using a Ground Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ4
Measuring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ5 Measuring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ5
Measuring RiseĆ or FallĆtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ7 Measuring RiseĆ or FallĆtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ7
Appendix B: Remote Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ9 Appendix B: Remote Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ9
Introductory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ9 Introductory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ9
Setting the Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ11 Setting the Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ11
Command Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13 Command Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13
Commands, Queries, and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13 Commands, Queries, and Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ13
FrontĆPanel Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ20 FrontĆPanel Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ20
Vertical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ20 Vertical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ20
SEC/DIV Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ22 SEC/DIV Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ22
Trigger Positions, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings AĆ24 Trigger Positions, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings AĆ24
Acquisition Mode and Miscellaneous Settings . . . . . . AĆ26 Acquisition Mode and Miscellaneous Settings . . . . . . AĆ26
RSĆ232 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ28 RSĆ232 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ28
Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ28 Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ28
Diagnostic Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ28 Diagnostic Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ28
Transfer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ30 Transfer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ30
Transfer to a Local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ30 Transfer to a Local PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ30
Transfer via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ30 Transfer via Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ30
RSĆ232 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ32 RSĆ232 Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ32

vi Contents vi Contents
 RSĆ232 Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ32 RSĆ232 Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ32
Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ32 Baud Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ32
Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33 Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33
Maximum Applied Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33 Maximum Applied Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33
Plotter/Printer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33 Plotter/Printer Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33
CAT200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33 CAT200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ33
RSĆ232 Interconnection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ34 RSĆ232 Interconnection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ34
Appendix C: Quick Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ37 Appendix C: Quick Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ37
General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ37 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ37
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ38 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ38
Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ39 Initial Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ39
Self Cal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ39 Self Cal Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ39
Autoset Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ41 Autoset Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ41
Appendix D: Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ43 Appendix D: Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ43
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ43 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ43
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ44 Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ44
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ47 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ47
Preliminaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ47 Preliminaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ47
Vertical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ48 Vertical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ48
Horizontal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ57 Horizontal Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ57
Trigger Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ60 Trigger Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ60
Appendix E: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ65 Appendix E: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ65
Nominal Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ65 Nominal Traits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ65
Warranted Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ71 Warranted Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ71
Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ76 Typical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ76
Appendix F: Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ79 Appendix F: Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ79
Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ79 Standard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ79
Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ80 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ80
Instrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81 Instrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81
External Power AC Adapter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81 External Power AC Adapter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81

222PS Operator Manual vii 222PS Operator Manual vii

Glossary & Index Glossary & Index
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GĆ1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GĆ1

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IĆ1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IĆ1

viii Contents viii Contents

 List of Illustrations List of Illustrations

Figure 2Ć1:ă222PS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2 Figure 2Ć1:ă222PS Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć2
Figure 2Ć2:ăVertical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3 Figure 2Ć2:ăVertical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć3
Figure 2Ć3:ăTrigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4 Figure 2Ć3:ăTrigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć4
Figure 2Ć4:ăHorizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć5 Figure 2Ć4:ăHorizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć5
Figure 2Ć5:ăVertical Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7 Figure 2Ć5:ăVertical Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć7
Figure 2Ć6:ăSaved Waveform Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć8 Figure 2Ć6:ăSaved Waveform Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć8
Figure 2Ć7:ăTrigger and Horizontal Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć9 Figure 2Ć7:ăTrigger and Horizontal Readouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć9
Figure 2Ć8:ăParts of a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć10 Figure 2Ć8:ăParts of a Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć10
Figure 2Ć9:ă222PS Top Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć11 Figure 2Ć9:ă222PS Top Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć11
Figure 2Ć10:ăSide of 222PS, Storage Pouch Removed . . . . . . 2Ć13 Figure 2Ć10:ăSide of 222PS, Storage Pouch Removed . . . . . . 2Ć13
Figure 2Ć11:ă222PS Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć14 Figure 2Ć11:ă222PS Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć14
Figure 2Ć12:ăThe 222PS With Tilt Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć16 Figure 2Ć12:ăThe 222PS With Tilt Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć16

Figure 3Ć1:ăNormal, Average, and Envelope Signals . . . . . . . . 3Ć3 Figure 3Ć1:ăNormal, Average, and Envelope Signals . . . . . . . . 3Ć3
Figure 3Ć2:ăThe Acquisition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć3 Figure 3Ć2:ăThe Acquisition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć3
Figure 3Ć3:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 Figure 3Ć3:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10
Figure 3Ć4:ăThe Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10 Figure 3Ć4:ăThe Calibration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć10
Figure 3Ć5:ăThe Ground External Trigger Calibration Menu . . . 3Ć12 Figure 3Ć5:ăThe Ground External Trigger Calibration Menu . . . 3Ć12
Figure 3Ć6:ăChannel One Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17 Figure 3Ć6:ăChannel One Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć17
Figure 3Ć7:ăThe Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18 Figure 3Ć7:ăThe Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć18
Figure 3Ć8:ăThe Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21 Figure 3Ć8:ăThe Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć21
Figure 3Ć9:ăNormal and Inverted Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć22 Figure 3Ć9:ăNormal and Inverted Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć22
Figure 3Ć10:ăThe Horizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć25 Figure 3Ć10:ăThe Horizontal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć25
Figure 3Ć11:ăAn Aliased Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć27 Figure 3Ć11:ăAn Aliased Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć27
Figure 3Ć12:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć32 Figure 3Ć12:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć32
Figure 3Ć13:ăXY Alignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć32 Figure 3Ć13:ăXY Alignment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć32
Figure 3Ć14:ăThe Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć33 Figure 3Ć14:ăThe Firmware Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć33
Figure 3Ć15:ăSide View Without Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć36 Figure 3Ć15:ăSide View Without Battery Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć36
Figure 3Ć16:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć38 Figure 3Ć16:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć38
Figure 3Ć17:ăThe Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć38 Figure 3Ć17:ăThe Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć38
Figure 3Ć18:ăSide View Showing Probe Connectors Figure 3Ć18:ăSide View Showing Probe Connectors
(Pouch Removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć44 (Pouch Removed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć44
Figure 3Ć19:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć45 Figure 3Ć19:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć45

222PS Operator Manual ix 222PS Operator Manual ix

 Figure 3Ć20:ăThe Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć46 Figure 3Ć20:ăThe Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć46
Figure 3Ć21:ăThe Probe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć46 Figure 3Ć21:ăThe Probe Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć46
Figure 3Ć22:ăProbe and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć48 Figure 3Ć22:ăProbe and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć48
Figure 3Ć23:ăSaved Waveforms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć52 Figure 3Ć23:ăSaved Waveforms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć52
Figure 3Ć24:ăSaved Waveform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć53 Figure 3Ć24:ăSaved Waveform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć53
Figure 3Ć25:ăThe Recall Waveforms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć54 Figure 3Ć25:ăThe Recall Waveforms Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć54
Figure 3Ć26:ăThe Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć56 Figure 3Ć26:ăThe Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć56
Figure 3Ć27:ăThe Save Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć56 Figure 3Ć27:ăThe Save Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć56
Figure 3Ć28:ăThe Recall Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć57 Figure 3Ć28:ăThe Recall Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć57
Figure 3Ć29:ăThe Erase Setups Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć59 Figure 3Ć29:ăThe Erase Setups Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć59
Figure 3Ć30:ăHorizontal Readouts in Store Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć61 Figure 3Ć30:ăHorizontal Readouts in Store Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć61
Figure 3Ć31:ăTrigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć63 Figure 3Ć31:ăTrigger Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć63
Figure 3Ć32:ăThe Trigger Source Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć64 Figure 3Ć32:ăThe Trigger Source Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć64
Figure 3Ć33:ăRear Panel External Trigger Connectors . . . . . . . 3Ć65 Figure 3Ć33:ăRear Panel External Trigger Connectors . . . . . . . 3Ć65
Figure 3Ć34:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a Low Region 3Ć68 Figure 3Ć34:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a Low Region 3Ć68
Figure 3Ć35:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a High Region 3Ć68 Figure 3Ć35:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a High Region 3Ć68
Figure 3Ć36:ăTrigger Position Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć71 Figure 3Ć36:ăTrigger Position Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć71
Figure 3Ć37:ăThe Trigger Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć74 Figure 3Ć37:ăThe Trigger Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć74
Figure 3Ć38:ăThe Vertical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75 Figure 3Ć38:ăThe Vertical Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć75
Figure 3Ć39:ăThe Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć79 Figure 3Ć39:ăThe Display Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć79

Figure AĆ1:ăThe Screen Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2 Figure AĆ1:ăThe Screen Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ2
Figure AĆ2:ăMeasuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3 Figure AĆ2:ăMeasuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ3
Figure AĆ3:ăMeasuring With Respect to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ5 Figure AĆ3:ăMeasuring With Respect to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ5
Figure AĆ4:ăMeasuring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ6 Figure AĆ4:ăMeasuring Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ6
Figure AĆ5:ăMeasuring RiseĆTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ8 Figure AĆ5:ăMeasuring RiseĆTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ8
Figure AĆ6:ăRSĆ232 Communications Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ10 Figure AĆ6:ăRSĆ232 Communications Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ10
Figure AĆ7:ăCommunication Between the 222PS and a PC . . AĆ10 Figure AĆ7:ăCommunication Between the 222PS and a PC . . AĆ10
Figure AĆ8:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ11 Figure AĆ8:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ11
Figure AĆ9:ăThe Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12 Figure AĆ9:ăThe Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12
Figure AĆ10:ăThe Baud Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12 Figure AĆ10:ăThe Baud Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ12
Figure AĆ11:ăCommands, Queries, and Responses . . . . . . . . . AĆ14 Figure AĆ11:ăCommands, Queries, and Responses . . . . . . . . . AĆ14
Figure AĆ12:ăRSĆ232 Interconnection Cable Pin Wiring . . . . . . AĆ34 Figure AĆ12:ăRSĆ232 Interconnection Cable Pin Wiring . . . . . . AĆ34
Figure AĆ13:ăInitial Setup for Vertical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ49 Figure AĆ13:ăInitial Setup for Vertical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ49
Figure AĆ14:ăSetup for Input Coupling Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ52 Figure AĆ14:ăSetup for Input Coupling Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ52
Figure AĆ15:ăSetup for Probe Compensation Check . . . . . . . . AĆ55 Figure AĆ15:ăSetup for Probe Compensation Check . . . . . . . . AĆ55
Figure AĆ16:ăSetup for Analog Bandwidth Check . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ56 Figure AĆ16:ăSetup for Analog Bandwidth Check . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ56

x Contents x Contents
 Figure AĆ17:ăSetup for Horizontal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ58 Figure AĆ17:ăSetup for Horizontal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ58
Figure AĆ18:ăSetup for Trigger Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ61 Figure AĆ18:ăSetup for Trigger Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ61
Figure AĆ19:ăSetup for External Trigger Sensitivity Check . . . . AĆ63 Figure AĆ19:ăSetup for External Trigger Sensitivity Check . . . . AĆ63
Figure AĆ20:ăMaximum NormalĆMode Voltage Versus Figure AĆ20:ăMaximum NormalĆMode Voltage Versus
Frequency Derating Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ67 Frequency Derating Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ67
Figure AĆ21:ăMaximum CommonĆMode Voltage Versus Figure AĆ21:ăMaximum CommonĆMode Voltage Versus
Frequency Derating Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ68 Frequency Derating Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ68

222PS Operator Manual xi 222PS Operator Manual xi

xii Contents xii Contents
 List of Tables List of Tables

TableĂ3Ć1:ă Auto Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7 TableĂ3Ć1:ă Auto Setup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć7
TableĂ3Ć2:ă TimeĆBase Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć28 TableĂ3Ć2:ă TimeĆBase Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć28
TableĂ3Ć3:ă AutoĆLevel Trigger Interval Time Limits . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć73 TableĂ3Ć3:ă AutoĆLevel Trigger Interval Time Limits . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć73

TableĂAĆ1:ăBUT Button Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ15 TableĂAĆ1:ăBUT Button Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ15

TableĂAĆ2:ăDAC Code and Value Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ17 TableĂAĆ2:ăDAC Code and Value Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ17
TableĂAĆ3:ăChannel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ21 TableĂAĆ3:ăChannel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ21
TableĂAĆ4:ăSecondsĆperĆDivision and Misc. Settings . . . . . . . . AĆ23 TableĂAĆ4:ăSecondsĆperĆDivision and Misc. Settings . . . . . . . . AĆ23
TableĂAĆ5:ăTrigger Position, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings AĆ25 TableĂAĆ5:ăTrigger Position, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings AĆ25
TableĂAĆ6:ăAcquisition Mode and Misc. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ27 TableĂAĆ6:ăAcquisition Mode and Misc. Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ27
TableĂAĆ7:ă222PS Interconnect Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ34 TableĂAĆ7:ă222PS Interconnect Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ34
TableĂAĆ8:ăTest Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ45 TableĂAĆ8:ăTest Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ45
TableĂAĆ9:ăVoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ53 TableĂAĆ9:ăVoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ53
TableĂAĆ10:ăNominal TraitsĊVertical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ65 TableĂAĆ10:ăNominal TraitsĊVertical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ65
TableĂAĆ11:ăNominal TraitsĊHorizontal System . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ68 TableĂAĆ11:ăNominal TraitsĊHorizontal System . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ68
TableĂAĆ12:ăNominal TraitsĊTriggering System . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ69 TableĂAĆ12:ăNominal TraitsĊTriggering System . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ69
TableĂAĆ13:ăNominal TraitsĊDisplay System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ69 TableĂAĆ13:ăNominal TraitsĊDisplay System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ69
TableĂAĆ14:ăNominal TraitsĊPower System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ70 TableĂAĆ14:ăNominal TraitsĊPower System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ70
TableĂAĆ15:ăNominal TraitsĊCommunications Interface . . . . . AĆ70 TableĂAĆ15:ăNominal TraitsĊCommunications Interface . . . . . AĆ70
TableĂAĆ16:ăNominal TraitsĊMechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ71 TableĂAĆ16:ăNominal TraitsĊMechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ71
TableĂAĆ17:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊVertical System . . . . AĆ72 TableĂAĆ17:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊVertical System . . . . AĆ72
TableĂAĆ18:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System . AĆ74 TableĂAĆ18:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System . AĆ74
TableĂAĆ19:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊTriggering System . . AĆ74 TableĂAĆ19:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊTriggering System . . AĆ74
TableĂAĆ20:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊ TableĂAĆ20:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊ
ąąąEnvironmental, Safety, and Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ75 ąąąEnvironmental, Safety, and Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ75
TableĂAĆ21:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊVertical System . . . . . . . AĆ76 TableĂAĆ21:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊVertical System . . . . . . . AĆ76
TableĂAĆ22:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System . . . . . AĆ77 TableĂAĆ22:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System . . . . . AĆ77
TableĂAĆ23:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊTriggering System . . . . . AĆ77 TableĂAĆ23:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊTriggering System . . . . . AĆ77
TableĂAĆ24:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊPower System . . . . . . . . AĆ77 TableĂAĆ24:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊPower System . . . . . . . . AĆ77
TableĂAĆ25:ăStandard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ79 TableĂAĆ25:ăStandard Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ79
TableĂAĆ26:ăOptional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ80 TableĂAĆ26:ăOptional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ80

222PS Operator Manual xiii 222PS Operator Manual xiii

 TableĂAĆ27:ăInstrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81 TableĂAĆ27:ăInstrument Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81
TableĂAĆ28:ăExternal Power AC Adapter Options . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81 TableĂAĆ28:ăExternal Power AC Adapter Options . . . . . . . . . . . AĆ81

xiv Contents xiv Contents

Overview Overview
 Overview Overview
This section summarizes the product features and safety precautions This section summarizes the product features and safety precautions
of the 222PS PowerScout. of the 222PS PowerScout.

About the 222PS PowerScout About the 222PS PowerScout

The Tektronix 222PS PowerScout is a portable digitizing oscilloscope. The Tektronix 222PS PowerScout is a portable digitizing oscilloscope.
It has two fully isolated, independently floatable channels rated to It has two fully isolated, independently floatable channels rated to
600 VACRMS. The 222PS/224 digitizing oscilloscopes are the only 600 VACRMS. The 222PS/224 digitizing oscilloscopes are the only
oscilloscopes in the world with this feature. oscilloscopes in the world with this feature.

The 222PS also has these features. The 222PS also has these features.

H light weight with a battery power source for field operations H light weight with a battery power source for field operations

H automatic setup button H automatic setup button

H automatic triggering modes H automatic triggering modes

H averaging and enveloping acquisition modes H averaging and enveloping acquisition modes

H remote operation capabilities via the RSĆ232 communications port H remote operation capabilities via the RSĆ232 communications port

H internal memory for saving up to four waveforms and four instruĆ H internal memory for saving up to four waveforms and four instruĆ
ment setups ment setups

H DCĆtoĆ10ĂMHz signal bandwidth H DCĆtoĆ10ĂMHz signal bandwidth

H 10ĂMS/s digitizing rate H 10ĂMS/s digitizing rate

H 1 MHz single pass storage bandwidth H 1 MHz single pass storage bandwidth

H Motor trigger H Motor trigger

If you need more information about your Tektronix 222PS PowerScout If you need more information about your Tektronix 222PS PowerScout
or other Tektronix products, contact the nearest Tektronix sales office or other Tektronix products, contact the nearest Tektronix sales office
or distributor, consult the Tektronix product catalog, or, in the U. S., call or distributor, consult the Tektronix product catalog, or, in the U. S., call
the Tektronix National Marketing Center tollĆfree at 1Ć800Ć426Ć2200. the Tektronix National Marketing Center tollĆfree at 1Ć800Ć426Ć2200.

222PS Operator Manual 1Ć1 222PS Operator Manual 1Ć1

Overview Overview

Safety Safety
You may be eager to begin using your Tektronix 222PS but please take You may be eager to begin using your Tektronix 222PS but please take
a moment to review these safety precautions. We provide them for a moment to review these safety precautions. We provide them for
your protection and to prevent damage to the 222PS PowerScout. This your protection and to prevent damage to the 222PS PowerScout. This
safety information applies to all operators and service personnel. safety information applies to all operators and service personnel.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS, do not To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS, do not
apply more than 850ĂV peak between probe tip and earth apply more than 850ĂV peak between probe tip and earth
ground, between probe tip and probe common, or beĆ ground, between probe tip and probe common, or beĆ
tween probe common and earth ground. tween probe common and earth ground.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid injury, use caution when working on equipment To avoid injury, use caution when working on equipment
with voltages above 42ĂV peak. Such voltages pose a with voltages above 42ĂV peak. Such voltages pose a
shock hazard. shock hazard.

WARNING WARNING

Do not float the external trigger common connector, the Do not float the external trigger common connector, the
RSĆ232 communications port, or the external power input RSĆ232 communications port, or the external power input
above 42ĂV peak. These inputs are not electrically isolated above 42ĂV peak. These inputs are not electrically isolated
from each other. from each other.

Symbols and Terms Symbols and Terms

These two terms appear in manuals: These two terms appear in manuals:

H statements identify conditions or practices that could H statements identify conditions or practices that could
result in damage to the equipment or other property. result in damage to the equipment or other property.

H statements identify conditions or practices that could H statements identify conditions or practices that could
result in personal injury or loss of life. result in personal injury or loss of life.

These two terms appear on equipment: These two terms appear on equipment:

1Ć2 Overview 1Ć2 Overview

 Overview Overview

H CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately H CAUTION indicates a personal injury hazard not immediately
accessible as one reads the marking or a hazard to property accessible as one reads the marking or a hazard to property
including the equipment itself. including the equipment itself.

H DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessiĆ H DANGER indicates a personal injury hazard immediately accessiĆ
ble as one reads the marking. ble as one reads the marking.

This symbol appears in manuals: This symbol appears in manuals:

StaticĆSensitive Devices StaticĆSensitive Devices

These symbols appear on equipment: These symbols appear on equipment:

DANGER Protective ATTENTION DANGER Protective ATTENTION

High Voltage ground (earth) Refer to High Voltage ground (earth) Refer to
terminal manual terminal manual

Specific Precautions Specific Precautions

Observe all these precautions to ensure your personal safety and to Observe all these precautions to ensure your personal safety and to
prevent damage either to the 222PS or to equipment connected to it. prevent damage either to the 222PS or to equipment connected to it.

Power Source Ċ The 222PS can use its selfĆcontained sealed lead Power Source Ċ The 222PS can use its selfĆcontained sealed lead
acid battery as a power source. It can also operate using power acid battery as a power source. It can also operate using power
supplied to the external power input. Power supplied to this input must supplied to the external power input. Power supplied to this input must
be 12 to 28ĂVDC or 16 to 20ĂVACRMS. Do not force either external be 12 to 28ĂVDC or 16 to 20ĂVACRMS. Do not force either external
power conductor negative by more than 0.5ĂV with respect to chassis power conductor negative by more than 0.5ĂV with respect to chassis
ground. Both conductors of the external power input are fused interĆ ground. Both conductors of the external power input are fused interĆ
nally. These fuses are not user accessible. nally. These fuses are not user accessible.

You can operate the instrument with external power operation from You can operate the instrument with external power operation from
local 110ĂV or 240ĂV power supply using the appropriate external local 110ĂV or 240ĂV power supply using the appropriate external
power AC adapter. Use only external power AC adapters specified for power AC adapter. Use only external power AC adapters specified for
this instrument. this instrument.

222PS Operator Manual 1Ć3 222PS Operator Manual 1Ć3

Overview Overview

Grounding the PowerScout Ċ The channel 1 and channel 2 Grounding the PowerScout Ċ The channel 1 and channel 2
measurement inputs of the 222PS are doubly insulated from each measurement inputs of the 222PS are doubly insulated from each
other and all other accessible portions of the instrument cabinet. It is other and all other accessible portions of the instrument cabinet. It is
not necessary to ground the instrument to avoid electric shock. not necessary to ground the instrument to avoid electric shock.

Fuse Ċ The 222PS has no userĆreplaceable fuses. Fuse Ċ The 222PS has no userĆreplaceable fuses.

Do Not Disassemble the Cabinet Ċ To avoid personal injury, do Do Not Disassemble the Cabinet Ċ To avoid personal injury, do
not operate the instrument without a properly assembled cabinet. The not operate the instrument without a properly assembled cabinet. The
cabinet of the instrument should be disassembled only by qualified cabinet of the instrument should be disassembled only by qualified
service personnel. service personnel.

Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres Ċ The 222PS Do Not Operate in Explosive Atmospheres Ċ The 222PS
provides no explosion protection from static discharges or arcing provides no explosion protection from static discharges or arcing
components. Do not operate the 222PS in an atmosphere of explosive components. Do not operate the 222PS in an atmosphere of explosive
gasses. gasses.

Electric Overload Ċ Never apply a voltage to a probe or connector Electric Overload Ċ Never apply a voltage to a probe or connector
on the 222PS that is outside the range specified for that probe or on the 222PS that is outside the range specified for that probe or
connector. connector.

1Ć4 Overview 1Ć4 Overview

At a Glance At a Glance
 At a Glance At a Glance
This chapter describes the controls, connectors, and display readouts This chapter describes the controls, connectors, and display readouts
of the 222PS PowerScout. It is intended to help orient you and to of the 222PS PowerScout. It is intended to help orient you and to
provide basic information. For more detailed operating instructions for provide basic information. For more detailed operating instructions for
various features, see the appropriate section in the chapter entitled In various features, see the appropriate section in the chapter entitled In
Detail. Detail.

This section provides page references to the In Detail chapter for This section provides page references to the In Detail chapter for
further information. further information.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć1 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć1

At a Glance At a Glance

Front Panel Controls Front Panel Controls

The front panel for the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in The front panel for the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in
Figure 2Ć1. Figure 2Ć1.

1 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

6 5 6 5

Figure 2Ć1:ă222PS Front Panel Figure 2Ć1:ă222PS Front Panel

1. The display area includes the screen and associated buttons. The 1. The display area includes the screen and associated buttons. The
screen shows signal traces, readouts, and menu items. Buttons screen shows signal traces, readouts, and menu items. Buttons
along the side of the screen allow you to manipulate menus. See along the side of the screen allow you to manipulate menus. See
page 2Ć6 for a more complete description of the display area. page 2Ć6 for a more complete description of the display area.

2. The vertical controls allow you to manipulate the vertical aspects 2. The vertical controls allow you to manipulate the vertical aspects
of your signal. See page 3Ć77 for a more complete description of of your signal. See page 3Ć77 for a more complete description of
the vertical controls. the vertical controls.

3. The trigger controls allow you to manipulate the aspects of your 3. The trigger controls allow you to manipulate the aspects of your
signal having to do with triggering. See page 3Ć63 for a more signal having to do with triggering. See page 3Ć63 for a more
complete description of the trigger controls. complete description of the trigger controls.

4. The horizontal controls allow you to manipulate the horizontal 4. The horizontal controls allow you to manipulate the horizontal
aspects of your signal. See page 3Ć25 for more information on the aspects of your signal. See page 3Ć25 for more information on the
horizontal controls. horizontal controls.

2Ć2 At a Glance 2Ć2 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

5. AUTO SETUP allows you to set up the instrument with the push 5. AUTO SETUP allows you to set up the instrument with the push
of a single button. Press this button for a quick, informative of a single button. Press this button for a quick, informative
display of any signal between 20 Hz and 1 MHz. See page 3Ć5 for display of any signal between 20 Hz and 1 MHz. See page 3Ć5 for
more information on the AUTO SETUP button. more information on the AUTO SETUP button.

6. The ON button toggles the instrument on or off. The instrument 6. The ON button toggles the instrument on or off. The instrument
beeps when it is turned on. beeps when it is turned on.

Vertical Controls Vertical Controls

Figure 2Ć2 shows the vertical controls that are located on the front Figure 2Ć2 shows the vertical controls that are located on the front
panel. panel.

3 2 1 3 2 1

Figure 2Ć2:ăVertical Controls Figure 2Ć2:ăVertical Controls

1. The outer knob sets the volts per division, which is the vertical 1. The outer knob sets the volts per division, which is the vertical
scale of your display. Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the scale of your display. Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the
volts per division and counterclockwise to increase the volts per volts per division and counterclockwise to increase the volts per
division. See page 3Ć78 for more information on setting the volts division. See page 3Ć78 for more information on setting the volts
per division. per division.

2. The inner knob sets the vertical position of the signal. Turn the 2. The inner knob sets the vertical position of the signal. Turn the
knob clockwise to move the signal towards the top of the screen knob clockwise to move the signal towards the top of the screen
and counterclockwise to move the signal towards the bottom of and counterclockwise to move the signal towards the bottom of
the screen. For more information on setting the vertical position the screen. For more information on setting the vertical position
see page 3Ć77. see page 3Ć77.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć3 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć3

At a Glance At a Glance

You can also use this knob to change the size of a signal to an You can also use this knob to change the size of a signal to an
arbitrary number of divisions. To do so, see page 3Ć78. arbitrary number of divisions. To do so, see page 3Ć78.

3. The 222PS can display signals acquired through either or both of 3. The 222PS can display signals acquired through either or both of
its two channels. The channel selector buttons allow you to select its two channels. The channel selector buttons allow you to select
the channel that is affected by changes to the controls. With these the channel that is affected by changes to the controls. With these
buttons you can also select channel coupling or turn a channel off buttons you can also select channel coupling or turn a channel off
so that the signal it is measuring is not displayed. For more so that the signal it is measuring is not displayed. For more
information on channels, see page 3Ć17. information on channels, see page 3Ć17.

Trigger Controls Trigger Controls

The trigger controls are on the front panel of the 222PS PowerScout. The trigger controls are on the front panel of the 222PS PowerScout.
They appear as shown in Figure 2Ć3. They appear as shown in Figure 2Ć3.

1 2 1 2

6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3

Figure 2Ć3:ăTrigger Controls Figure 2Ć3:ăTrigger Controls

1. When you push the button labeled SLOPE, you toggle between a 1. When you push the button labeled SLOPE, you toggle between a
positiveĆ and negativeĆtrigger slope. For more details, see positiveĆ and negativeĆtrigger slope. For more details, see
page 3Ć70. page 3Ć70.

2. When you push the button labeled MODE, you invoke a menu 2. When you push the button labeled MODE, you invoke a menu
that allows you to specify the trigger mode. For a complete that allows you to specify the trigger mode. For a complete
explanation of trigger modes, see page 3Ć72. explanation of trigger modes, see page 3Ć72.

2Ć4 At a Glance 2Ć4 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

3. When you push the button labeled SOURCE, you invoke a menu 3. When you push the button labeled SOURCE, you invoke a menu
that allows you to specify the trigger source. For a complete that allows you to specify the trigger source. For a complete
explanation of trigger sources, see page 3Ć64. explanation of trigger sources, see page 3Ć64.

4. The light labeled TRIG'D turns on when the instrument is trigĆ 4. The light labeled TRIG'D turns on when the instrument is trigĆ
gered. See page 3Ć63 for more details. gered. See page 3Ć63 for more details.

5. The inner button, labeled AUTOLVL: PUSH, sets the trigger level 5. The inner button, labeled AUTOLVL: PUSH, sets the trigger level
automatically. When you push it, it determines the peak values automatically. When you push it, it determines the peak values
and sets the trigger level to the midpoint of the signal. For more and sets the trigger level to the midpoint of the signal. For more
information on this button, see page 3Ć71. information on this button, see page 3Ć71.

6. The outer knob sets the trigger level Ċ the threshold voltage the 6. The outer knob sets the trigger level Ċ the threshold voltage the
signal must cross in order to trigger the instrument. Turn it clockĆ signal must cross in order to trigger the instrument. Turn it clockĆ
wise to raise the trigger level; turn it counterclockwise to lower the wise to raise the trigger level; turn it counterclockwise to lower the
trigger level. For more information on the trigger level see trigger level. For more information on the trigger level see
page 3Ć70. page 3Ć70.

Horizontal Controls Horizontal Controls

The horizontal controls are on the front panel of the 222PS PowerScĆ The horizontal controls are on the front panel of the 222PS PowerScĆ
out. They appear as shown in Figure 2Ć4. out. They appear as shown in Figure 2Ć4.

1 1

2 2

Figure 2Ć4:ăHorizontal Controls Figure 2Ć4:ăHorizontal Controls

1. The outer knob sets the seconds per division. This is the horizonĆ 1. The outer knob sets the seconds per division. This is the horizonĆ
tal scale of your display. Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the tal scale of your display. Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the
seconds per division; turn it counterclockwise to increase the seconds per division; turn it counterclockwise to increase the
seconds per division. Setting the seconds per division is disĆ seconds per division. Setting the seconds per division is disĆ
cussed in more detail on page 3Ć26. cussed in more detail on page 3Ć26.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć5 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć5

At a Glance At a Glance

2. The inner knob sets the horizontal position of the signal. Turn the 2. The inner knob sets the horizontal position of the signal. Turn the
knob clockwise to move the signal to the right. Turn it counterĆ knob clockwise to move the signal to the right. Turn it counterĆ
clockwise to move the signal to the left. For more information on clockwise to move the signal to the left. For more information on
setting the horizontal position see page 3Ć25. setting the horizontal position see page 3Ć25.

You can also use this knob to magnify the signal by ten times. To You can also use this knob to magnify the signal by ten times. To
do so, see page 3Ć29. do so, see page 3Ć29.

The Display The Display

The 222PS display shows waveforms that represent electrical signals. The 222PS display shows waveforms that represent electrical signals.
However, it also shows two other kinds of informationĊreadouts and However, it also shows two other kinds of informationĊreadouts and
menus. menus.

Readouts Readouts
Readouts are numeric or symbolic information associated with a Readouts are numeric or symbolic information associated with a
signal. signal.

The 222PS displays readouts at three places on the screen: along the The 222PS displays readouts at three places on the screen: along the
top, along the bottom, and slightly above the bottom. top, along the bottom, and slightly above the bottom.

Readouts along the top show information associated with the vertical Readouts along the top show information associated with the vertical
controls. Readouts along the bottom show information associated with controls. Readouts along the bottom show information associated with
the trigger and horizontal controls. The readouts just above them show the trigger and horizontal controls. The readouts just above them show
information associated with saved waveforms. Figures 2Ć5, 2Ć6, and information associated with saved waveforms. Figures 2Ć5, 2Ć6, and
2Ć7 show these readouts. 2Ć7 show these readouts.

Vertical Readouts Ċ Figure 2Ć5 shows the vertical readouts along Vertical Readouts Ċ Figure 2Ć5 shows the vertical readouts along
the top of the display. The readouts on the left refer to channel 1. The the top of the display. The readouts on the left refer to channel 1. The
readouts on the right refer to channel 2. readouts on the right refer to channel 2.

2Ć6 At a Glance 2Ć6 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

1 2 3 1 2 3

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

7 6 5 4 7 6 5 4

Figure 2Ć5:ăVertical Readouts Figure 2Ć5:ăVertical Readouts

1. The > indicates that the waveform is uncalibrated. For more 1. The > indicates that the waveform is uncalibrated. For more
information on uncalibrated waveforms, see page 3Ć78. information on uncalibrated waveforms, see page 3Ć78.

2. The ~ indicates AC coupling. For more information on coupling, 2. The ~ indicates AC coupling. For more information on coupling,
see page 3Ć19. see page 3Ć19.

A indicates ground coupling. A indicates ground coupling.

3. This is the channel 2 coupling. The = indicates DC coupling. 3. This is the channel 2 coupling. The = indicates DC coupling.

4. The box around the channel information indicates that this chanĆ 4. The box around the channel information indicates that this chanĆ
nel is selected. nel is selected.

5. This number is the volts per division for channel 2 Ċ its vertical 5. This number is the volts per division for channel 2 Ċ its vertical
scaling. For more details on vertical scaling, see page 3Ć78. scaling. For more details on vertical scaling, see page 3Ć78.

6. This number is volts per division for channel 1. 6. This number is volts per division for channel 1.

NOTE NOTE
If either channel is off, the voltsĆperĆdivision number is If either channel is off, the voltsĆperĆdivision number is
replaced by an OFF. replaced by an OFF.

7. The downwardĆpointing arrow indicates that the channel is 7. The downwardĆpointing arrow indicates that the channel is
inverted. For more information on inverting a channel, see inverted. For more information on inverting a channel, see
page 3Ć22. page 3Ć22.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć7 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć7

At a Glance At a Glance

Saved Waveform Readouts Ċ Figure 2Ć6 shows the saved Saved Waveform Readouts Ċ Figure 2Ć6 shows the saved
waveform readouts above the bottom of the display. The readouts refer waveform readouts above the bottom of the display. The readouts refer
to the last saved waveform displayed. For more information on saved to the last saved waveform displayed. For more information on saved
waveforms, see page 3Ć51. waveforms, see page 3Ć51.

1 2 1 2

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

5 4 3 5 4 3

Figure 2Ć6:ăSaved Waveform Readouts Figure 2Ć6:ăSaved Waveform Readouts

1. This indicates that the waveform is uncalibrated. For more inforĆ 1. This indicates that the waveform is uncalibrated. For more inforĆ
mation on uncalibrated waveforms see page 3Ć78. mation on uncalibrated waveforms see page 3Ć78.

2. This is the channel coupling for the saved waveform. For more 2. This is the channel coupling for the saved waveform. For more
information on coupling see page 3Ć19. information on coupling see page 3Ć19.

3. This is the seconds per division setting for the saved waveform. 3. This is the seconds per division setting for the saved waveform.

4. This is the volts per division setting for the saved waveform. 4. This is the volts per division setting for the saved waveform.

5. This is the memory location to which the waveform was saved. In 5. This is the memory location to which the waveform was saved. In
this case, the waveform is saved in memory location 1. See page this case, the waveform is saved in memory location 1. See page
3Ć51. 3Ć51.

Trigger and Horizontal Readouts Ċ Figure 2Ć7 shows the Trigger and Horizontal Readouts Ċ Figure 2Ć7 shows the
horizontal and trigger readouts along the bottom of the display. horizontal and trigger readouts along the bottom of the display.

2Ć8 At a Glance 2Ć8 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

1 2 1 2

5 4 3 5 4 3

Figure 2Ć7:ăTrigger and Horizontal Readouts Figure 2Ć7:ăTrigger and Horizontal Readouts

1. The second from the left readout is the trigger slope. A + indiĆ 1. The second from the left readout is the trigger slope. A + indiĆ
cates that triggering occurs on a rising edge. A - indicates that cates that triggering occurs on a rising edge. A - indicates that
triggering occurs on a falling edge. For more information on triggering occurs on a falling edge. For more information on
trigger slope, see page 3Ć70. trigger slope, see page 3Ć70.

2. The second from the right readout is the seconds per division Ċ 2. The second from the right readout is the seconds per division Ċ
the horizontal scale factor. For more information on horizontal the horizontal scale factor. For more information on horizontal
scaling, see page 3Ć26. scaling, see page 3Ć26.

3. At the right is the magnification indicator. For more details on the 3. At the right is the magnification indicator. For more details on the
magnification feature, see page 3Ć29. magnification feature, see page 3Ć29.

4. The middle readout indicates that the instrument is in store mode. 4. The middle readout indicates that the instrument is in store mode.
For more information on store mode, see page 3Ć61. For more information on store mode, see page 3Ć61.

5. At the left is the trigger level in volts. For more details on trigger 5. At the left is the trigger level in volts. For more details on trigger
level see page 3Ć70. level see page 3Ć70.

Menus and Menu Buttons Menus and Menu Buttons

Menus are lists of choices that you can select in order to perform some Menus are lists of choices that you can select in order to perform some
action, such as placing the instrument in XY mode or turning off the action, such as placing the instrument in XY mode or turning off the
timeĆout feature. timeĆout feature.

A number of buttons on the front and top panels of the 222PS invoke A number of buttons on the front and top panels of the 222PS invoke
menus when pressed. When a menu is on the display, you can select menus when pressed. When a menu is on the display, you can select
one of its items to perform an action. Figure 2Ć8 illustrates the parts of one of its items to perform an action. Figure 2Ć8 illustrates the parts of
a menu. a menu.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć9 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć9

At a Glance At a Glance

1 1
4 NAME: CHOICE 1 4 NAME: CHOICE 1

CHOICE 2 CHOICE 2
3 2 3 2
CHOICE 3 CHOICE 3

CHOICE 4 CHOICE 4

Figure 2Ć8:ăParts of a Menu Figure 2Ć8:ăParts of a Menu

1. The button labeled CLEAR erases the menu from the display. 1. The button labeled CLEAR erases the menu from the display.

2. The menu buttons are next to the screen, along its right edge. 2. The menu buttons are next to the screen, along its right edge.
Pressing the button next to a menu item performs the action Pressing the button next to a menu item performs the action
represented by that item. represented by that item.

3. The menu items appear along the right edge of the display. Up to 3. The menu items appear along the right edge of the display. Up to
four items can appear on a menu. Each represents a possible four items can appear on a menu. Each represents a possible
action you can perform. action you can perform.

4. The name of the menu appears at the top left of the display, 4. The name of the menu appears at the top left of the display,
followed by a colon. followed by a colon.

2Ć10 At a Glance 2Ć10 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

Top Panel Controls Top Panel Controls

The top panel for the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in FigĆ The top panel for the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in FigĆ
ure 2Ć9. ure 2Ć9.

1 2 3 1 2 3

8 8

7 7

6 5 4 6 5 4

Figure 2Ć9:ă222PS Top Panel Figure 2Ć9:ă222PS Top Panel

1. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to recall 1. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to recall
saved waveforms. See page 3Ć53. saved waveforms. See page 3Ć53.

2. Pressing this button toggles the instrument in or out of store 2. Pressing this button toggles the instrument in or out of store
mode. For more information about store mode, see page 3Ć61. mode. For more information about store mode, see page 3Ć61.

3. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to specify the 3. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to specify the
acquisition mode of the instrument. For more information about acquisition mode of the instrument. For more information about
acquisition modes, see page 3Ć1. acquisition modes, see page 3Ć1.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć11 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć11

At a Glance At a Glance

4. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to specify 4. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to specify
whether to invert a channel, display signals in XY mode, or display whether to invert a channel, display signals in XY mode, or display
signal readouts. For more information about inverting channels, signal readouts. For more information about inverting channels,
see page 3Ć22. For more information about XY mode, see see page 3Ć22. For more information about XY mode, see
page 3Ć81. For more information about displaying or clearing page 3Ć81. For more information about displaying or clearing
signal readouts, see page 3Ć21. signal readouts, see page 3Ć21.

5. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to execute a 5. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to execute a
variety of special functions. In some cases, you may execute variety of special functions. In some cases, you may execute
items from two or three layers of menus. items from two or three layers of menus.

H You can check the display alignment and view the instrument H You can check the display alignment and view the instrument
identification and firmware number. See page 3Ć9. identification and firmware number. See page 3Ć9.

H You can start selfĆcalibration routines for either channel or the H You can start selfĆcalibration routines for either channel or the
external trigger input. See page 3Ć9. external trigger input. See page 3Ć9.

H You can enable or disable the timeĆout feature, set the baud H You can enable or disable the timeĆout feature, set the baud
rate, activate the modem, or select different probe types. For rate, activate the modem, or select different probe types. For
more information about the timeĆout feature, see page 3Ć37. more information about the timeĆout feature, see page 3Ć37.
For more information about setting the baud rate or activating For more information about setting the baud rate or activating
the modem, see page AĆ11. For more information about the modem, see page AĆ11. For more information about
configuring the 222PS for the correct probes, see page 3Ć45. configuring the 222PS for the correct probes, see page 3Ć45.

H You can enable or disable MOTOR TRIG, which places a H You can enable or disable MOTOR TRIG, which places a
special filter in the trigger path to allow triggering on motor special filter in the trigger path to allow triggering on motor
drive signals that are pulseĆwidth modulated and on 50/60 Hz drive signals that are pulseĆwidth modulated and on 50/60 Hz
line signals. See page NO TAG. line signals. See page NO TAG.

6. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to specify the 6. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to specify the
trigger position. See page 3Ć71. trigger position. See page 3Ć71.

7. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to save or 7. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to save or
recall frontĆpanel setups. See page 3Ć55. recall frontĆpanel setups. See page 3Ć55.

8. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to save 8. Pressing this button invokes a menu that allows you to save
waveforms. See page 3Ć51. waveforms. See page 3Ć51.

2Ć12 At a Glance 2Ć12 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

Side Connectors Side Connectors

The right side of the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in FigĆ The right side of the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in FigĆ
ure 2Ć10. ure 2Ć10.

2 1 2 1

3 3

Figure 2Ć10:ăSide of 222PS, Storage Pouch Removed Figure 2Ć10:ăSide of 222PS, Storage Pouch Removed

1. This is the probe connector for channel 1. 1. This is the probe connector for channel 1.

2. This is the probe connector for channel 2. 2. This is the probe connector for channel 2.

3. This is the battery connection. See page 3Ć35 for more information 3. This is the battery connection. See page 3Ć35 for more information
on connecting the battery. on connecting the battery.

The 222PS comes with an attached storage pouch. Store the probes in The 222PS comes with an attached storage pouch. Store the probes in
the pouch when you are not using them. You do not need to disconĆ the pouch when you are not using them. You do not need to disconĆ
nect the probes before you store them. nect the probes before you store them.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć13 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć13

At a Glance At a Glance

Rear Panel Controls and Connectors Rear Panel Controls and Connectors
The rear panel for the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in FigĆ The rear panel for the 222PS PowerScout appears as shown in FigĆ
ure 2Ć11. ure 2Ć11.

1 2 3 1 2 3

4 4

5 5

8 7 6 8 7 6

Figure 2Ć11:ă222PS Rear Panel Figure 2Ć11:ă222PS Rear Panel

1. This panel points to the probe inputs on the instrument's side and 1. This panel points to the probe inputs on the instrument's side and
indicates the 222PS maximum input voltage rating. indicates the 222PS maximum input voltage rating.

2. This is the RSĆ232 connection port for remote communications. 2. This is the RSĆ232 connection port for remote communications.
For more information on remote communications, see page AĆ9. For more information on remote communications, see page AĆ9.

3. This is the instrument serial number. You will need it if you must 3. This is the instrument serial number. You will need it if you must
ever arrange to ship the instrument back for maintenance. For ever arrange to ship the instrument back for maintenance. For
more maintenance information, see page 3Ć31. more maintenance information, see page 3Ć31.

4. This knob focuses the 222PS screen. Insert a small screwdriver 4. This knob focuses the 222PS screen. Insert a small screwdriver
into the slot and turn it to adjust the focus. into the slot and turn it to adjust the focus.

2Ć14 At a Glance 2Ć14 At a Glance

 At a Glance At a Glance

5. This knob varies the brightness of the 222PS screen. See 5. This knob varies the brightness of the 222PS screen. See
page 3Ć23 for more information on screen brightness. page 3Ć23 for more information on screen brightness.

6. This is the external trigger common reference connector. To use a 6. This is the external trigger common reference connector. To use a
grounded reference with your external trigger source, connect the grounded reference with your external trigger source, connect the
reference signal here. See page 3Ć65. reference signal here. See page 3Ć65.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid possible injury, do not connect the trigger comĆ To avoid possible injury, do not connect the trigger comĆ
mon reference input to voltages greater than 42ĂV peak. mon reference input to voltages greater than 42ĂV peak.
The trigger common reference input is not insulated. The trigger common reference input is not insulated.

7. This is the external trigger input connector. To use an external 7. This is the external trigger input connector. To use an external
signal as a trigger source, connect the external trigger signal here. signal as a trigger source, connect the external trigger signal here.
For more information on external triggering, see page 3Ć65. For more information on external triggering, see page 3Ć65.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid possible injury or damage to the 222PS or To avoid possible injury or damage to the 222PS or
equipment connected to it, do not float the external trigger equipment connected to it, do not float the external trigger
common connector, the RSĆ232 communications port, or common connector, the RSĆ232 communications port, or
the external power input above 42ĂV peak. These inputs the external power input above 42ĂV peak. These inputs
are not electrically isolated from each other. are not electrically isolated from each other.

8. This is the external power input. Connect the External Power AC 8. This is the external power input. Connect the External Power AC
Adapter to the input to run the instrument from line voltage. See Adapter to the input to run the instrument from line voltage. See
page 3Ć41 for more information on external power. page 3Ć41 for more information on external power.

222PS Operator Manual 2Ć15 222PS Operator Manual 2Ć15

At a Glance At a Glance

The Tilt Stand The Tilt Stand

The 222PS PowerScout comes with a tilt stand so that you can view The 222PS PowerScout comes with a tilt stand so that you can view
the frontĆpanel and screen more easily. The tilt stand folds under the the frontĆpanel and screen more easily. The tilt stand folds under the
instrument when not in use. To use it, lift the instrument and pull the tilt instrument when not in use. To use it, lift the instrument and pull the tilt
stand forward until the instrument rests on it. stand forward until the instrument rests on it.

Figure 2Ć12:ăThe 222PS With Tilt Stand Figure 2Ć12:ăThe 222PS With Tilt Stand

2Ć16 At a Glance 2Ć16 At a Glance

In Detail In Detail
 Acquisition Modes Acquisition Modes
Acquiring signals involves accepting an analog electrical signal, Acquiring signals involves accepting an analog electrical signal,
sampling it, and producing a waveform. The 222PS allows you to sampling it, and producing a waveform. The 222PS allows you to
specify how the instrument acquires the signal and constructs a specify how the instrument acquires the signal and constructs a
waveform. This is the acquisition mode of the instrument. waveform. This is the acquisition mode of the instrument.

Kinds of Acquisition Modes Kinds of Acquisition Modes

The 222PS provides four acquisition modes: normal, average, enveĆ The 222PS provides four acquisition modes: normal, average, enveĆ
lope, and continuous envelope. These modes help you to examine lope, and continuous envelope. These modes help you to examine
and manage noisy signals. and manage noisy signals.

Normal Acquisition Mode Normal Acquisition Mode

Normal acquisition mode is the most common, and it is the instrument Normal acquisition mode is the most common, and it is the instrument
default. default.

In normal acquisition mode, the instrument displays a waveform with In normal acquisition mode, the instrument displays a waveform with
one sample point for each acquired point. one sample point for each acquired point.

Average Acquisition Mode Average Acquisition Mode

Average acquisition mode displays a waveform that is the average of Average acquisition mode displays a waveform that is the average of
the last four waveforms acquired. This mode is useful for reducing the last four waveforms acquired. This mode is useful for reducing
random noise and displaying a cleaner signal. random noise and displaying a cleaner signal.

NOTE NOTE
Average acquisition mode works only when the instrument Average acquisition mode works only when the instrument
is triggered. In auto level and autoĆbaseline trigger modes, is triggered. In auto level and autoĆbaseline trigger modes,
untriggered displays appear identical to those using untriggered displays appear identical to those using
normal acquisition mode. normal acquisition mode.

In auto baseline trigger mode, the instrument displays the In auto baseline trigger mode, the instrument displays the
last waveform acquired; it is unaveraged. last waveform acquired; it is unaveraged.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć1 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć1

Acquisition Modes Acquisition Modes

Envelope Acquisition Mode Envelope Acquisition Mode

In envelope mode, the instrument displays the positive and negative In envelope mode, the instrument displays the positive and negative
peak signal values that occur during a display sample interval. This peak signal values that occur during a display sample interval. This
mode is useful for detecting glitches such as unwanted peaks in a mode is useful for detecting glitches such as unwanted peaks in a
signal. signal.

NOTE NOTE
Envelope acquisition mode functions only for time base Envelope acquisition mode functions only for time base
settings between 20Ăms and 20Ăs per division. If you set the settings between 20Ăms and 20Ăs per division. If you set the
instrument at a faster setting, it functions as if it were in instrument at a faster setting, it functions as if it were in
normal acquisition mode. normal acquisition mode.

Envelope mode samples the signal at 10ĂMHz, thereby acquiring Envelope mode samples the signal at 10ĂMHz, thereby acquiring
many samples for each point it displays. many samples for each point it displays.

NOTE NOTE
Because of the 10ĂMHz sampling rate, the instrument Because of the 10ĂMHz sampling rate, the instrument
cannot detect glitches that last less than 100Ăns. cannot detect glitches that last less than 100Ăns.

Continuous Envelope Acquisition Mode Continuous Envelope Acquisition Mode

Continuous envelope mode is similar to envelope mode. The differĆ Continuous envelope mode is similar to envelope mode. The differĆ
ence is that continuous mode accumulates and displays peak values ence is that continuous mode accumulates and displays peak values
until you press the button labeled INIT. until you press the button labeled INIT.

NOTE NOTE
Continuous envelope acquisition mode functions only for Continuous envelope acquisition mode functions only for
time base settings between 20Ăms and 20Ăs per division. If time base settings between 20Ăms and 20Ăs per division. If
you specify a faster setting, the instrument functions as if it you specify a faster setting, the instrument functions as if it
were in normal acquisition mode. were in normal acquisition mode.

Changes to most frontĆpanel control settings also act like the INIT Changes to most frontĆpanel control settings also act like the INIT
button, discarding the old waveform data and starting the envelope button, discarding the old waveform data and starting the envelope
sequence anew. The only frontĆpanel controls that do not affect sequence anew. The only frontĆpanel controls that do not affect
continuous envelope mode are the horizontal and vertical position continuous envelope mode are the horizontal and vertical position
knobs and the trigger level knob. knobs and the trigger level knob.

3Ć2 In Detail 3Ć2 In Detail

 Acquisition Modes Acquisition Modes

Figure 3Ć1 summarizes the effects of averaging and envelope modes Figure 3Ć1 summarizes the effects of averaging and envelope modes
on a signal. on a signal.

Figure 3Ć1:ăNormal, Average, and Envelope Signals Figure 3Ć1:ăNormal, Average, and Envelope Signals

Selecting an Acquisition Mode Selecting an Acquisition Mode

To choose an acquisition mode, follow these steps. To choose an acquisition mode, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the ACQ button on the top panel to invoke the ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the ACQ button on the top panel to invoke the
acquisition menu. acquisition menu.

The normal acquisition mode is boxed (as in Figure 3Ć2) unless The normal acquisition mode is boxed (as in Figure 3Ć2) unless
you have previously selected another acquisition mode. you have previously selected another acquisition mode.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the acquisition mode you wish to ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the acquisition mode you wish to
select. The acquisition mode takes effect, and the menu disapĆ select. The acquisition mode takes effect, and the menu disapĆ
pears. pears.

ACQ: NORM ACQ: NORM

ENV ENV

AVG AVG

CONT ENV CONT ENV

Figure 3Ć2:ăThe Acquisition Menu Figure 3Ć2:ăThe Acquisition Menu

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć3 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć3

Acquisition Modes Acquisition Modes

3Ć4 In Detail 3Ć4 In Detail

 Auto Setup Auto Setup
The 222PS allows you to obtain a readable display of a waveform by The 222PS allows you to obtain a readable display of a waveform by
pushing a single button. You can also set up the instrument in a pushing a single button. You can also set up the instrument in a
specific way and then save the setting in memory (see page 3Ć55). specific way and then save the setting in memory (see page 3Ć55).
This section discusses various automatic ways to set up the instruĆ This section discusses various automatic ways to set up the instruĆ
ment. ment.

Procedure Procedure
If you wish to view a signal quickly, follow these steps. If you wish to view a signal quickly, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăConnect the probe tip to the signal you wish to see. ĂĂStep 1:ăConnect the probe tip to the signal you wish to see.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button marked AUTO SETUP on the front ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button marked AUTO SETUP on the front
panel. panel.

Pressing AUTO SETUP gets a quick, informative display of any signal Pressing AUTO SETUP gets a quick, informative display of any signal
between 20 Hz and 1 MHz. between 20 Hz and 1 MHz.

Parameter Effects Parameter Effects

The AUTO SETUP button has these effects on setup parameters. The AUTO SETUP button has these effects on setup parameters.

Channels Channels
When you press AUTO SETUP, the instrument first determines which When you press AUTO SETUP, the instrument first determines which
channels to display. It checks both probe tips for a signal on either channels to display. It checks both probe tips for a signal on either
channel. channel.

H If a channel is receiving a signal, the 222PS turns the channel on. H If a channel is receiving a signal, the 222PS turns the channel on.

H If neither channel is receiving a signal, the 222PS turns on chanĆ H If neither channel is receiving a signal, the 222PS turns on chanĆ
nel 1 and turns off channel 2. nel 1 and turns off channel 2.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć5 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć5

Auto Setup Auto Setup

Vertical Scaling Vertical Scaling

The 222PS then determines the characteristics of the signal, so it can The 222PS then determines the characteristics of the signal, so it can
produce a useful display. produce a useful display.

The 222PS sets the vertical position to display the signal in the center The 222PS sets the vertical position to display the signal in the center
of the screen. If both channels have a signal, the 222PS displays both of the screen. If both channels have a signal, the 222PS displays both
signals. signals.

The instrument also sets the volts per division to display each signal The instrument also sets the volts per division to display each signal
with several divisions of amplitude. with several divisions of amplitude.

Horizontal Scaling Horizontal Scaling

If only one channel is receiving a signal, the 222PS sets the horizontal If only one channel is receiving a signal, the 222PS sets the horizontal
position to display 1-5 waveform cycles. It determines the peak position to display 1-5 waveform cycles. It determines the peak
values and sets the trigger level at the midpoint. values and sets the trigger level at the midpoint.

If both channels have a signal, the instrument uses the channel 1 If both channels have a signal, the instrument uses the channel 1
signal to set the seconds per division and trigger level. If the two signal to set the seconds per division and trigger level. If the two
signals are synchronized, they both appear stable. Otherwise, the signals are synchronized, they both appear stable. Otherwise, the
channel 2 signal is untriggered. channel 2 signal is untriggered.

Low and High Frequencies Low and High Frequencies

AUTO SETUP avoids the timeĆbase modes used with the slower time AUTO SETUP avoids the timeĆbase modes used with the slower time
scales. It therefore does not set the seconds per division to 0.1 s or scales. It therefore does not set the seconds per division to 0.1 s or
slower and does not produce a readable display for signals slower slower and does not produce a readable display for signals slower
than 20ĂHz. than 20ĂHz.

For signals with frequencies above 100ĂkHz, AUTO SETUP always For signals with frequencies above 100ĂkHz, AUTO SETUP always
uses a secondsĆperĆdivision setting of 5Ăms to minimize search time. uses a secondsĆperĆdivision setting of 5Ăms to minimize search time.
The 222PS may display such highĆfrequency signals with too many or The 222PS may display such highĆfrequency signals with too many or
too few cycles on the screen; therefore, they may appear confusing. too few cycles on the screen; therefore, they may appear confusing.
You may need to make small corrections to the seconds per division You may need to make small corrections to the seconds per division
knob to get a useful display. knob to get a useful display.

Table 3Ć1 shows all AUTO SETUP actions. Table 3Ć1 shows all AUTO SETUP actions.

3Ć6 In Detail 3Ć6 In Detail

 Auto Setup Auto Setup

TableĂ3Ć1:ă Auto Setup Settings TableĂ3Ć1:ă Auto Setup Settings

Control Setting After Auto Setup Control Setting After Auto Setup
VOLTS/DIV As determined by signal VOLTS/DIV As determined by signal
VOLTS/DIV VAR Calibrated VOLTS/DIV VAR Calibrated
Coupling AC if in AC before, and if a signal exists; otherwise Coupling AC if in AC before, and if a signal exists; otherwise
DC if a signal exists; otherwise OFF DC if a signal exists; otherwise OFF
Acquisition mode Normal Acquisition mode Normal
STORE/NONSTORE NONSTORE STORE/NONSTORE NONSTORE
Invert Off (not inverted) Invert Off (not inverted)
XY Display Off XY Display Off
SEC/DIV As determined by signal; 5Ăms for signals above SEC/DIV As determined by signal; 5Ăms for signals above
100ĂkHz 100ĂkHz
Trigger source Vertical Trigger source Vertical
Trigger mode Auto level Trigger mode Auto level
Trigger position Post Trigger position Post

Trigger slope Plus Trigger slope Plus

Trigger level Midpoint of signal Trigger level Midpoint of signal
X10 MAG Off X10 MAG Off
Readouts On Readouts On
Selected channel Channel 1 if signal exists, or if channel 2 has no Selected channel Channel 1 if signal exists, or if channel 2 has no
signal signal

NOTE NOTE
AUTO SETUP does not disable the motor trigger selection. AUTO SETUP does not disable the motor trigger selection.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć7 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć7

Auto Setup Auto Setup

3Ć8 In Detail 3Ć8 In Detail

 Calibration Calibration
The 222PS has a vertical channel selfĆcalibration routine to maintain The 222PS has a vertical channel selfĆcalibration routine to maintain
best balance and accuracy with temperature variations. best balance and accuracy with temperature variations.

Running the SelfĆCalibration Routine Running the SelfĆCalibration Routine

To achieve the specified performance, you should recalibrate the To achieve the specified performance, you should recalibrate the
222PS any time the ambient temperature has changed by more than 222PS any time the ambient temperature has changed by more than
5° C. If the trace jumps when you rotate the volts per division knob 5° C. If the trace jumps when you rotate the volts per division knob
with no signal applied, the instrument probably needs recalibration. with no signal applied, the instrument probably needs recalibration.

To run the selfĆcalibration routine, follow these steps. To run the selfĆcalibration routine, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăDisconnect both probes from the signal source. ĂĂStep 1:ăDisconnect both probes from the signal source.

NOTE NOTE
To ensure that the selfĆcalibration routine produces accuĆ To ensure that the selfĆcalibration routine produces accuĆ
rate results, do not run the selfĆcalibration routine while rate results, do not run the selfĆcalibration routine while
either probe is connected to a signal source. either probe is connected to a signal source.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to display ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to display
the auxiliary functions menu. The display appears as shown in the auxiliary functions menu. The display appears as shown in
Figure 3Ć3. Figure 3Ć3.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć9 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć9

Calibration Calibration

AUX: ALIGN AUX: ALIGN

SELF CAL SELF CAL

CONFIG CONFIG

MOTOR TRIG MOTOR TRIG

Figure 3Ć3:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu Figure 3Ć3:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the SELF CAL menu item ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the SELF CAL menu item
to access the calibration menu. The display now appears as to access the calibration menu. The display now appears as
shown in Figure 3Ć4. shown in Figure 3Ć4.

SELF CAL: CH1 SELF CAL: CH1

CH2 CH2

EXT TRIG EXT TRIG

PROBE PROBE

Figure 3Ć4:ăThe Calibration Menu Figure 3Ć4:ăThe Calibration Menu

NOTE NOTE
The PROBE selection on the SELF CAL menu is for use by The PROBE selection on the SELF CAL menu is for use by
qualified service personnel only. qualified service personnel only.

3Ć10 In Detail 3Ć10 In Detail

 Calibration Calibration

ĂĂStep 4:ăTo begin the selfĆcalibration routine for channel 1, press ĂĂStep 4:ăTo begin the selfĆcalibration routine for channel 1, press
the menu button next to CH1. the menu button next to CH1.

This routine takes about a minute to perform. When it is finished, This routine takes about a minute to perform. When it is finished,
the instrument displays PASS or FAIL. the instrument displays PASS or FAIL.

If PASS appears on the screen, channel 1's recalibration was If PASS appears on the screen, channel 1's recalibration was
successful. successful.

If FAIL appears on the screen, run the calibration routine again. If If FAIL appears on the screen, run the calibration routine again. If
the failure persists, refer the instrument to a qualified service the failure persists, refer the instrument to a qualified service
person. person.

If the selfĆcalibration routine fails, the instrument sends a coded If the selfĆcalibration routine fails, the instrument sends a coded
error message. To capture this message, connect the instrument error message. To capture this message, connect the instrument
to a terminal (or a PC emulating a terminal) through the RSĆ232 to a terminal (or a PC emulating a terminal) through the RSĆ232
port on the rear panel and run the failed routine again. See port on the rear panel and run the failed routine again. See
Appendix B: Remote Communications for a discussion of the error Appendix B: Remote Communications for a discussion of the error
codes. codes.

ĂĂStep 5:ăNow calibrate channel 2. Invoke the menu again, and ĂĂStep 5:ăNow calibrate channel 2. Invoke the menu again, and
press the menu button next to CH2. Follow the procedure outlined press the menu button next to CH2. Follow the procedure outlined
in Step 4. in Step 4.

ĂĂStep 6:ăNow recalibrate the external trigger input. Before you start ĂĂStep 6:ăNow recalibrate the external trigger input. Before you start
the calibration, connect the external trigger input connector to the the calibration, connect the external trigger input connector to the
trigger common reference connector on the rear panel. Use a trigger common reference connector on the rear panel. Use a
jumper cable with a banana plug connector on each end. jumper cable with a banana plug connector on each end.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć11 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć11

Calibration Calibration

NOTE NOTE
To calibrate the external trigger input, the TRIG COM To calibrate the external trigger input, the TRIG COM
connector must be connected to the EXT TRIG INPUT connector must be connected to the EXT TRIG INPUT
connector. connector.

ĂĂStep 7:ăInvoke the menu again, and press the menu button next ĂĂStep 7:ăInvoke the menu again, and press the menu button next
to EXT TRIG. A new menu appears on the display, as shown in to EXT TRIG. A new menu appears on the display, as shown in
Figure 3Ć5. Figure 3Ć5.

GND EXT TRIG: GND EXT TRIG:

CAL CAL

Figure 3Ć5:ăThe Ground External Trigger Calibration Menu Figure 3Ć5:ăThe Ground External Trigger Calibration Menu

3Ć12 In Detail 3Ć12 In Detail

 Calibration Calibration

ĂĂStep 8:ăPress the menu button next to CAL to begin the calibraĆ ĂĂStep 8:ăPress the menu button next to CAL to begin the calibraĆ
tion. Follow the procedure outlined in Step 4. tion. Follow the procedure outlined in Step 4.

ĂĂStep 9:ăWhen you are done, press the CLEAR button above the ĂĂStep 9:ăWhen you are done, press the CLEAR button above the
menu buttons to return the instrument to normal operation. menu buttons to return the instrument to normal operation.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć13 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć13

Calibration Calibration

3Ć14 In Detail 3Ć14 In Detail

 Capturing Random Capturing Random
Events Events
Capturing random electric events in circuits is difficult and timeĆconĆ Capturing random electric events in circuits is difficult and timeĆconĆ
suming. You can use the 222PS's single sequence mode to make the suming. You can use the 222PS's single sequence mode to make the
task easier. task easier.

SingleĆsequence mode is one of four trigger modes you can use with SingleĆsequence mode is one of four trigger modes you can use with
the 222PS. In singleĆsequence mode, the instrument acquires one the 222PS. In singleĆsequence mode, the instrument acquires one
triggered signal. It then displays the signal and holds it until you press triggered signal. It then displays the signal and holds it until you press
the button labeled INIT to start the sequence all over again. Changing the button labeled INIT to start the sequence all over again. Changing
a control that affects the signal acquisition also starts the sequence a control that affects the signal acquisition also starts the sequence
again. again.

The following procedure will help you use singleĆsequence mode to The following procedure will help you use singleĆsequence mode to
capture a random event. capture a random event.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPreset the instrument controls to display a baseline ĂĂStep 1:ăPreset the instrument controls to display a baseline
signal. signal.

ĂĂStep 2:ăApply a test signal to the channel 1 input to set the trigger ĂĂStep 2:ăApply a test signal to the channel 1 input to set the trigger
level. Make sure the test signal is the same amplitude and general level. Make sure the test signal is the same amplitude and general
type (negative or positive pulse or sinusoidal) as the signal you type (negative or positive pulse or sinusoidal) as the signal you
want to trigger on. want to trigger on.

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress AUTO SETUP to obtain a quick frontĆpanel control ĂĂStep 3:ăPress AUTO SETUP to obtain a quick frontĆpanel control
setup for the test signal. If the resulting vertical or horizontal setup for the test signal. If the resulting vertical or horizontal
scaling result is not precisely what you want, adjust the voltsĆperĆ scaling result is not precisely what you want, adjust the voltsĆperĆ
division and secondsĆperĆdivision controls as you wish. If necesĆ division and secondsĆperĆdivision controls as you wish. If necesĆ
sary, reposition the trace vertically. sary, reposition the trace vertically.

ĂĂStep 4:ăSet the trigger mode to normal. ĂĂStep 4:ăSet the trigger mode to normal.

ĂĂStep 5:ăSet the trigger source to channel 1. ĂĂStep 5:ăSet the trigger source to channel 1.

ĂĂStep 6:ăAchieve a stable display by adjusting the trigger level ĂĂStep 6:ăAchieve a stable display by adjusting the trigger level
control. control.

ĂĂStep 7:ăTo set the trigger mode to singleĆsequence, Press the ĂĂStep 7:ăTo set the trigger mode to singleĆsequence, Press the
button labeled MODE on the front panel. Press the menu button button labeled MODE on the front panel. Press the menu button
next to the menu item SSEQ. next to the menu item SSEQ.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć15 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć15

Capturing Random Events Capturing Random Events

ĂĂStep 8:ă Check that the sweep triggers each time the INIT button ĂĂStep 8:ă Check that the sweep triggers each time the INIT button
is pressed. If it does not, readjust the trigger level control slightly is pressed. If it does not, readjust the trigger level control slightly
until the sweep triggers each time you press INIT. The TRIG'D until the sweep triggers each time you press INIT. The TRIG'D
indicator lights when the instrument triggers. indicator lights when the instrument triggers.

ĂĂStep 9:ăDisconnect the test signal from the oscilloscope and ĂĂStep 9:ăDisconnect the test signal from the oscilloscope and
apply the random signal to the input. apply the random signal to the input.

ĂĂStep 10:ăPress INIT to arm the trigger system. The instrument ĂĂStep 10:ăPress INIT to arm the trigger system. The instrument
then waits for the trigger event. The TRIG'D indicator lights when then waits for the trigger event. The TRIG'D indicator lights when
the instrument triggers. the instrument triggers.

ĂĂStep 11:ăAfter the instrument triggers and completes the single ĂĂStep 11:ăAfter the instrument triggers and completes the single
sequence, press INIT again to acquire another signal. sequence, press INIT again to acquire another signal.

In scroll mode, the singleĆsequence trigger mode is useful for capturĆ In scroll mode, the singleĆsequence trigger mode is useful for capturĆ
ing an event that occurs either randomly or infrequently. If the event is ing an event that occurs either randomly or infrequently. If the event is
also very narrow, use the envelope mode as well. also very narrow, use the envelope mode as well.

Initialize the singleĆsequence function and let the oscilloscope watch Initialize the singleĆsequence function and let the oscilloscope watch
for the event. The 222PS acquires data continuously up to the trigger for the event. The 222PS acquires data continuously up to the trigger
point. When the trigger event occurs, the instrument acquires the data point. When the trigger event occurs, the instrument acquires the data
it needs to fill the rest of the display. It then halts the acquisition and it needs to fill the rest of the display. It then halts the acquisition and
displays the waveform (with the captured trigger event) until you press displays the waveform (with the captured trigger event) until you press
the INIT button again. the INIT button again.

3Ć16 In Detail 3Ć16 In Detail

 Channels Channels
The 222PS has two fully isolated input channels with which you can The 222PS has two fully isolated input channels with which you can
make floating measurements. With signals of up to 600 VACRMS input, make floating measurements. With signals of up to 600 VACRMS input,
you can make measurements as you would with a volt meter. you can make measurements as you would with a volt meter.

This section explains how to select a channel, display the signal it This section explains how to select a channel, display the signal it
acquires, and choose the right channel coupling. acquires, and choose the right channel coupling.

Selecting a Channel Selecting a Channel

You must select a channel before you can change its settings using You must select a channel before you can change its settings using
the frontĆpanel controls. You can select only one channel at a time. The the frontĆpanel controls. You can select only one channel at a time. The
display indicates which channel is currently selected. display indicates which channel is currently selected.

To select a channel, push the appropriate channel button (CH1 or To select a channel, push the appropriate channel button (CH1 or
CH2) on the front panel. CH2) on the front panel.

Figure 3Ć6 shows the 222PS displaying signals for two channels. Figure 3Ć6 shows the 222PS displaying signals for two channels.
Channel 1 is selected. Channel 1 is selected.

.5V~ 5mV= .5V~ 5mV=

-46.7mV+ 2mS -46.7mV+ 2mS

Figure 3Ć6:ăChannel One Selected Figure 3Ć6:ăChannel One Selected

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć17 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć17

Channels Channels

Displaying a Channel Displaying a Channel

When a channel is on, the 222PS displays any signal it acquires When a channel is on, the 222PS displays any signal it acquires
through that channel. When a channel is off, the 222PS does not through that channel. When a channel is off, the 222PS does not
display its signal. If either channel is off, the screen displays OFF" display its signal. If either channel is off, the screen displays OFF"
instead of its voltsĆperĆdivision value. instead of its voltsĆperĆdivision value.

Even when a channel is off, the instrument can still use it as a trigger Even when a channel is off, the instrument can still use it as a trigger
source. source.

By default, the 222PS displays both channels. To turn a channel off, By default, the 222PS displays both channels. To turn a channel off,
follow these steps. follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăIf the channel is not already selected, select it by pushing ĂĂStep 1:ăIf the channel is not already selected, select it by pushing
the appropriate channel button (CH1 or CH2) on the front panel. the appropriate channel button (CH1 or CH2) on the front panel.

ĂĂStep 2:ă Press the channel button again to display the channel ĂĂStep 2:ă Press the channel button again to display the channel
menu. The screen appears as shown below. menu. The screen appears as shown below.

CH 2 CPLG: DC CH 2 CPLG: DC

AC AC

GND GND

CH 2 OFF CH 2 OFF

Figure 3Ć7:ăThe Channel Menu Figure 3Ć7:ăThe Channel Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the button next to the bottom menu item, ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the button next to the bottom menu item,
CH 2 OFF. This turns the selected channel off and clears the CH 2 OFF. This turns the selected channel off and clears the
menu from the display. However, until you select channel 1 for menu from the display. However, until you select channel 1 for
another purpose, channel 2 is still the selected channel. another purpose, channel 2 is still the selected channel.

3Ć18 In Detail 3Ć18 In Detail

 Channels Channels

To display a channel you have turned off, repeat the above procedure To display a channel you have turned off, repeat the above procedure
until you see the menu on the screen. Then select the type of coupling until you see the menu on the screen. Then select the type of coupling
you wish to use for the channel signal. The following section describes you wish to use for the channel signal. The following section describes
how to select the channel coupling. how to select the channel coupling.

NOTE NOTE
When a channel is off, you can still change its vertical When a channel is off, you can still change its vertical
settings with the POS, VOLTS/DIV, or VAR VOLTS/DIV settings with the POS, VOLTS/DIV, or VAR VOLTS/DIV
controls. First, select the channel. Then make the changes controls. First, select the channel. Then make the changes
you wish. The changes take effect when you turn the you wish. The changes take effect when you turn the
channel back on. channel back on.

Setting Channel Coupling Setting Channel Coupling

There are three possible couplings for each channel: There are three possible couplings for each channel:

H DC coupling passes all frequencies of the input signal up to the H DC coupling passes all frequencies of the input signal up to the
useful bandwidth of the instrument. useful bandwidth of the instrument.

H AC coupling blocks any DC component of the signal and is the H AC coupling blocks any DC component of the signal and is the
most commonly used. most commonly used.

H Ground coupling disconnects the input signal and grounds the H Ground coupling disconnects the input signal and grounds the
input for the selected channel. input for the selected channel.

To select the coupling for a channel, follow these steps. To select the coupling for a channel, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăIf the channel is not already selected, select it by pushing ĂĂStep 1:ăIf the channel is not already selected, select it by pushing
the appropriate channel button (CH1 or CH2) on the front panel. the appropriate channel button (CH1 or CH2) on the front panel.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the channel button again to invoke the channel ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the channel button again to invoke the channel
menu. The screen appears as in Figure 3Ć7. menu. The screen appears as in Figure 3Ć7.

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the button next to the menu item representing the ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the button next to the menu item representing the
type of coupling you wish to use. For example, press the second type of coupling you wish to use. For example, press the second
button from the top to select AC coupling. button from the top to select AC coupling.

If the type of coupling you wish already appears boxed, it is If the type of coupling you wish already appears boxed, it is
already the selected coupling. Press the CLEAR button to remove already the selected coupling. Press the CLEAR button to remove
the menu from the display. the menu from the display.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć19 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć19

Channels Channels

3Ć20 In Detail 3Ć20 In Detail

 The Display The Display
The 222PS display shows you menus, signals, and readouts. This The 222PS display shows you menus, signals, and readouts. This
section explains how you can control the information displayed to you. section explains how you can control the information displayed to you.

Readouts Readouts
Readouts include volts per division for each signal, seconds per Readouts include volts per division for each signal, seconds per
division, and trigger level. The instrument also displays additional division, and trigger level. The instrument also displays additional
information, depending on the characteristics of the signal you display information, depending on the characteristics of the signal you display
and the mode of the instrument. and the mode of the instrument.

Displaying and Clearing the Readouts Displaying and Clearing the Readouts
Unless you explicitly turn off the readouts, the 222PS displays them. If Unless you explicitly turn off the readouts, the 222PS displays them. If
you wish to turn the readouts off and view only the signals, follow you wish to turn the readouts off and view only the signals, follow
these steps. these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the DISPL button on the top panel to access the ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the DISPL button on the top panel to access the
display menu. Figure 3Ć8 shows the display menu. display menu. Figure 3Ć8 shows the display menu.

DISPLAY: INV1 DISPLAY: INV1

INV2 INV2

XY XY

RO OFF RO OFF

Figure 3Ć8:ăThe Display Menu Figure 3Ć8:ăThe Display Menu

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć21 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć21

The Display The Display

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the bottom menu item RO ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the bottom menu item RO
OFF. The menu disappears and the screen displays only the OFF. The menu disappears and the screen displays only the
signal. signal.

ĂĂStep 3:ăIf you wish to turn the readouts back on again, repeat the ĂĂStep 3:ăIf you wish to turn the readouts back on again, repeat the
above procedure. The next time you access the display menu, the above procedure. The next time you access the display menu, the
RO OFF item appears boxed, indicating that it is selected and that RO OFF item appears boxed, indicating that it is selected and that
readouts have therefore been turned off. Press the button again to readouts have therefore been turned off. Press the button again to
deselect the menu item. The menu disappears and readouts deselect the menu item. The menu disappears and readouts
again appear. again appear.

Inverting the Display Inverting the Display

You can invert the waveforms displayed for either channel. Figure 3Ć9 You can invert the waveforms displayed for either channel. Figure 3Ć9
shows an example of a normal and an inverted waveform. shows an example of a normal and an inverted waveform.

Normal Normal
Waveform Waveform

Inverted Inverted
Waveform Waveform

Figure 3Ć9:ăNormal and Inverted Waveforms Figure 3Ć9:ăNormal and Inverted Waveforms

Some signal processing circuits, such as circuits that process composĆ Some signal processing circuits, such as circuits that process composĆ
ite video signals, automatically invert waveforms. While working on ite video signals, automatically invert waveforms. While working on
these circuits you may want to invert these signals to view them these circuits you may want to invert these signals to view them
normally. normally.

To invert a signal, follow these steps. To invert a signal, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the DISPL button on the top panel to invoke the ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the DISPL button on the top panel to invoke the
display menu. See Figure 3Ć8. display menu. See Figure 3Ć8.

3Ć22 In Detail 3Ć22 In Detail

 The Display The Display

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the menu item corresponding to ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the menu item corresponding to
the channel you wish to invert (INV1 OR INV2). the channel you wish to invert (INV1 OR INV2).

After you press the menu button, the menu disappears and the After you press the menu button, the menu disappears and the
inverted signal (if any) reappears on the screen. A small downĆ inverted signal (if any) reappears on the screen. A small downĆ
arrow appears in front of the volts per division readout for an arrow appears in front of the volts per division readout for an
inverted channel. inverted channel.

ĂĂStep 3:ăIf you wish to display the channel normally, repeat the ĂĂStep 3:ăIf you wish to display the channel normally, repeat the
above procedure. The next time you access the display menu, the above procedure. The next time you access the display menu, the
inverted channel item appears boxed, indicating that it is selected. inverted channel item appears boxed, indicating that it is selected.
Press the button again to deselect the menu item. The menu Press the button again to deselect the menu item. The menu
disappears, and the channel is no longer inverted. disappears, and the channel is no longer inverted.

Varying the Brightness Varying the Brightness

Use the intensity control on the back panel (labeled INTEN) to adjust Use the intensity control on the back panel (labeled INTEN) to adjust
the display's brightness. the display's brightness.

To change the brightness, insert a small screwdriver into the center slot To change the brightness, insert a small screwdriver into the center slot
of the knob and rotate the knob until the display appears as you wish. of the knob and rotate the knob until the display appears as you wish.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć23 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć23

The Display The Display

3Ć24 In Detail 3Ć24 In Detail

 Horizontal Operation Horizontal Operation
This section discusses controlling the horizontal aspects of your signal. This section discusses controlling the horizontal aspects of your signal.
The knobs used to do this are at the bottom left of the front panel, as The knobs used to do this are at the bottom left of the front panel, as
shown in Figure 3Ć10. shown in Figure 3Ć10.

Figure 3Ć10:ăThe Horizontal Controls Figure 3Ć10:ăThe Horizontal Controls

The horizontal controls affect signals acquired through both channels. The horizontal controls affect signals acquired through both channels.

Horizontal Positioning Horizontal Positioning

To position the signals horizontally, rotate the inner knob, labeled POS. To position the signals horizontally, rotate the inner knob, labeled POS.

You can position the trace to the right or the left up to oneĆhalf the You can position the trace to the right or the left up to oneĆhalf the
length of the screen. Readouts are not affected by horizontal positionĆ length of the screen. Readouts are not affected by horizontal positionĆ
ing. ing.

For information on the positioning of XY traces, see page 3Ć81. For information on the positioning of XY traces, see page 3Ć81.

When X10 magnification is on, the horizontal position control scrolls When X10 magnification is on, the horizontal position control scrolls
through the magnified waveform. For more information about magnifyĆ through the magnified waveform. For more information about magnifyĆ
ing waveforms, see page 3Ć29. ing waveforms, see page 3Ć29.

The horizontal position control affects the position of a saved waveĆ The horizontal position control affects the position of a saved waveĆ
form. The 222PS displays a saved waveform at the horizontal position form. The 222PS displays a saved waveform at the horizontal position
presently in effect, not the horizontal position at which it was saved. presently in effect, not the horizontal position at which it was saved.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć25 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć25

Horizontal Operation Horizontal Operation

Seconds per Division Seconds per Division

The 222PS can display a signal with a range of 20Ăs to 50Ăns. If magniĆ The 222PS can display a signal with a range of 20Ăs to 50Ăns. If magniĆ
fication is on, the instrument's range is 2Ăs to 5Ăns. This means that the fication is on, the instrument's range is 2Ăs to 5Ăns. This means that the
222PS can display a waveform that represents as long a period as 222PS can display a waveform that represents as long a period as
200Ăseconds or as short a period as 50Ăns (in the latter case, with 200Ăseconds or as short a period as 50Ăns (in the latter case, with
magnification on). magnification on).

To change the secondsĆperĆdivision setting, turn the outer knob To change the secondsĆperĆdivision setting, turn the outer knob
(labeled SEC/DIV). The instrument displays the resulting seconds per (labeled SEC/DIV). The instrument displays the resulting seconds per
division at the bottom of the screen. The 222PS uses a 1-2-5 switchĆ division at the bottom of the screen. The 222PS uses a 1-2-5 switchĆ
ing sequence: this means that each click of the knob changes the time ing sequence: this means that each click of the knob changes the time
scale from, for example, 1Ăms to 2Ăms and then to 5Ăms, before going scale from, for example, 1Ăms to 2Ăms and then to 5Ăms, before going
to 10Ă ms. to 10Ă ms.

NOTE NOTE
If you are using battery power at slow time bases, turn off If you are using battery power at slow time bases, turn off
the timeĆout feature described on page 3Ć37. Otherwise, the timeĆout feature described on page 3Ć37. Otherwise,
the instrument may time out and turn itself off before it can the instrument may time out and turn itself off before it can
completely acquire the signal. completely acquire the signal.

Aliasing Aliasing
Aliased waveforms are waveforms that appear to have a frequency Aliased waveforms are waveforms that appear to have a frequency
much lower than is accurate. much lower than is accurate.

Aliasing can occur when the seconds per division setting, and thereĆ Aliasing can occur when the seconds per division setting, and thereĆ
fore the sample rate, is too low to display a high frequency waveform fore the sample rate, is too low to display a high frequency waveform
accurately. When this occurs, the instrument does not sample the accurately. When this occurs, the instrument does not sample the
signal often enough. The resulting waveform it displays is misleading. signal often enough. The resulting waveform it displays is misleading.
Figure 3Ć11 illustrates an aliased waveform. Figure 3Ć11 illustrates an aliased waveform.

A common symptom of aliasing is an unstable display even when the A common symptom of aliasing is an unstable display even when the
TRIG'D light is on. TRIG'D light is on.

3Ć26 In Detail 3Ć26 In Detail

 Horizontal Operation Horizontal Operation

Actual Actual
HighĆFrequency HighĆFrequency
Waveform Waveform

Apparent LowĆFrequency Apparent LowĆFrequency

Waveform Due to Aliasing Waveform Due to Aliasing

Sampled Points Sampled Points

Figure 3Ć11:ăAn Aliased Waveform Figure 3Ć11:ăAn Aliased Waveform

To avoid aliasing, make sure that your sample rate is fast enough for To avoid aliasing, make sure that your sample rate is fast enough for
the frequency of the signal you wish to view Ċ usually, at least twice the frequency of the signal you wish to view Ċ usually, at least twice
as fast as the highest frequency component of the signal. as fast as the highest frequency component of the signal.

TimeĆBase Mode TimeĆBase Mode

When you choose a seconds per division setting, the instrument When you choose a seconds per division setting, the instrument
automatically selects the timeĆbase mode required to display the automatically selects the timeĆbase mode required to display the
resulting signal. The timeĆbase mode can also depend on the trigger resulting signal. The timeĆbase mode can also depend on the trigger
and acquisition modes. The 222PS uses four timeĆbase modes: and acquisition modes. The 222PS uses four timeĆbase modes:
record, equivalentĆtime, scroll, and scrollĆscan. record, equivalentĆtime, scroll, and scrollĆscan.

Record Ċ For most seconds per division settings, the instrument Record Ċ For most seconds per division settings, the instrument
uses the timeĆbase mode you are most accustomed to: record. When uses the timeĆbase mode you are most accustomed to: record. When
a trigger occurs, the 222PS acquires and displays a full screen of the a trigger occurs, the 222PS acquires and displays a full screen of the
waveform in one pass. waveform in one pass.

EquivalentĆtime Ċ However, when the seconds per division setting EquivalentĆtime Ċ However, when the seconds per division setting
is too fast, the instrument cannot sample fast enough to capture all 512 is too fast, the instrument cannot sample fast enough to capture all 512
samples and display them in one pass. Therefore, the instrument samples and display them in one pass. Therefore, the instrument
depends on successive repetitions of the same waveform to fill the depends on successive repetitions of the same waveform to fill the
display with samples. display with samples.

Scroll and ScrollĆscan Ċ When the seconds per division setting is Scroll and ScrollĆscan Ċ When the seconds per division setting is
very slow, the display takes too long to fill using record timeĆbase very slow, the display takes too long to fill using record timeĆbase
mode. Therefore, the instrument uses one of scrolling timeĆbase mode. Therefore, the instrument uses one of scrolling timeĆbase
modes. modes.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć27 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć27

Horizontal Operation Horizontal Operation

The instrument uses scroll mode for slow time bases when either The instrument uses scroll mode for slow time bases when either
autoĆlevel or autoĆbaseline trigger mode is in effect. autoĆlevel or autoĆbaseline trigger mode is in effect.

The instrument uses scrollĆscan mode for slow time bases when The instrument uses scrollĆscan mode for slow time bases when
normal or single sequence trigger mode is in effect. normal or single sequence trigger mode is in effect.

Averaging and continuous envelope acquisition modes acquire several Averaging and continuous envelope acquisition modes acquire several
records of data before displaying a waveform. Therefore, if either of records of data before displaying a waveform. Therefore, if either of
these acquisition modes is in effect, the instrument uses record these acquisition modes is in effect, the instrument uses record
timeĆbase mode at slow time bases instead of a scrolling mode. Under timeĆbase mode at slow time bases instead of a scrolling mode. Under
these circumstances, the display updates slowly. these circumstances, the display updates slowly.

Table 3Ć2 shows these dependencies and the actual secondsĆperĆdiviĆ Table 3Ć2 shows these dependencies and the actual secondsĆperĆdiviĆ
sion settings associated with each timeĆbase mode. The boundary sion settings associated with each timeĆbase mode. The boundary
between the medium and the slow ranges differs according to whether between the medium and the slow ranges differs according to whether
the instrument is in store or nonstore mode. the instrument is in store or nonstore mode.

TableĂ3Ć2:ă TimeĆBase Modes TableĂ3Ć2:ă TimeĆBase Modes

Seconds per Acquisition TimeĆbase Seconds per Acquisition TimeĆbase
Store Mode Division Mode Mode Store Mode Division Mode Mode
Fast: Any EquivalentĆtime Fast: Any EquivalentĆtime
On or off 2Ăms to 50Ăns On or off 2Ăms to 50Ăns
Normal: Any Record Normal: Any Record
On 50Ăms to 5Ăms On 50Ăms to 5Ăms
Off 20Ăms to 5Ăms Off 20Ăms to 5Ăms
Slow: Slow:
On 20Ăs to 0.1Ăs Normal or Scroll or On 20Ăs to 0.1Ăs Normal or Scroll or
Envelope ScrollĆscan Envelope ScrollĆscan

Off 20Ăs to 50Ăms Averaging or RecordĊ Off 20Ăs to 50Ăms Averaging or RecordĊ
Continuous slow update Continuous slow update
Envelope Envelope

3Ć28 In Detail 3Ć28 In Detail

 Horizontal Operation Horizontal Operation

Magnifying the Signal Magnifying the Signal

You can magnify waveforms by ten times. To do so, push the inner You can magnify waveforms by ten times. To do so, push the inner
horizontal control knob, labeled POS. horizontal control knob, labeled POS.

When magnification is on, each division contains five data points When magnification is on, each division contains five data points
horizontally instead of the normal 50. The secondsĆperĆdivision readĆ horizontally instead of the normal 50. The secondsĆperĆdivision readĆ
outs show corresponding values. Magnification also affects saved outs show corresponding values. Magnification also affects saved
waveforms on the display and their secondsĆperĆdivision readouts. waveforms on the display and their secondsĆperĆdivision readouts.

To view the rest of the magnified waveform, turn the horizontal position To view the rest of the magnified waveform, turn the horizontal position
knob. This action allows you to pan through the magnified waveform knob. This action allows you to pan through the magnified waveform
from side to side. from side to side.

When you pan through a magnified waveform, you may also be When you pan through a magnified waveform, you may also be
moving the trigger position. The trigger position indicator, shown as a moving the trigger position. The trigger position indicator, shown as a
+, cannot move off the screen. Therefore, if you pan the trigger +, cannot move off the screen. Therefore, if you pan the trigger
position off the screen to either side, the trigger position indicator position off the screen to either side, the trigger position indicator
remains at the edge of the screen to show the direction of the trigger remains at the edge of the screen to show the direction of the trigger
point. point.

When magnification is on, a 10X indicator appears at the bottom of the When magnification is on, a 10X indicator appears at the bottom of the
screen, to the right of the seconds per division readout. Figure 2Ć7 screen, to the right of the seconds per division readout. Figure 2Ć7
shows the bottom readouts. shows the bottom readouts.

NOTE NOTE
Displays in XY mode cannot be magnified. Displays in XY mode cannot be magnified.

When you magnify displays in scroll and scrollĆscan timeĆbase modes, When you magnify displays in scroll and scrollĆscan timeĆbase modes,
they update only after the instrument completely acquires the waveĆ they update only after the instrument completely acquires the waveĆ
form. form.

To turn off magnification, push the horizontal POS knob again. To turn off magnification, push the horizontal POS knob again.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć29 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć29

Horizontal Operation Horizontal Operation

3Ć30 In Detail 3Ć30 In Detail

 Maintenance Maintenance
The 222PS is covered by a standard Tektronix threeĆyear warranty. If it The 222PS is covered by a standard Tektronix threeĆyear warranty. If it
fails during the warranty period, return it to Tektronix for free servicing fails during the warranty period, return it to Tektronix for free servicing
(subject to the conditions of the warranty statement). (subject to the conditions of the warranty statement).

To arrange for warranty service or get an estimate for outĆofĆwarranty To arrange for warranty service or get an estimate for outĆofĆwarranty
repairs, call 1Ć800ĆTEKĆWIDE (1Ć800Ć835Ć9433). repairs, call 1Ć800ĆTEKĆWIDE (1Ć800Ć835Ć9433).

To help diagnose the problem, have the instrument serial number and To help diagnose the problem, have the instrument serial number and
firmware version number available. The serial number is located at the firmware version number available. The serial number is located at the
top right of the rear panel. To get the firmware identification number, top right of the rear panel. To get the firmware identification number,
follow the steps below. follow the steps below.

If your instrument must be returned for servicing, package it as deĆ If your instrument must be returned for servicing, package it as deĆ
scribed on page 3Ć33. scribed on page 3Ć33.

Identifying the Firmware Version Identifying the Firmware Version

To identify the 222PS firmware version, follow these steps. To identify the 222PS firmware version, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to access ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to access
the auxiliary functions menu. The display now appears as shown the auxiliary functions menu. The display now appears as shown
in Figure 3Ć12. in Figure 3Ć12.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć31 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć31

Maintenance Maintenance

AUX: ALIGN AUX: ALIGN

SELF CAL SELF CAL

CONFIG CONFIG

MOTOR TRIG MOTOR TRIG

Figure 3Ć12:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu Figure 3Ć12:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to ALIGN. This calls up the ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to ALIGN. This calls up the
XY Alignment Menu as shown in figure 3Ć13. XY Alignment Menu as shown in figure 3Ć13.

ALIGN: XY ALIGN: XY

IDENT IDENT

Figure 3Ć13:ăXY Alignment Menu Figure 3Ć13:ăXY Alignment Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to IDENT. A message apĆ ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to IDENT. A message apĆ
pears in the middle of the display, identifying the instrument, as pears in the middle of the display, identifying the instrument, as
shown in Figure 3Ć14. The version number you see may differ. shown in Figure 3Ć14. The version number you see may differ.

3Ć32 In Detail 3Ć32 In Detail

 Maintenance Maintenance

TEKĆ222PS VER: x.xx TEKĆ222PS VER: x.xx

Figure 3Ć14:ăThe Firmware Version Figure 3Ć14:ăThe Firmware Version

Repackaging for Shipment Repackaging for Shipment

Remember to put the instrument in its carry case before repacking. If Remember to put the instrument in its carry case before repacking. If
the original packing materials are unfit or unavailable, then repackage the original packing materials are unfit or unavailable, then repackage
the instrument in the following manner: the instrument in the following manner:

1. Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with a test strength 1. Use a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with a test strength
of at least 125 kg (275 lb) and an interior size at least 15 cm (6 in) of at least 125 kg (275 lb) and an interior size at least 15 cm (6 in)
greater than the instrument size in all dimensions. See AppenĆ greater than the instrument size in all dimensions. See AppenĆ
dix D: Specifications for instrument dimensions. dix D: Specifications for instrument dimensions.

2. Enclose the following information: 2. Enclose the following information:

H the owner's name and address H the owner's name and address

H the name and phone number of a contact person H the name and phone number of a contact person

H the serial number of the instrument H the serial number of the instrument

H the reason for returning the instrument H the reason for returning the instrument

H a complete description of the service required H a complete description of the service required

3. Disconnect the battery before packing the instrument. 3. Disconnect the battery before packing the instrument.

4. Completely wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or its 4. Completely wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or its
equivalent to protect the outside finish and keep harmful subĆ equivalent to protect the outside finish and keep harmful subĆ
stances out of the instrument. stances out of the instrument.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć33 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć33

Maintenance Maintenance

5. Cushion the instrument on all sides with three inches of padding 5. Cushion the instrument on all sides with three inches of padding
material or urethane foam, tightly packed between the carton and material or urethane foam, tightly packed between the carton and
the instrument. the instrument.

6. Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping 6. Seal the shipping carton with an industrial stapler or strapping
tape. tape.

7. Call 1Ć800ĆTEKĆWIDE (1Ć800Ć835Ć9433) for shipping instructions. 7. Call 1Ć800ĆTEKĆWIDE (1Ć800Ć835Ć9433) for shipping instructions.

3Ć34 In Detail 3Ć34 In Detail

 Power Power
You can operate the 222PS by using the internal battery or by plugĆ You can operate the 222PS by using the internal battery or by plugĆ
ging it into external power. This section explains how to do both. It also ging it into external power. This section explains how to do both. It also
explains how to charge and change the battery when necessary. explains how to charge and change the battery when necessary.

Battery Operation Battery Operation

The 222PS comes supplied with a battery for use when portable The 222PS comes supplied with a battery for use when portable
operation is convenient. operation is convenient.

Completely recharge the battery as soon as possible after each use of Completely recharge the battery as soon as possible after each use of
the instrument under battery power. the instrument under battery power.

NOTE NOTE
The instrument is shipped from the factory with the battery The instrument is shipped from the factory with the battery
charged. However, the battery may not retain its charge charged. However, the battery may not retain its charge
while in transit to you. Therefore, we recommend that you while in transit to you. Therefore, we recommend that you
charge the battery for three hours before operating the charge the battery for three hours before operating the
222PS for the first time. 222PS for the first time.

NOTE NOTE
Even when the instrument is off, current trickles slowly Even when the instrument is off, current trickles slowly
from the battery. If the current drawn off in this way deĆ from the battery. If the current drawn off in this way deĆ
pletes the battery below 7.32ĂV, the instrument cannot start pletes the battery below 7.32ĂV, the instrument cannot start
on battery power. If this condition occurs, recharge the on battery power. If this condition occurs, recharge the
battery immediately. Instructions for charging the battery battery immediately. Instructions for charging the battery
are on pageĂ3Ć37. are on pageĂ3Ć37.

Connecting the Battery Connecting the Battery

The battery is charged at the factory. It is shipped disconnected to The battery is charged at the factory. It is shipped disconnected to
prolong its shelf life. To connect the battery, follow these steps. prolong its shelf life. To connect the battery, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPlace the oscilloscope on its left side as viewed from the ĂĂStep 1:ăPlace the oscilloscope on its left side as viewed from the
front panel. front panel.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć35 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć35

Power Power

ĂĂStep 2:ăOpen the probe pouch and disconnect the probes. ĂĂStep 2:ăOpen the probe pouch and disconnect the probes.

ĂĂStep 3:ăSlide the battery compartment cover and probe pouch ĂĂStep 3:ăSlide the battery compartment cover and probe pouch
toward the rear of the instrument to unlock the locking tabs. toward the rear of the instrument to unlock the locking tabs.

ĂĂStep 4:ăLift the battery compartment cover and remove it. The ĂĂStep 4:ăLift the battery compartment cover and remove it. The
instrument now appears as shown in Figure 3Ć15. instrument now appears as shown in Figure 3Ć15.

Figure 3Ć15:ăSide View Without Battery Cover Figure 3Ć15:ăSide View Without Battery Cover

ĂĂStep 5:ăConnect the threeĆwire battery connector to the pins at ĂĂStep 5:ăConnect the threeĆwire battery connector to the pins at
the rear of the instrument. The orientation of the connector does the rear of the instrument. The orientation of the connector does
not matter. not matter.

ĂĂStep 6:ăReplace the battery compartment cover. Position the ĂĂStep 6:ăReplace the battery compartment cover. Position the
cover locking tabs into the matching slots in the battery compartĆ cover locking tabs into the matching slots in the battery compartĆ
ment. Make sure the locking tabs are all the way in the slots on ment. Make sure the locking tabs are all the way in the slots on
both the top and the bottom. If the tabs do not seat easily, first both the top and the bottom. If the tabs do not seat easily, first
seat the top tabs and then press on the bottom of the cover to seat the top tabs and then press on the bottom of the cover to
seat the bottom tabs. seat the bottom tabs.

ĂĂStep 7:ăPush forward on the rear of the battery compartment ĂĂStep 7:ăPush forward on the rear of the battery compartment
cover to lock the tabs. cover to lock the tabs.

ĂĂStep 8:ăAs soon as possible, charge the battery for three hours. ĂĂStep 8:ăAs soon as possible, charge the battery for three hours.
See the following instructions for charging the battery. See the following instructions for charging the battery.

3Ć36 In Detail 3Ć36 In Detail

 Power Power

Charging the Battery Charging the Battery

During periods of heavy use in a harsh environment, you will need to During periods of heavy use in a harsh environment, you will need to
recharge the battery after three hours of operation. Under better recharge the battery after three hours of operation. Under better
circumstances, it may need recharging less often. The battery will last circumstances, it may need recharging less often. The battery will last
longer if you recharge the instrument after each use. longer if you recharge the instrument after each use.

When the battery charge is low, a lowĆbattery indicator appears in When the battery charge is low, a lowĆbattery indicator appears in
the upper right corner of the display. If the battery voltage drops below the upper right corner of the display. If the battery voltage drops below
7.32ĂV, the instrument automatically turns itself off. 7.32ĂV, the instrument automatically turns itself off.

In order to recharge the battery, plug in the External Power AC Adapter In order to recharge the battery, plug in the External Power AC Adapter
and leave the instrument turned off for three hours. and leave the instrument turned off for three hours.

NOTE NOTE
The 222PS battery recharges whenever you plug it into The 222PS battery recharges whenever you plug it into
external power. However, it recharges faster if the instruĆ external power. However, it recharges faster if the instruĆ
ment is off. ment is off.

Charging the Battery Externally Charging the Battery Externally

You can charge the battery outside the instrument using the external You can charge the battery outside the instrument using the external
battery charger accessory. See the Optional Accessories information in battery charger accessory. See the Optional Accessories information in
Appendix E. You can also use any other charger that supplies 9.8ĂVDC Appendix E. You can also use any other charger that supplies 9.8ĂVDC
at 20_C with the supply current limited to 1ĂA. For best results in at 20_C with the supply current limited to 1ĂA. For best results in
various temperatures, thermally compensate the charging voltage by various temperatures, thermally compensate the charging voltage by
-10 mV per degree C. -10 mV per degree C.

For example, at 50_C, the charging voltage is For example, at 50_C, the charging voltage is

9.80 V + [(50 - 20)  -10 mV] = 9.50 V 9.80 V + [(50 - 20)  -10 mV] = 9.50 V

To charge the battery, follow the steps on the data sheet that comes To charge the battery, follow the steps on the data sheet that comes
with the battery charger unit. with the battery charger unit.

Time Out Time Out

An automatic timeĆout feature prevents the battery from losing power An automatic timeĆout feature prevents the battery from losing power
when the instrument is unattended for a long period. When you enable when the instrument is unattended for a long period. When you enable
the timeĆout feature, the 222PS turns itself off after two minutes of the timeĆout feature, the 222PS turns itself off after two minutes of
operating under battery power with no changes to the controls. operating under battery power with no changes to the controls.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć37 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć37

Power Power

You can disable the timeĆout feature so that the instrument stays on for You can disable the timeĆout feature so that the instrument stays on for
the life of the battery's charger. You can also enable the timeĆout the life of the battery's charger. You can also enable the timeĆout
feature again when you wish. To do so, follow these steps. feature again when you wish. To do so, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to display ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to display
the auxiliary functions menu. Figure 3Ć16 shows the display. the auxiliary functions menu. Figure 3Ć16 shows the display.

AUX: ALIGN AUX: ALIGN

SELF CAL SELF CAL

CONFIG CONFIG

MOTOR TRIG MOTOR TRIG

Figure 3Ć16:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu Figure 3Ć16:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to CONFIG to access the ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to CONFIG to access the
configuration menu. Figure 3Ć17 shows the configuration menu. configuration menu. Figure 3Ć17 shows the configuration menu.

CONFIG: TIME OUT CONFIG: TIME OUT

BAUD BAUD

MODEM ON MODEM ON

PROBE PROBE

Figure 3Ć17:ăThe Configuration Menu Figure 3Ć17:ăThe Configuration Menu

3Ć38 In Detail 3Ć38 In Detail

 Power Power

ĂĂStep 3:ăThe TIME OUT menu item appears boxed when the ĂĂStep 3:ăThe TIME OUT menu item appears boxed when the
timeĆout feature is enabled. To disable the timeĆout feature press timeĆout feature is enabled. To disable the timeĆout feature press
the top menu button. the top menu button.

This menu item is a toggle. Repeating this procedure reĆenables This menu item is a toggle. Repeating this procedure reĆenables
the timeĆout feature and boxes the menu item again. the timeĆout feature and boxes the menu item again.

ĂĂStep 4:ăTo clear the menu from the display, press the button ĂĂStep 4:ăTo clear the menu from the display, press the button
labeled CLEAR. labeled CLEAR.

Replacing the Battery Replacing the Battery

If you use the instrument on battery power often, you may wish to If you use the instrument on battery power often, you may wish to
obtain and charge extra batteries to take with you. Then, when the obtain and charge extra batteries to take with you. Then, when the
battery charge inside the instrument gets low, you can switch to one of battery charge inside the instrument gets low, you can switch to one of
the fully charged spare batteries. the fully charged spare batteries.

NOTE NOTE
Because the 222PS loses saved data after 30 s without Because the 222PS loses saved data after 30 s without
power, have the spare battery handy before beginning this power, have the spare battery handy before beginning this
procedure. procedure.

To replace the battery, follow these steps: To replace the battery, follow these steps:

ĂĂStep 1:ăOpen the battery compartment. Follow the procedure on ĂĂStep 1:ăOpen the battery compartment. Follow the procedure on
pageĂ3Ć35. pageĂ3Ć35.

ĂĂStep 2:ăDisconnect the battery from the threeĆwire battery conĆ ĂĂStep 2:ăDisconnect the battery from the threeĆwire battery conĆ
nector. nector.

ĂĂStep 3:ăLift the battery pack out of the battery compartment. ĂĂStep 3:ăLift the battery pack out of the battery compartment.

ĂĂStep 4:ăPlace the charged replacement battery into the battery ĂĂStep 4:ăPlace the charged replacement battery into the battery
compartment with the battery leads on the bottom facing toward compartment with the battery leads on the bottom facing toward
the threeĆwire battery connector. the threeĆwire battery connector.

ĂĂStep 5:ăConnect the battery to the threeĆwire battery connector. ĂĂStep 5:ăConnect the battery to the threeĆwire battery connector.

ĂĂStep 6:ăClose the battery compartment. Follow the procedure on ĂĂStep 6:ăClose the battery compartment. Follow the procedure on
pageĂ3Ć35. pageĂ3Ć35.

ĂĂStep 7:ăRecharge the low battery as soon as possible. See the ĂĂStep 7:ăRecharge the low battery as soon as possible. See the
procedure on page 3Ć37. procedure on page 3Ć37.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć39 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć39

Power Power

Storing the Instrument Storing the Instrument

When storing the instrument for a period shorter than two months, When storing the instrument for a period shorter than two months,
leave the battery connected. When the instrument is off, the current leave the battery connected. When the instrument is off, the current
drawn from the battery is less than 1ĂmA. With the battery in place, drawn from the battery is less than 1ĂmA. With the battery in place,
waveform settings and front panel setups remain in memory; they are waveform settings and front panel setups remain in memory; they are
available when you turn the oscilloscope on again. available when you turn the oscilloscope on again.

When storing the instrument for a period longer than two months, When storing the instrument for a period longer than two months,
follow these steps to extend the life of your battery and instrument. follow these steps to extend the life of your battery and instrument.

ĂĂStep 1:ăCharge the battery fully. Follow the instructions on ĂĂStep 1:ăCharge the battery fully. Follow the instructions on
pageĂ3Ć37. pageĂ3Ć37.

ĂĂStep 2:ăRemove the battery from the instrument. Use the proceĆ ĂĂStep 2:ăRemove the battery from the instrument. Use the proceĆ
dure on pageĂ3Ć35 to remove the battery cover. dure on pageĂ3Ć35 to remove the battery cover.

ĂĂStep 3:ăStore the fully charged battery in a cool place. ĂĂStep 3:ăStore the fully charged battery in a cool place.

Deep Discharge Deep Discharge

Under certain circumstances, the battery can become deeply disĆ Under certain circumstances, the battery can become deeply disĆ
charged. When in this state, the battery accepts a charge very slowly. charged. When in this state, the battery accepts a charge very slowly.
In some cases, it may not accept a charge at all. In some cases, it may not accept a charge at all.

A deep discharge condition is caused by three situations: A deep discharge condition is caused by three situations:

H using the instrument until the battery charge is low and then H using the instrument until the battery charge is low and then
storing it without recharging it storing it without recharging it

H storing the battery in a discharged state H storing the battery in a discharged state

H storing the instrument for over two months without removing the H storing the instrument for over two months without removing the
battery battery

If the battery becomes deeply discharged, you may be able to recover If the battery becomes deeply discharged, you may be able to recover
it with the following procedure. it with the following procedure.

ĂĂStep 1:ăCharge the battery for 24Ăhours. Follow the instructions ĂĂStep 1:ăCharge the battery for 24Ăhours. Follow the instructions
on pageĂ3Ć37. on pageĂ3Ć37.

ĂĂStep 2:ăIf the battery does not accept the charge, remove it from ĂĂStep 2:ăIf the battery does not accept the charge, remove it from
the instrument and try again to charge it using a 20ĂV power the instrument and try again to charge it using a 20ĂV power
supply that is currentĆlimited to 100ĂmA. supply that is currentĆlimited to 100ĂmA.

3Ć40 In Detail 3Ć40 In Detail

 Power Power

ĂĂStep 3:ăDuring this operation, check the power supply frequently ĂĂStep 3:ăDuring this operation, check the power supply frequently
for a currentĆlimited state. If the battery recovers from its state of for a currentĆlimited state. If the battery recovers from its state of
deep discharge, it will cause the power supply to currentĆlimit. Do deep discharge, it will cause the power supply to currentĆlimit. Do
not leave the battery connected to the external power supply not leave the battery connected to the external power supply
without checking it frequently. without checking it frequently.

ĂĂStep 4:ăIf the power supply shows that it is currentĆlimited, ĂĂStep 4:ăIf the power supply shows that it is currentĆlimited,
reinstall the battery in the instrument. reinstall the battery in the instrument.

ĂĂStep 5:ăContinue to recharge the battery. ĂĂStep 5:ăContinue to recharge the battery.

ĂĂStep 6:ăIf the battery does not recover, return it to Tektronix for ĂĂStep 6:ăIf the battery does not recover, return it to Tektronix for
safe disposal or dispose it in accordance with local environmental safe disposal or dispose it in accordance with local environmental
regulations. regulations.

External Power Operation External Power Operation

The 222PS has an external power input connector so that it need not The 222PS has an external power input connector so that it need not
use the battery power. You can connect the 222PS to a wall socket use the battery power. You can connect the 222PS to a wall socket
using the External Power AC Adapter or you can use your own exterĆ using the External Power AC Adapter or you can use your own exterĆ
nal power source. nal power source.

You can also operate the instrument on external power without the You can also operate the instrument on external power without the
battery present. For instructions on removing the battery, see battery present. For instructions on removing the battery, see
pageĂ3Ć39. pageĂ3Ć39.

AC Line Operation AC Line Operation

The 222PS comes with an External Power AC Adapter. This adapter The 222PS comes with an External Power AC Adapter. This adapter
converts AC line voltage to the 16-20ĂVAC input voltage that the converts AC line voltage to the 16-20ĂVAC input voltage that the
instrument requires. The adapter also recharges the 222PS's battery. instrument requires. The adapter also recharges the 222PS's battery.

NOTE NOTE
In order to maintain the battery charge for times when you In order to maintain the battery charge for times when you
require portable operation, we recommend that you use require portable operation, we recommend that you use
the External Power AC Adapter whenever practical. the External Power AC Adapter whenever practical.

In order to operate the instrument from line power, follow these steps. In order to operate the instrument from line power, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPlug the jack end of the External Power AC Adapter into ĂĂStep 1:ăPlug the jack end of the External Power AC Adapter into
the external power input on the rear panel of the instrument. the external power input on the rear panel of the instrument.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć41 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć41

Power Power

ĂĂStep 2:ăPlug the prong end of the External Power AC Adapter into ĂĂStep 2:ăPlug the prong end of the External Power AC Adapter into
an AC power source. an AC power source.

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the ON button. ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the ON button.

When the oscilloscope is operating under external power, an When the oscilloscope is operating under external power, an
external power indicator appears in the upper right corner of external power indicator appears in the upper right corner of
the display. the display.

Other Sources of External Power Other Sources of External Power

You can operate the 222PS from your own external power source. The You can operate the 222PS from your own external power source. The
power source must supply at least 15ĂW or 16ĂvoltĆamperes. power source must supply at least 15ĂW or 16ĂvoltĆamperes.

H An AC power source must provide 16-20ĂVAC at 47-400 ĂHz. H An AC power source must provide 16-20ĂVAC at 47-400 ĂHz.

H A DC power source must provide 12-28ĂVDC. H A DC power source must provide 12-28ĂVDC.

The external power input connector has two contacts. DC power of The external power input connector has two contacts. DC power of
either polarity can be between contacts. either polarity can be between contacts.

NOTE NOTE
To prevent blowing internal fuses, do not force either pin To prevent blowing internal fuses, do not force either pin
lower than .5 volts more negative than the instrument lower than .5 volts more negative than the instrument
chassis. The instrument chassis is connected to the chassis. The instrument chassis is connected to the
ground pin of the RSĆ232 communications port and to the ground pin of the RSĆ232 communications port and to the
external trigger connector common. external trigger connector common.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid possible injury or damage to the 222PS or To avoid possible injury or damage to the 222PS or
equipment connected to it, do not float the external trigger equipment connected to it, do not float the external trigger
common connector, the RSĆ232 communications port, or common connector, the RSĆ232 communications port, or
the external power input above 42ĂV peak. These inputs the external power input above 42ĂV peak. These inputs
are not electrically isolated from each other. are not electrically isolated from each other.

3Ć42 In Detail 3Ć42 In Detail

 Probes Probes
The 222PS comes with two P850 10X probes. An additional 1X probe, The 222PS comes with two P850 10X probes. An additional 1X probe,
the P400 probe, is available as an optional accessory. the P400 probe, is available as an optional accessory.

The P850 probes provide high attenuation so that you can scale The P850 probes provide high attenuation so that you can scale
signals approaching 600 VACRMS for better display. They are also signals approaching 600 VACRMS for better display. They are also
useful for measuring sensitive highĆimpedance electronic circuits or useful for measuring sensitive highĆimpedance electronic circuits or
highĆvoltage divider circuits. The optional P400 probes measure highĆvoltage divider circuits. The optional P400 probes measure
lowĆlevel signals requiring high sensitivity. lowĆlevel signals requiring high sensitivity.

CAUTION CAUTION

To prevent improper operation and the risk of electric To prevent improper operation and the risk of electric
shock, use only Tektronix P400 or P850 probes with this shock, use only Tektronix P400 or P850 probes with this
instrument. instrument.

Actual probe attenuation factors are 3X for the P400 probe Actual probe attenuation factors are 3X for the P400 probe
and 30X for the P850 probe. The instrument is calibrated to and 30X for the P850 probe. The instrument is calibrated to
compensate for these attenuation factors. Other probes or compensate for these attenuation factors. Other probes or
input devices will therefore give incorrect amplitude input devices will therefore give incorrect amplitude
displays. displays.

The optional P400 1X probe limits the maximum deflection factor of the The optional P400 1X probe limits the maximum deflection factor of the
222PS to 50Ăvolts per division. It decreases the probe tip input impedĆ 222PS to 50Ăvolts per division. It decreases the probe tip input impedĆ
ance to 1ĂMW and is sufficient for minimal loading of sensitive circuits. ance to 1ĂMW and is sufficient for minimal loading of sensitive circuits.
The P400 probe also limits input frequency to 20 MHz. The P400 probe also limits input frequency to 20 MHz.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS or the To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS or the
probes, do not apply more than 850ĂV peak between probes, do not apply more than 850ĂV peak between
probe tip and earth ground, between probe tip and probe probe tip and earth ground, between probe tip and probe
common, or between probe common and earth ground. common, or between probe common and earth ground.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć43 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć43

Probes Probes

Connecting the Probes Connecting the Probes

The input connectors for the probes are inside the pouch over the The input connectors for the probes are inside the pouch over the
battery compartment, on the right side of the oscilloscope as you face battery compartment, on the right side of the oscilloscope as you face
the screen. You must unzip or remove the pouch to access the conĆ the screen. You must unzip or remove the pouch to access the conĆ
nectors. nectors.

Probe Connectors Probe Connectors

Figure 3Ć18:ăSide View Showing Probe Connectors Figure 3Ć18:ăSide View Showing Probe Connectors
(Pouch Removed) (Pouch Removed)

To connect a probe, place its jack end into a channelĂinput connector. To connect a probe, place its jack end into a channelĂinput connector.
Press until you feel the probe is firmly seated. Press until you feel the probe is firmly seated.

You do not need to disconnect the probes before storing them in the You do not need to disconnect the probes before storing them in the
pouch. pouch.

CAUTION CAUTION

The exposed probe tips are sharp for probing through The exposed probe tips are sharp for probing through
solderĆresin and oxide layers. When placing the probes in solderĆresin and oxide layers. When placing the probes in
the side pouch, store them with the retractable hook tip the side pouch, store them with the retractable hook tip
attached to prevent unnecessary damage to the pouch. attached to prevent unnecessary damage to the pouch.

3Ć44 In Detail 3Ć44 In Detail

 Probes Probes

Configuring the Probes Configuring the Probes

To ensure that the 222PS is operating with the correct settings, confiĆ To ensure that the 222PS is operating with the correct settings, confiĆ
gure the instrument to match the probes you are using. gure the instrument to match the probes you are using.

To set the probe configuration, follow these steps. To set the probe configuration, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to display ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel to display
the auxiliary functions menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć19. the auxiliary functions menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć19.

AUX: ALIGN AUX: ALIGN

SELF CAL SELF CAL

CONFIG CONFIG

MOTOR TRIG MOTOR TRIG

Figure 3Ć19:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu Figure 3Ć19:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the CONFIG menu item to ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the CONFIG menu item to
access the configuration menu. The display now appears as access the configuration menu. The display now appears as
shown in Figure 3Ć20. shown in Figure 3Ć20.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć45 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć45

Probes Probes

CONFIG: TIME OUT CONFIG: TIME OUT

BAUD BAUD

MODEM ON MODEM ON

PROBE PROBE

Figure 3Ć20:ăThe Configuration Menu Figure 3Ć20:ăThe Configuration Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the PROBE menu item to ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the PROBE menu item to
access the probe menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć21. access the probe menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć21.

PROBE: CH 1 1X PROBE: CH 1 1X

CH 1 10X CH 1 10X

CH 2 1X CH 2 1X

CH 2 10X CH 2 10X

Figure 3Ć21:ăThe Probe Menu Figure 3Ć21:ăThe Probe Menu

3Ć46 In Detail 3Ć46 In Detail

 Probes Probes

ĂĂStep 4:ăBoxes appear around the items that represent the current ĂĂStep 4:ăBoxes appear around the items that represent the current
probe configuration. The default configuration for the 222PS probe configuration. The default configuration for the 222PS
assumes 10X probes on both channels. Therefore, those menu assumes 10X probes on both channels. Therefore, those menu
items appear boxed unless you have already changed the probe items appear boxed unless you have already changed the probe
configuration. configuration.

Press the menu button or buttons next to the menu items correĆ Press the menu button or buttons next to the menu items correĆ
sponding to the configuration you need. If the current probe sponding to the configuration you need. If the current probe
settings are appropriate, you need not press any buttons. settings are appropriate, you need not press any buttons.

ĂĂStep 5:ăAfter you have configured the 222PS for the correct ĂĂStep 5:ăAfter you have configured the 222PS for the correct
probes, press the CLEAR button to remove the menu from the probes, press the CLEAR button to remove the menu from the
display. display.

NOTE NOTE
The probe configurations are in the 222PS memory. They The probe configurations are in the 222PS memory. They
remain there until you change them again or until the remain there until you change them again or until the
memory loses power. If the probe configuration is lost, it memory loses power. If the probe configuration is lost, it
returns to the default value of 10X probes for both chanĆ returns to the default value of 10X probes for both chanĆ
nels. nels.

Probe Accessories Probe Accessories

The P850 probes come with four accessories (shown in Figure 3Ć22): The P850 probes come with four accessories (shown in Figure 3Ć22):

H a retractable hook tip H a retractable hook tip

H an IC lead protection shroud H an IC lead protection shroud

H a detachable probe common lead H a detachable probe common lead

H two cableĆmarker rings H two cableĆmarker rings

NOTE NOTE
When removing the hookĆtip assembly from the probe, you When removing the hookĆtip assembly from the probe, you
can accidentally disconnect the probe body from the can accidentally disconnect the probe body from the
probe cable. If this occurs, no signal can pass from the probe cable. If this occurs, no signal can pass from the
probe to the oscilloscope. To reconnect the probe body to probe to the oscilloscope. To reconnect the probe body to
the cable, insert the connector at the end of the cable into the cable, insert the connector at the end of the cable into
the probe body until it seats firmly. the probe body until it seats firmly.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć47 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć47

Probes Probes

1 1

2 2

Probe Probe

4 3 4 3

Figure 3Ć22:ăProbe and Accessories Figure 3Ć22:ăProbe and Accessories

3Ć48 In Detail 3Ć48 In Detail

 Probes Probes

1. You can use the detachable probe common lead shown in FigĆ 1. You can use the detachable probe common lead shown in FigĆ
ure 3Ć22 to connect the oscilloscope input common to the referĆ ure 3Ć22 to connect the oscilloscope input common to the referĆ
ence point of the circuit being tested. The probe common lead is ence point of the circuit being tested. The probe common lead is
not chassis ground and you can connect it to an active circuit not chassis ground and you can connect it to an active circuit
component. You can therefore make a floating measurement component. You can therefore make a floating measurement
across a component, with neither point connected to ground across a component, with neither point connected to ground
potential. potential.

WARNING WARNING

To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS or the To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS or the
probes, do not apply more than 850 V peak between probes, do not apply more than 850 V peak between
probe tip and earth ground, between probe tip and probe probe tip and earth ground, between probe tip and probe
common, or between probe common and earth ground. common, or between probe common and earth ground.

2. You can snap the colored cable marker rings shown in FigĆ 2. You can snap the colored cable marker rings shown in FigĆ
ure 3Ć22 into the grooves on the probe cable to distinguish ure 3Ć22 into the grooves on the probe cable to distinguish
between the probes connected to channel 1 and channel 2. between the probes connected to channel 1 and channel 2.

3. When testing integrated circuit devices, remove the hook tip and 3. When testing integrated circuit devices, remove the hook tip and
use the IC lead protection shroud on the probe tip. The shroud use the IC lead protection shroud on the probe tip. The shroud
shown in Figure 3Ć22 exposes the sharp probe tip, but it prevents shown in Figure 3Ć22 exposes the sharp probe tip, but it prevents
the probe from creating a short circuit across adjacent IC leads. the probe from creating a short circuit across adjacent IC leads.

4. The hook tip shown in Figure 3Ć22 can connect to accessible test 4. The hook tip shown in Figure 3Ć22 can connect to accessible test
points such as a component lead or test point connector. This points such as a component lead or test point connector. This
accessory frees your hands for other tasks. accessory frees your hands for other tasks.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć49 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć49

Probes Probes

3Ć50 In Detail 3Ć50 In Detail

 Saving and Saving and
Recalling Data Recalling Data
The 222PS has memory to store saved waveforms and frontĆpanel The 222PS has memory to store saved waveforms and frontĆpanel
setups. Data in this memory remains as long as the instrument has setups. Data in this memory remains as long as the instrument has
access to one of these power sources: access to one of these power sources:

H a battery with a charge greater than 7.32ĂV (see page 3Ć35 for a H a battery with a charge greater than 7.32ĂV (see page 3Ć35 for a
discussion of battery operation) discussion of battery operation)

H line voltage coming through a power cord plugged into a wall H line voltage coming through a power cord plugged into a wall
socket through the external AC adapter (see page 3Ć41 for a socket through the external AC adapter (see page 3Ć41 for a
discussion of line operation) discussion of line operation)

H power coming in from another external power source (see H power coming in from another external power source (see
pageĂ3Ć42 for a description of acceptable external power sources) pageĂ3Ć42 for a description of acceptable external power sources)

The instrument does not need to be on for it to access power for the The instrument does not need to be on for it to access power for the
memory. However, if you turn off the instrument, disconnect it from any memory. However, if you turn off the instrument, disconnect it from any
external power source, and remove its battery, it will lose any data in external power source, and remove its battery, it will lose any data in
memory after 30 s. memory after 30 s.

Waveforms Waveforms
A saved waveform is a record of a single acquisition cycle. Think of it A saved waveform is a record of a single acquisition cycle. Think of it
as a snapshot of a waveform. The 222PS lets you save up to four as a snapshot of a waveform. The 222PS lets you save up to four
waveforms in memory. It can recall these at any time. waveforms in memory. It can recall these at any time.

Saving a Waveform Saving a Waveform

Use these steps to save a waveform. Use these steps to save a waveform.

ĂĂStep 1:ăSelect the channel whose waveform you wish to save or, ĂĂStep 1:ăSelect the channel whose waveform you wish to save or,
if you wish, put the instrument in XY mode. if you wish, put the instrument in XY mode.

ĂĂStep 2:ăUsing the selected channel, acquire and display the ĂĂStep 2:ăUsing the selected channel, acquire and display the
waveform you wish to save. waveform you wish to save.

ĂĂStep 3:ăPosition the waveform where you wish it to be saved. ĂĂStep 3:ăPosition the waveform where you wish it to be saved.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć51 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć51

Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

ĂĂStep 4:ăPress the SAVE button on the top panel. Acquisition ĂĂStep 4:ăPress the SAVE button on the top panel. Acquisition
stops, the screen freezes, and a menu appears as shown in stops, the screen freezes, and a menu appears as shown in
Figure 3Ć23. Figure 3Ć23.

SAVE CH1 WV: 1 SAVE CH1 WV: 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

Figure 3Ć23:ăSaved Waveforms Menu Figure 3Ć23:ăSaved Waveforms Menu

If the waveform you are saving uses channel 1, the menu name is If the waveform you are saving uses channel 1, the menu name is
SAVE CH1 WV:. If the waveform you are saving uses channel 2, SAVE CH1 WV:. If the waveform you are saving uses channel 2,
the menu name is SAVE CH2 WV:. If the waveform you are saving the menu name is SAVE CH2 WV:. If the waveform you are saving
uses XY mode, the menu name is SAVE XY WV:. uses XY mode, the menu name is SAVE XY WV:.

The example in Figure 3Ć23 assumes a waveform acquired using The example in Figure 3Ć23 assumes a waveform acquired using
channel 1. channel 1.

ĂĂStep 5:ăPress the button next to the memory location in which ĂĂStep 5:ăPress the button next to the memory location in which
you wish to save the waveform. you wish to save the waveform.

NOTE NOTE
You can save only one waveform to each memory location; You can save only one waveform to each memory location;
the 222PS can store only four waveforms. If you choose a the 222PS can store only four waveforms. If you choose a
memory location that already holds a waveform, the memory location that already holds a waveform, the
instrument replaces it with the one you are presently instrument replaces it with the one you are presently
saving. saving.

The 222PS displays readouts of the parameters of the saved The 222PS displays readouts of the parameters of the saved
waveform at the bottom of the screen, as shown in Figure 3Ć24. waveform at the bottom of the screen, as shown in Figure 3Ć24.

3Ć52 In Detail 3Ć52 In Detail

 Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

In Figure 3Ć24, the waveform has been saved to memory locaĆ In Figure 3Ć24, the waveform has been saved to memory locaĆ
tion 1 and therefore named W1. Its vertical setting is 10 mV per tion 1 and therefore named W1. Its vertical setting is 10 mV per
division, its coupling is DC (as indicated by the =), and its horiĆ division, its coupling is DC (as indicated by the =), and its horiĆ
zontal setting is 10 ms per division. zontal setting is 10 ms per division.

SAVE CH1 WV: 1 SAVE CH1 WV: 1

2 2

3 3
W1 10 mV = 10 ms W1 10 mV = 10 ms
4 4

Figure 3Ć24:ăSaved Waveform Parameters Figure 3Ć24:ăSaved Waveform Parameters

A waveform saved in XY mode shows the scale factor for the x A waveform saved in XY mode shows the scale factor for the x
axis (channel 1) in the position of the volts per division setting. The axis (channel 1) in the position of the volts per division setting. The
scale factor for the y axis (channel 2) appears in the position of the scale factor for the y axis (channel 2) appears in the position of the
seconds per division setting. seconds per division setting.

ĂĂStep 6:ăTo clear the menu, press the button labeled CLEAR or ĂĂStep 6:ăTo clear the menu, press the button labeled CLEAR or
invoke another menu. Changing one of the following frontĆpanel invoke another menu. Changing one of the following frontĆpanel
controls also clears the menu: volts per division, seconds per controls also clears the menu: volts per division, seconds per
division, X10 magnification, or autolevel. division, X10 magnification, or autolevel.

ĂĂStep 7:ăAfter clearing the menu, the 222PS continues to display ĂĂStep 7:ăAfter clearing the menu, the 222PS continues to display
the saved trace and its readout. To clear them, press the button the saved trace and its readout. To clear them, press the button
labeled CLEAR again. labeled CLEAR again.

Recalling a Saved Waveform Recalling a Saved Waveform

To display a saved waveform, follow these steps. To display a saved waveform, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the RCL button on the top panel. A menu appears ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the RCL button on the top panel. A menu appears
as shown in Figure 3Ć25. as shown in Figure 3Ć25.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć53 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć53

Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

RECALL WVFRM: 1 RECALL WVFRM: 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

Figure 3Ć25:ăThe Recall Waveforms Menu Figure 3Ć25:ăThe Recall Waveforms Menu

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the memory location that holds ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the memory location that holds
the waveform you wish to view. The menu disappears and the the waveform you wish to view. The menu disappears and the
222PS displays the waveform at the same position in which it was 222PS displays the waveform at the same position in which it was
saved, with the same parameters in effect. The instrument also saved, with the same parameters in effect. The instrument also
displays readouts of these parameters at the bottom of the displays readouts of these parameters at the bottom of the
screen. screen.

If the instrument displays two saved waveforms, the last one you If the instrument displays two saved waveforms, the last one you
recall is the one whose parameters appear on the screen. recall is the one whose parameters appear on the screen.

If the 222PS is already displaying a saved waveform, the memory If the 222PS is already displaying a saved waveform, the memory
location that holds it appears boxed in the menu. If you press a location that holds it appears boxed in the menu. If you press a
button next to a memory location holding an already displayed button next to a memory location holding an already displayed
waveform, the waveform disappears from the screen. waveform, the waveform disappears from the screen.

If you press a button corresponding to an empty memory locaĆ If you press a button corresponding to an empty memory locaĆ
tion, the instrument beeps and the menu remains displayed. tion, the instrument beeps and the menu remains displayed.

ĂĂStep 3:ăTo clear the menu press the CLEAR button or invoke ĂĂStep 3:ăTo clear the menu press the CLEAR button or invoke
another menu. another menu.

ĂĂStep 4:ăAfter you clear the menu, the instrument continues to ĂĂStep 4:ăAfter you clear the menu, the instrument continues to
display the recalled waveform. To clear the recalled waveform, display the recalled waveform. To clear the recalled waveform,
press the CLEAR button again. This action clears all recalled press the CLEAR button again. This action clears all recalled
waveforms. waveforms.

ĂĂStep 5:ăTo erase a waveform from a memory location, save ĂĂStep 5:ăTo erase a waveform from a memory location, save
another waveform to the same location. another waveform to the same location.

3Ć54 In Detail 3Ć54 In Detail

 Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

Setups Setups
The 222PS can save four setups in its memory. If you often use the The 222PS can save four setups in its memory. If you often use the
same frontĆpanel setup to view certain signals, you may wish to save same frontĆpanel setup to view certain signals, you may wish to save
the setup. Saving a setup allows you to set the instrument up in the the setup. Saving a setup allows you to set the instrument up in the
same way just by executing a menu item. same way just by executing a menu item.

NOTE NOTE
You may wish to keep a list of the settings you have saved You may wish to keep a list of the settings you have saved
in each location. Such a list can be useful to refer to later. in each location. Such a list can be useful to refer to later.

NOTE NOTE
The 222PS setup save routine does not save vertical and The 222PS setup save routine does not save vertical and
horizontal positions, trigger level, or configuration menu horizontal positions, trigger level, or configuration menu
settings. settings.

Saving a Setup Saving a Setup

To save a setup, follow these steps. To save a setup, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăSet up the instrument exactly as you wish. ĂĂStep 1:ăSet up the instrument exactly as you wish.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the SETUP button on the top panel to invoke the ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the SETUP button on the top panel to invoke the
setup menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć26. setup menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć26.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć55 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć55

Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

SET UP: SAVE SET UP: SAVE

RECALL RECALL

ERASE ERASE

ERASE ALL ERASE ALL

Figure 3Ć26:ăThe Setup Menu Figure 3Ć26:ăThe Setup Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the button next to the menu item SAVE. A new ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the button next to the menu item SAVE. A new
menu appears, as shown in Figure 3Ć27. menu appears, as shown in Figure 3Ć27.

SAVE SETUP: 1 SAVE SETUP: 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

Figure 3Ć27:ăThe Save Setup Menu Figure 3Ć27:ăThe Save Setup Menu

ĂĂStep 4:ăChoose the memory location to which you wish to save ĂĂStep 4:ăChoose the memory location to which you wish to save
the setup. Press the button next to the number representing the the setup. Press the button next to the number representing the
memory location. memory location.

3Ć56 In Detail 3Ć56 In Detail

 Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

The 222PS saves the current instrument setup to the memory The 222PS saves the current instrument setup to the memory
location you selected. The menu disappears; the display shows a location you selected. The menu disappears; the display shows a
signal again. signal again.

CAUTION CAUTION

If one of the numbers appears boxed, as the number 1 If one of the numbers appears boxed, as the number 1
does in Figure 3Ć27, the memory location already contains does in Figure 3Ć27, the memory location already contains
a setup. Saving a new setup to that location erases the a setup. Saving a new setup to that location erases the
previous setup. If you wish to keep the old setup, select an previous setup. If you wish to keep the old setup, select an
unboxed number, representing an unused memory locaĆ unboxed number, representing an unused memory locaĆ
tion. tion.

Recalling a Saved Setup Recalling a Saved Setup

To recall a setup, follow these steps. To recall a setup, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the SETUP button on the top panel to invoke the ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the SETUP button on the top panel to invoke the
setup menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć26. setup menu, as shown in Figure 3Ć26.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the menu item RECALL. A new ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the menu item RECALL. A new
menu appears, as shown in Figure 3Ć28. menu appears, as shown in Figure 3Ć28.

RECALL SETUP: 1 RECALL SETUP: 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

Figure 3Ć28:ăThe Recall Setup Menu Figure 3Ć28:ăThe Recall Setup Menu

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć57 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć57

Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

ĂĂStep 3:ăMemory locations that contain instrument setups appear ĂĂStep 3:ăMemory locations that contain instrument setups appear
boxed. Select one of the boxed memory locations to recall the boxed. Select one of the boxed memory locations to recall the
setup you saved in it. Press the button next to the number repreĆ setup you saved in it. Press the button next to the number repreĆ
senting the memory location. The menu clears and the settings senting the memory location. The menu clears and the settings
change to the saved values. change to the saved values.

NOTE NOTE

If you choose an empty memory location, the instrument If you choose an empty memory location, the instrument
beeps and the menu remains. The instrument settings do beeps and the menu remains. The instrument settings do
not change. not change.

Erasing a Saved Setup Erasing a Saved Setup

You can erase a saved setup when it is no longer useful. To do so, You can erase a saved setup when it is no longer useful. To do so,
follow these steps. follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the SETUP button on the top panel to invoke the ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the SETUP button on the top panel to invoke the
setup menu. The display appears as shown in Figure 3Ć26. setup menu. The display appears as shown in Figure 3Ć26.

ĂĂStep 2:ăIf you wish to erase all the saved setups, press the button ĂĂStep 2:ăIf you wish to erase all the saved setups, press the button
next to the menu item ERASE ALL. next to the menu item ERASE ALL.

If you wish to erase only one setup, press the button next to the If you wish to erase only one setup, press the button next to the
menu item ERASE. A new menu appears, as shown in FigĆ menu item ERASE. A new menu appears, as shown in FigĆ
ure 3Ć29. ure 3Ć29.

3Ć58 In Detail 3Ć58 In Detail

 Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

ERA SETUPS: 1 ERA SETUPS: 1

2 2

3 3

4 4

Figure 3Ć29:ăThe Erase Setups Menu Figure 3Ć29:ăThe Erase Setups Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăMemory locations that contain instrument setups appear ĂĂStep 3:ăMemory locations that contain instrument setups appear
boxed. Select the boxed memory location whose setup you wish boxed. Select the boxed memory location whose setup you wish
to erase. Press the button next to the number representing the to erase. Press the button next to the number representing the
memory location. The menu clears and the instrument erases the memory location. The menu clears and the instrument erases the
setup in that memory location. setup in that memory location.

NOTE NOTE

If you choose a memory location without a setup in it, the If you choose a memory location without a setup in it, the
instrument beeps and the menu remains. instrument beeps and the menu remains.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć59 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć59

Saving and Recalling Data Saving and Recalling Data

3Ć60 In Detail 3Ć60 In Detail

 Store Mode Store Mode
The 222PS can display signals in store and nonstore modes. In store The 222PS can display signals in store and nonstore modes. In store
mode, the instrument displays traces between trigger events. In mode, the instrument displays traces between trigger events. In
nonstore mode, the 222PS displays traces only until the next display nonstore mode, the 222PS displays traces only until the next display
update (about 30Ăms) or until the next trigger. If a trigger does not update (about 30Ăms) or until the next trigger. If a trigger does not
occur in 30Ăms, the instrument blanks the display. Nonstore mode occur in 30Ăms, the instrument blanks the display. Nonstore mode
operates similarly to a conventional analog oscilloscope displaying a operates similarly to a conventional analog oscilloscope displaying a
signal that is triggered at the beginning of the trace. signal that is triggered at the beginning of the trace.

SingleĆsequence mode is the exception to this rule Ċ when in singleĆ SingleĆsequence mode is the exception to this rule Ċ when in singleĆ
sequence and nonstore modes, the 222PS displays the trace until you sequence and nonstore modes, the 222PS displays the trace until you
press the INIT button to reacquire the signal. press the INIT button to reacquire the signal.

You can tell whether the instrument is in store or nonstore mode by You can tell whether the instrument is in store or nonstore mode by
looking at the bottom readouts. When the 222PS is in store mode, an looking at the bottom readouts. When the 222PS is in store mode, an
st symbol appears in the middle of the bottom readout. In nonstore st symbol appears in the middle of the bottom readout. In nonstore
mode, this space is blank. Figure 3Ć30 shows a store mode readout. mode, this space is blank. Figure 3Ć30 shows a store mode readout.

+ +

160mV + st 20ms 160mV + st 20ms

Figure 3Ć30:ăHorizontal Readouts in Store Mode Figure 3Ć30:ăHorizontal Readouts in Store Mode

To place the 222PS in store mode, press the STORE button near the To place the 222PS in store mode, press the STORE button near the
center of the top panel. This button is a toggle. To take the instrument center of the top panel. This button is a toggle. To take the instrument
out of store mode, press it again. out of store mode, press it again.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć61 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć61

Store Mode Store Mode

3Ć62 In Detail 3Ć62 In Detail

 Triggering Triggering
The trigger controls are in the center of the front panel, as shown in The trigger controls are in the center of the front panel, as shown in
Figure 3Ć31. Figure 3Ć31.

Figure 3Ć31:ăTrigger Controls Figure 3Ć31:ăTrigger Controls

This section explains how to control the various aspects of the trigger This section explains how to control the various aspects of the trigger
so that the instrument displays the waveform in the manner you so that the instrument displays the waveform in the manner you
require. require.

The Trigger Light The Trigger Light

When the 222PS is triggered, the TRIG'D LED lights. When the 222PS is triggered, the TRIG'D LED lights.

NOTE NOTE
If the amplitude of your signal is less than 1/2 division, the If the amplitude of your signal is less than 1/2 division, the
instrument may not trigger. Readjust the volts per division instrument may not trigger. Readjust the volts per division
setting so that your display amplitude is larger. setting so that your display amplitude is larger.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć63 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć63

Triggering Triggering

Trigger Source Trigger Source

The 222PS has the ability to use the signal from either channel as the The 222PS has the ability to use the signal from either channel as the
trigger source. An external signal from the external trigger input trigger source. An external signal from the external trigger input
connector can also serve as the trigger source. connector can also serve as the trigger source.

To set the trigger source, follow these steps. To set the trigger source, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the SOURCE button in the trigger control area. A ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the SOURCE button in the trigger control area. A
menu appears on the display, as shown in Figure 3Ć32. menu appears on the display, as shown in Figure 3Ć32.

TRIG SRC: VERT TRIG SRC: VERT

CH1 CH1

CH2 CH2

EXT EXT

Figure 3Ć32:ăThe Trigger Source Menu Figure 3Ć32:ăThe Trigger Source Menu

H VERT is the default trigger source and therefore appears H VERT is the default trigger source and therefore appears
boxed unless you have previously selected another trigger boxed unless you have previously selected another trigger
source. This menu item indicates that the instrument triggers source. This menu item indicates that the instrument triggers
off the lowestĆnumbered active channel. If both channels are off the lowestĆnumbered active channel. If both channels are
off, the instrument is untriggered. off, the instrument is untriggered.

H Selecting CH1 specifies that the instrument use the signal H Selecting CH1 specifies that the instrument use the signal
from channel 1 as the trigger source. Channel 1 need not be from channel 1 as the trigger source. Channel 1 need not be
displayed to serve as the trigger source. displayed to serve as the trigger source.

H Selecting CH2 specifies that the instrument use the signal H Selecting CH2 specifies that the instrument use the signal
from channel 2 as the trigger source. Channel 2 need not be from channel 2 as the trigger source. Channel 2 need not be
displayed to serve as the trigger source. displayed to serve as the trigger source.

H Selecting EXT specifies that the instrument use the signal H Selecting EXT specifies that the instrument use the signal
from the external trigger input as the trigger source. from the external trigger input as the trigger source.

3Ć64 In Detail 3Ć64 In Detail

 Triggering Triggering

ĂĂStep 2:ăTo select the trigger source, press the menu button next ĂĂStep 2:ăTo select the trigger source, press the menu button next
to the appropriate menu item. to the appropriate menu item.

You can also cycle through the menu choices by continuing to You can also cycle through the menu choices by continuing to
press the frontĆpanel SOURCE button. The selected menu item press the frontĆpanel SOURCE button. The selected menu item
appears boxed. appears boxed.

ĂĂStep 3:ăWhen you have selected a trigger source, press CLEAR ĂĂStep 3:ăWhen you have selected a trigger source, press CLEAR
to remove the menu from the screen. to remove the menu from the screen.

External Triggering External Triggering

The 222PS has the ability to trigger on an external signal, such as a The 222PS has the ability to trigger on an external signal, such as a
clock pulse. The instrument acquires external trigger signals through clock pulse. The instrument acquires external trigger signals through
the external trigger input and trigger common reference connectors on the external trigger input and trigger common reference connectors on
the rear panel. These connectors are shown in Figure 3Ć33. the rear panel. These connectors are shown in Figure 3Ć33.

Figure 3Ć33:ăRear Panel External Trigger Connectors Figure 3Ć33:ăRear Panel External Trigger Connectors

WARNING WARNING

To avoid injury, do not connect the trigger common To avoid injury, do not connect the trigger common
reference input to voltages greater than 42ĂV peak. The reference input to voltages greater than 42ĂV peak. The
trigger common reference input is not insulated. trigger common reference input is not insulated.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć65 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć65

Triggering Triggering

WARNING WARNING

To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS or To avoid personal injury or damage to the 222PS or
equipment connected to it, do not float the external trigger equipment connected to it, do not float the external trigger
common connector, the RSĆ232 communications port, or common connector, the RSĆ232 communications port, or
the external power input above 42ĂV peak. These inputs the external power input above 42ĂV peak. These inputs
are not electrically isolated from each other. are not electrically isolated from each other.

To trigger on an external signal, follow these steps. To trigger on an external signal, follow these steps.

NOTE NOTE
To make the appropriate external trigger connections, you To make the appropriate external trigger connections, you
will need either a BNCĆtoĆbananaĆplug adapter or a pair of will need either a BNCĆtoĆbananaĆplug adapter or a pair of
test leads such as those used with a digital multimeter. test leads such as those used with a digital multimeter.

ĂĂStep 1:ăIdentify the signal you wish to use as an external trigger ĂĂStep 1:ăIdentify the signal you wish to use as an external trigger
source. source.

ĂĂStep 2:ăConnect the external trigger signal to the external trigger ĂĂStep 2:ăConnect the external trigger signal to the external trigger
input connector on the rear panel of the instrument. input connector on the rear panel of the instrument.

ĂĂStep 3:ăConnect the ground of the external trigger signal to the ĂĂStep 3:ăConnect the ground of the external trigger signal to the
trigger common reference input. trigger common reference input.

ĂĂStep 4:ăInvoke the trigger source menu. See page 3Ć64. ĂĂStep 4:ăInvoke the trigger source menu. See page 3Ć64.

ĂĂStep 5:ăSelect EXT to specify that the instrument use the external ĂĂStep 5:ăSelect EXT to specify that the instrument use the external
signal as the trigger source. signal as the trigger source.

ĂĂStep 6:ăPress CLEAR to clear the menu from the display. ĂĂStep 6:ăPress CLEAR to clear the menu from the display.

ĂĂStep 7:ăAdjust the trigger level. See page 3Ć69. ĂĂStep 7:ăAdjust the trigger level. See page 3Ć69.

When you use an external trigger source, the + trigger position When you use an external trigger source, the + trigger position
indicator does not appear on the screen. However, you can use indicator does not appear on the screen. However, you can use
the readout at the bottom left of the display to help you; it indiĆ the readout at the bottom left of the display to help you; it indiĆ
cates the trigger voltage level. The TRIG'D light still turns on to cates the trigger voltage level. The TRIG'D light still turns on to
indicate when the instrument is triggered. indicate when the instrument is triggered.

If you have trouble acquiring a trigger, press the AUTOLVL:PUSH If you have trouble acquiring a trigger, press the AUTOLVL:PUSH
knob. knob.

3Ć66 In Detail 3Ć66 In Detail

 Triggering Triggering

Motor Trigger Function Motor Trigger Function

The motor trigger function responds to pulse bursts such as those The motor trigger function responds to pulse bursts such as those
produced by uninterruptable power supplies (UPS) and variableĆfreĆ produced by uninterruptable power supplies (UPS) and variableĆfreĆ
quency motor drives. This function triggers on the first pulse that quency motor drives. This function triggers on the first pulse that
occurs in each burst if the interval between the bursts is at least occurs in each burst if the interval between the bursts is at least
2.5 ms. If the interval between bursts is less than 2.5 ms, the motor 2.5 ms. If the interval between bursts is less than 2.5 ms, the motor
trigger function does not operate. trigger function does not operate.

The motor trigger function also reduces noise on 50/60 Hz line signals The motor trigger function also reduces noise on 50/60 Hz line signals
resulting in cleaner triggering in noisy line environments. resulting in cleaner triggering in noisy line environments.

The trigger source, slope, level, and mode functions still operate The trigger source, slope, level, and mode functions still operate
normally when you select MOTOR TRIG. Note, however, that even normally when you select MOTOR TRIG. Note, however, that even
though the trigger source selections include EXT, motor trigger does though the trigger source selections include EXT, motor trigger does
not work with signals applied to the EXT TRIG INPUT. not work with signals applied to the EXT TRIG INPUT.

Triggering on Motor Drive Signals Triggering on Motor Drive Signals

To trigger on the variableĆfrequency signal that drives a motor, use the To trigger on the variableĆfrequency signal that drives a motor, use the
following procedure: following procedure:

ĂĂStep 1:ăToggle MOTOR TRIG on and set the trigger level midway ĂĂStep 1:ăToggle MOTOR TRIG on and set the trigger level midway
between the top and bottom of the desired pulse group. between the top and bottom of the desired pulse group.

ĂĂStep 2:ăSet the trigger slope to + for pulse groups separated by ĂĂStep 2:ăSet the trigger slope to + for pulse groups separated by
a low" region (Figure 3Ć34). Set the trigger slope to - if the a low" region (Figure 3Ć34). Set the trigger slope to - if the
region separating the pulse groups is high" (Figure 3Ć35). region separating the pulse groups is high" (Figure 3Ć35).

ĂĂStep 3:ăUse normal trigger mode if the oscilloscope has trouble ĂĂStep 3:ăUse normal trigger mode if the oscilloscope has trouble
triggering on a slow motor speed. triggering on a slow motor speed.

Triggering on 50/60 Hz Line Signals Triggering on 50/60 Hz Line Signals

To trigger on 50/60 Hz line signals, toggle MOTOR TRIG on and set To trigger on 50/60 Hz line signals, toggle MOTOR TRIG on and set
the other trigger controls to trigger either on the rising edge or the the other trigger controls to trigger either on the rising edge or the
falling edge of the waveform. The motor trigger function suppresses falling edge of the waveform. The motor trigger function suppresses
stray trigger signals that result from line transients and noise. stray trigger signals that result from line transients and noise.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć67 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć67

Triggering Triggering

Figure 3Ć34:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a Low Region Figure 3Ć34:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a Low Region

Figure 3Ć35:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a High Region Figure 3Ć35:ăMotor Drive Signals Separated by a High Region

3Ć68 In Detail 3Ć68 In Detail

 Triggering Triggering

Trigger Coupling Trigger Coupling

In the 222PS, the coupling of the trigger source is the same as the In the 222PS, the coupling of the trigger source is the same as the
coupling of the channel it is using. An external trigger is always DCĆ coupling of the channel it is using. An external trigger is always DCĆ
coupled. coupled.

Trigger Slope Trigger Slope

To determine the trigger slope presently in use, look at the bottom To determine the trigger slope presently in use, look at the bottom
readouts. At the left is the trigger level in volts. Immediately to its right readouts. At the left is the trigger level in volts. Immediately to its right
is the trigger slope indicator. A plus (+) indicates a positive slope; a is the trigger slope indicator. A plus (+) indicates a positive slope; a
minus (-) indicates a negative slope. minus (-) indicates a negative slope.

To change the trigger slope, press the SLOPE button in the frontĆ To change the trigger slope, press the SLOPE button in the frontĆ
panel trigger controls. This button toggles between positive and panel trigger controls. This button toggles between positive and
negative slopes. negative slopes.

Trigger Level Trigger Level

The trigger level presently in use appears at two places on the screen. The trigger level presently in use appears at two places on the screen.
It appears as a small + on the screen at the trigger position. Its value It appears as a small + on the screen at the trigger position. Its value
in volts is the leftmost of the bottom readouts. in volts is the leftmost of the bottom readouts.

You can set the trigger level of the 222PS anywhere within the vertical You can set the trigger level of the 222PS anywhere within the vertical
range of the instrument. The signal used for triggering need not range of the instrument. The signal used for triggering need not
appear on the screen. If the trigger level is off the screen and the appear on the screen. If the trigger level is off the screen and the
instrument is triggered, the + trigger level indicator is at the top or the instrument is triggered, the + trigger level indicator is at the top or the
bottom of the screen, indicating the direction of the trigger level. bottom of the screen, indicating the direction of the trigger level.

To set the trigger level explicitly, follow these steps. To set the trigger level explicitly, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăEnsure that the trigger mode is normal, auto baseline, or ĂĂStep 1:ăEnsure that the trigger mode is normal, auto baseline, or
single sequence. (In auto level mode, the 222PS sets the trigger single sequence. (In auto level mode, the 222PS sets the trigger
level automatically. Trigger modes are discussed on page 3Ć71.) level automatically. Trigger modes are discussed on page 3Ć71.)

ĂĂStep 2:ăTurn the TRIGGER LEVEL knob located in the left side of ĂĂStep 2:ăTurn the TRIGGER LEVEL knob located in the left side of
the trigger control area. Turning the outer knob clockwise raises the trigger control area. Turning the outer knob clockwise raises
the trigger level; turning it counterclockwise lowers the trigger the trigger level; turning it counterclockwise lowers the trigger
level. level.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć69 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć69

Triggering Triggering

AutoĆLevel AutoĆLevel
You can also set the trigger level so that the instrument finds the peak You can also set the trigger level so that the instrument finds the peak
values of the trigger signal and sets the trigger level at the midpoint. values of the trigger signal and sets the trigger level at the midpoint.
This feature is called autoĆlevel. It is useful for finding a trigger level This feature is called autoĆlevel. It is useful for finding a trigger level
quickly to trigger the display. quickly to trigger the display.

To do this on a oneĆtime only basis, push the knob labeled AUĆ To do this on a oneĆtime only basis, push the knob labeled AUĆ
TOLVL:PUSH. Pushing this knob sets the trigger level to a point TOLVL:PUSH. Pushing this knob sets the trigger level to a point
halfway between the peak values of the signal. However, unless you halfway between the peak values of the signal. However, unless you
are in autoĆlevel trigger mode, you can readjust the trigger level to any are in autoĆlevel trigger mode, you can readjust the trigger level to any
other level. other level.

You can also set the 222PS to perform a new auto level search each You can also set the 222PS to perform a new auto level search each
time the trigger is lost. To do so, see the section on trigger modes on time the trigger is lost. To do so, see the section on trigger modes on
page 3Ć71. page 3Ć71.

Trigger Position Trigger Position

The trigger position is indicated on the display by a + at the current The trigger position is indicated on the display by a + at the current
trigger location. trigger location.

When in store mode, you can set the trigger position to the beginning, When in store mode, you can set the trigger position to the beginning,
middle, or end of the waveform. This allows you to see waveform data middle, or end of the waveform. This allows you to see waveform data
distributed around the trigger point in several ways, depending on the distributed around the trigger point in several ways, depending on the
portion of the signal that interests you. portion of the signal that interests you.

H The POST trigger position displays most of the samples after the H The POST trigger position displays most of the samples after the
trigger event. The trigger position is near the beginning of the trigger event. The trigger position is near the beginning of the
trace. trace.

H The MID trigger position displays the samples evenly divided H The MID trigger position displays the samples evenly divided
before and after the trigger event. The trigger position is in the before and after the trigger event. The trigger position is in the
middle of the trace. middle of the trace.

H The PRE trigger position displays most of the samples before the H The PRE trigger position displays most of the samples before the
trigger event. The trigger position is near the end of the trace. trigger event. The trigger position is near the end of the trace.

NOTE NOTE
In nonstore mode, the trigger is always the sixth sample. In nonstore mode, the trigger is always the sixth sample.
Therefore the trigger position is always near the beginning Therefore the trigger position is always near the beginning
of the waveform; you cannot adjust it. If you change the of the waveform; you cannot adjust it. If you change the
trigger position when in nonstore mode, the change will trigger position when in nonstore mode, the change will
take effect when you put the instrument in store mode. take effect when you put the instrument in store mode.

3Ć70 In Detail 3Ć70 In Detail

 Triggering Triggering

To change the trigger position, follow these steps. To change the trigger position, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPut the instrument in store mode by pressing the STORE ĂĂStep 1:ăPut the instrument in store mode by pressing the STORE
button on the top panel. button on the top panel.

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the TRIG POS button on the top panel. A menu ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the TRIG POS button on the top panel. A menu
appears on the display, as shown in Figure 3Ć36. The trigger appears on the display, as shown in Figure 3Ć36. The trigger
position presently in effect appears boxed in the menu. position presently in effect appears boxed in the menu.

TRIG POS: POST TRIG POS: POST

MID MID

PRE PRE

Figure 3Ć36:ăTrigger Position Menu Figure 3Ć36:ăTrigger Position Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăIf you wish to use the boxed choice, press the CLEAR ĂĂStep 3:ăIf you wish to use the boxed choice, press the CLEAR
button. Otherwise, press the menu button next to the item you button. Otherwise, press the menu button next to the item you
wish to select. The menu clears, and your choice takes effect. wish to select. The menu clears, and your choice takes effect.

You can also cycle through the choices by pressing TRIG POS You can also cycle through the choices by pressing TRIG POS
repeatedly until the selection you want appears boxed. Then repeatedly until the selection you want appears boxed. Then
press CLEAR. press CLEAR.

Trigger Modes Trigger Modes

The 222PS has four trigger modes: normal, autoĆlevel, auto baseline, The 222PS has four trigger modes: normal, autoĆlevel, auto baseline,
and singleĆsequence. and singleĆsequence.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć71 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć71

Triggering Triggering

Normal Normal
When the instrument is in nonstore mode and normal trigger mode, it When the instrument is in nonstore mode and normal trigger mode, it
behaves in a manner similar to that of an analog oscilloscope. If a new behaves in a manner similar to that of an analog oscilloscope. If a new
trigger does not occur, the instrument holds the waveform until the end trigger does not occur, the instrument holds the waveform until the end
of the update period. Then the display is blanked until the next trigger of the update period. Then the display is blanked until the next trigger
occurs. occurs.

In store mode, the instrument stores the waveform on the display until In store mode, the instrument stores the waveform on the display until
a new trigger occurs. a new trigger occurs.

AutoĆBaseline AutoĆBaseline
When in autoĆbaseline mode, the instrument acquires and displays When in autoĆbaseline mode, the instrument acquires and displays
whatever data it can capture, regardless of whether a trigger event whatever data it can capture, regardless of whether a trigger event
occurs. This mode allows you to display information even when a occurs. This mode allows you to display information even when a
signal is too small to trigger on. signal is too small to trigger on.

If the instrument is using the scrolling timeĆbase mode for slow timeĆ If the instrument is using the scrolling timeĆbase mode for slow timeĆ
base settings, it remains untriggered because scrolling accepts no base settings, it remains untriggered because scrolling accepts no
triggers. triggers.

AutoĆLevel AutoĆLevel
In autoĆlevel mode, the instrument sets the trigger level itself. It deterĆ In autoĆlevel mode, the instrument sets the trigger level itself. It deterĆ
mines the high and low peak values of the signal, and sets the trigger mines the high and low peak values of the signal, and sets the trigger
level to the midpoint between them. If you adjust the trigger level level to the midpoint between them. If you adjust the trigger level
setting directly while in this mode and triggering is lost, the trigger level setting directly while in this mode and triggering is lost, the trigger level
quickly returns to the midpoint. quickly returns to the midpoint.

If no signal is applied to the trigger source, the autoĆlevel feature If no signal is applied to the trigger source, the autoĆlevel feature
causes the instrument to behave in the same manner as it does under causes the instrument to behave in the same manner as it does under
autoĆbaseline mode: it forces a trigger event and displays the resulting autoĆbaseline mode: it forces a trigger event and displays the resulting
data. data.

NOTE NOTE
If the instrument is using the autoĆlevel trigger mode and If the instrument is using the autoĆlevel trigger mode and
you change the trigger level or the trigger is lost, the you change the trigger level or the trigger is lost, the
instrument can sometimes fail to reacquire the new trigger instrument can sometimes fail to reacquire the new trigger
level. If this occurs, press the AUTOLVL:PUSH knob. level. If this occurs, press the AUTOLVL:PUSH knob.

The instrument attempts to set the trigger level automatically when The instrument attempts to set the trigger level automatically when
under three conditions: under three conditions:

3Ć72 In Detail 3Ć72 In Detail

 Triggering Triggering

H when you first enter autoĆlevel trigger mode H when you first enter autoĆlevel trigger mode

H when you push the AUTOLVL:PUSH knob H when you push the AUTOLVL:PUSH knob

H when a trigger event has not occurred within a certain time period H when a trigger event has not occurred within a certain time period
after the previous display of the trace after the previous display of the trace

The time the instrument waits after displaying the previous trace The time the instrument waits after displaying the previous trace
depends on the secondsĆperĆdivision setting. Table 3Ć3 provides these depends on the secondsĆperĆdivision setting. Table 3Ć3 provides these
time periods. time periods.

TableĂ3Ć3:ă AutoĆLevel Trigger Interval Time Limits TableĂ3Ć3:ă AutoĆLevel Trigger Interval Time Limits

Seconds per Division Trigger Interval Seconds per Division Trigger Interval

5Ăms or fewer 30Ăms 5Ăms or fewer 30Ăms

10Ăms to 50Ăms 4  secondsĆperĆdivision setting 10Ăms to 50Ăms 4  secondsĆperĆdivision setting

100Ăms or more 200Ăms 100Ăms or more 200Ăms

NOTE NOTE
If the instrument is using the scrolling timeĆbase mode, it If the instrument is using the scrolling timeĆbase mode, it
remains untriggered because scrolling accepts no trigĆ remains untriggered because scrolling accepts no trigĆ
gers. gers.

SingleĆSequence SingleĆSequence
In singleĆsequence mode, the instrument acquires one triggered In singleĆsequence mode, the instrument acquires one triggered
signal. It then displays the signal and holds it until you press the INIT signal. It then displays the signal and holds it until you press the INIT
button to start the sequence all over again. button to start the sequence all over again.

Changing a control that affects the signal acquisition also starts the Changing a control that affects the signal acquisition also starts the
sequence again. sequence again.

Setting the Trigger Mode Setting the Trigger Mode

To set the trigger mode, follow these steps. To set the trigger mode, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the button labeled MODE to the right of the trigger ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the button labeled MODE to the right of the trigger
control area on the front panel. A menu appears, as shown in control area on the front panel. A menu appears, as shown in
Figure 3Ć37. The trigger mode presently in effect appears boxed Figure 3Ć37. The trigger mode presently in effect appears boxed
in the menu. in the menu.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć73 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć73

Triggering Triggering

TRIG MODE: NORM TRIG MODE: NORM

AUTOLVL AUTOLVL

AUTOBL AUTOBL

SSEQ SSEQ

Figure 3Ć37:ăThe Trigger Mode Menu Figure 3Ć37:ăThe Trigger Mode Menu

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the menu item you wish to ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the menu item you wish to
select. The menu clears. If the trigger mode you wish to use is select. The menu clears. If the trigger mode you wish to use is
already selected, press CLEAR to clear the menu. already selected, press CLEAR to clear the menu.

You can also cycle through the menu choices by pressing MODE You can also cycle through the menu choices by pressing MODE
repeatedly until the trigger mode you wish is selected. Then press repeatedly until the trigger mode you wish is selected. Then press
CLEAR to clear the menu. CLEAR to clear the menu.

3Ć74 In Detail 3Ć74 In Detail

 Vertical Operation Vertical Operation
This section discusses controlling the vertical aspects of your signal. This section discusses controlling the vertical aspects of your signal.
The knobs you use to do this are at the top left of the front panel, as The knobs you use to do this are at the top left of the front panel, as
shown in Figure 3Ć38. shown in Figure 3Ć38.

Figure 3Ć38:ăThe Vertical Controls Figure 3Ć38:ăThe Vertical Controls

These controls affect only the currently selected channel. The channel These controls affect only the currently selected channel. The channel
does not need to be displayed. does not need to be displayed.

NOTE NOTE
Changes you make to a signal from a channel that is off Changes you make to a signal from a channel that is off
take effect as soon as you turn the channel back on. take effect as soon as you turn the channel back on.

Vertical Positioning Vertical Positioning

To position the selected channel signal vertically, turn the inner knob To position the selected channel signal vertically, turn the inner knob
labeled POS. labeled POS.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć75 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć75

Vertical Operation Vertical Operation

If the signal you are positioning is the trigger source, the trigger point If the signal you are positioning is the trigger source, the trigger point
indicator (a + on the display) follows the position of the signal. If you indicator (a + on the display) follows the position of the signal. If you
position the signal off the screen, the trigger point indicator remains at position the signal off the screen, the trigger point indicator remains at
the top or the bottom of the screen to show the direction of the offĆ the top or the bottom of the screen to show the direction of the offĆ
screen signal. screen signal.

Volts per Division Volts per Division

The vertical axis of the 222PS display has eight divisions. The 222PS The vertical axis of the 222PS display has eight divisions. The 222PS
can display a signal with a range of 50 mV to 500 V per division. (If you can display a signal with a range of 50 mV to 500 V per division. (If you
are using 1X probes, the range is 5ĂmV to 50ĂV per division.) A waveĆ are using 1X probes, the range is 5ĂmV to 50ĂV per division.) A waveĆ
form as large as 850 V peakĆtoĆpeak can fit entirely on the display. You form as large as 850 V peakĆtoĆpeak can fit entirely on the display. You
can size a waveform as small as 40ĂmV peakĆtoĆpeak to take up the can size a waveform as small as 40ĂmV peakĆtoĆpeak to take up the
entire display as well. entire display as well.

The volts per division knob is the outer of the two vertical control The volts per division knob is the outer of the two vertical control
knobs. It is labeled VOLTS/DIV. knobs. It is labeled VOLTS/DIV.

NOTE NOTE
If the amplitude of your signal is less than 1/2 of a diviĆ If the amplitude of your signal is less than 1/2 of a diviĆ
sion, the instrument cannot trigger. Readjust the volts per sion, the instrument cannot trigger. Readjust the volts per
division setting so that your signal amplitude is larger. division setting so that your signal amplitude is larger.

Variable Volts per Division Variable Volts per Division

When you turn the variable volts per division control, the signal beĆ When you turn the variable volts per division control, the signal beĆ
comes uncalibrated along the vertical axis Ċ voltage measurements comes uncalibrated along the vertical axis Ċ voltage measurements
are not necessarily accurate. This feature is useful for making such are not necessarily accurate. This feature is useful for making such
measurements as rise or fall times. measurements as rise or fall times.

To change the size of a signal to an arbitrary number of divisions, To change the size of a signal to an arbitrary number of divisions,
follow these steps. follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress in the inner knob of the vertical controls, the one ĂĂStep 1:ăPress in the inner knob of the vertical controls, the one
labeled POS. labeled POS.

ĂĂStep 2:ăHold the knob in while turning it counterclockwise. A ĂĂStep 2:ăHold the knob in while turning it counterclockwise. A
greaterĆthan sign (>) appears in front of the voltsĆperĆdivision greaterĆthan sign (>) appears in front of the voltsĆperĆdivision
readout for the selected channel. This symbol means the voltsĆ readout for the selected channel. This symbol means the voltsĆ
perĆdivision setting for that channel is now uncalibrated. perĆdivision setting for that channel is now uncalibrated.

3Ć76 In Detail 3Ć76 In Detail

 Vertical Operation Vertical Operation

ĂĂStep 3:ăTo return the signal to a calibrated voltsĆperĆdivision ĂĂStep 3:ăTo return the signal to a calibrated voltsĆperĆdivision
readout, press the POS knob in again. readout, press the POS knob in again.

ĂĂStep 4:ăHold the knob in while turning it clockwise slowly until ĂĂStep 4:ăHold the knob in while turning it clockwise slowly until
you hear a beep. The uncalibrated symbol disappears from the you hear a beep. The uncalibrated symbol disappears from the
readouts and you can now accurately determine the volts per readouts and you can now accurately determine the volts per
division for the signal. division for the signal.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć77 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć77

Vertical Operation Vertical Operation

3Ć78 In Detail 3Ć78 In Detail

 XY Mode XY Mode
When the 222PS is in XY mode, it samples and digitizes the incoming When the 222PS is in XY mode, it samples and digitizes the incoming
signal just as it does when not in XY mode. Therefore, trigger level and signal just as it does when not in XY mode. Therefore, trigger level and
secondsĆperĆdivision settings affect the XY display. secondsĆperĆdivision settings affect the XY display.

We recommend that before entering XY mode you set up your signals We recommend that before entering XY mode you set up your signals
as you require. To avoid a loss of detail in the display, set up the as you require. To avoid a loss of detail in the display, set up the
instrument so that it is showing as few cycles as possible before instrument so that it is showing as few cycles as possible before
putting it in XY mode. putting it in XY mode.

Entering and Exiting XY Mode Entering and Exiting XY Mode

To enter XY mode, follow these steps. To enter XY mode, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the DISPL button on the top panel. The screen ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the DISPL button on the top panel. The screen
appears as shown in Figure 3Ć39. appears as shown in Figure 3Ć39.

DISPLAY: INV1 DISPLAY: INV1

INV2 INV2

XY XY

RO OFF RO OFF

Figure 3Ć39:ăThe Display Menu Figure 3Ć39:ăThe Display Menu

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the menu item XY. The instruĆ ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the button next to the menu item XY. The instruĆ
ment clears the menu and displays its signals in XY mode. ment clears the menu and displays its signals in XY mode.

222PS Operator Manual 3Ć79 222PS Operator Manual 3Ć79

XY Mode XY Mode

NOTE NOTE

Because XY mode depends on plotting one signal against Because XY mode depends on plotting one signal against
another, both channels must be on. Therefore, if either another, both channels must be on. Therefore, if either
channel was off before you entered XY mode, the instruĆ channel was off before you entered XY mode, the instruĆ
ment now turns it back on. And when you are in XY mode, ment now turns it back on. And when you are in XY mode,
neither channel can be turned off. neither channel can be turned off.

ĂĂStep 3:ăWhen you finish working in XY mode, invoke the display ĂĂStep 3:ăWhen you finish working in XY mode, invoke the display
menu again by pressing the DISPL button on the top panel. The menu again by pressing the DISPL button on the top panel. The
XY menu item appears boxed to indicate that XY mode is seĆ XY menu item appears boxed to indicate that XY mode is seĆ
lected. lected.

ĂĂStep 4:ăPress the button next to the menu item XY again to take ĂĂStep 4:ăPress the button next to the menu item XY again to take
the instrument out of XY mode. The 222PS clears the menu and the instrument out of XY mode. The 222PS clears the menu and
displays the signals against a horizontal time base. displays the signals against a horizontal time base.

Positioning XY Waveforms Positioning XY Waveforms

In XY mode, you can change both the horizontal and the vertical In XY mode, you can change both the horizontal and the vertical
positions of a trace using only the vertical POS knobĊthe inner of the positions of a trace using only the vertical POS knobĊthe inner of the
two vertical control knobs. To position an XY waveform, follow these two vertical control knobs. To position an XY waveform, follow these
steps. steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăSelect channel 1. ĂĂStep 1:ăSelect channel 1.

ĂĂStep 2:ăRotate the vertical POS knob to position the trace horiĆ ĂĂStep 2:ăRotate the vertical POS knob to position the trace horiĆ
zontally. zontally.

ĂĂStep 3:ăSelect channel 2. ĂĂStep 3:ăSelect channel 2.

ĂĂStep 4:ăRotate the vertical POS knob to position the trace verticalĆ ĂĂStep 4:ăRotate the vertical POS knob to position the trace verticalĆ
ly. ly.

3Ć80 In Detail 3Ć80 In Detail

Appendices Appendices
 Appendix A: Appendix A:
Tutorial Tutorial
This tutorial will get you started making basic signal measurements This tutorial will get you started making basic signal measurements
with the 222PS. with the 222PS.

The Screen The Screen

Making accurate measurements with an oscilloscope means determinĆ Making accurate measurements with an oscilloscope means determinĆ
ing the voltage and timing of your signal from its size on the screen. ing the voltage and timing of your signal from its size on the screen.
Therefore, the screen of the 222PS is marked to help you determine Therefore, the screen of the 222PS is marked to help you determine
exact signal measurements. The vertical axis of an oscilloscope exact signal measurements. The vertical axis of an oscilloscope
represents voltage. Except in XY mode, the horizontal axis represents represents voltage. Except in XY mode, the horizontal axis represents
time. A waveform trace on the oscilloscope screen, therefore, repreĆ time. A waveform trace on the oscilloscope screen, therefore, repreĆ
sents the characteristics of an electrical signal as a function of voltage sents the characteristics of an electrical signal as a function of voltage
over time. The exact measurement of a particular trace, however, over time. The exact measurement of a particular trace, however,
depends on the scale factor you assign to the vertical and horizontal depends on the scale factor you assign to the vertical and horizontal
axes. To determine the exact voltage and timing of a trace, you need to axes. To determine the exact voltage and timing of a trace, you need to
know these facts: know these facts:

H how many volts each division represents H how many volts each division represents

H how many seconds each division represents H how many seconds each division represents

H how many vertical divisions the trace occupies on the screen H how many vertical divisions the trace occupies on the screen

H how many horizontal divisions the trace occupies on the screen H how many horizontal divisions the trace occupies on the screen

The 222PS provides a variety of aids to help you determine the exact The 222PS provides a variety of aids to help you determine the exact
size and location of your signal on the screen. You can read the size and location of your signal on the screen. You can read the
voltsĆperĆdivision and secondsĆperĆdivision scale factors directly from voltsĆperĆdivision and secondsĆperĆdivision scale factors directly from
the onĆscreen readouts. The screen has several markings to help you the onĆscreen readouts. The screen has several markings to help you
determine the exact size of your trace. determine the exact size of your trace.

Along the vertical axis, the screen has eight major divisions. Along the Along the vertical axis, the screen has eight major divisions. Along the
horizontal axis, it has ten major divisions. Major divisions form a grid horizontal axis, it has ten major divisions. Major divisions form a grid
that covers the entire screen. Each major division has five minor that covers the entire screen. Each major division has five minor
divisions. Minor divisions are marked along the center vertical and divisions. Minor divisions are marked along the center vertical and
horizontal lines. horizontal lines.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ1 222PS Operator Manual AĆ1

Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

Two horizontal dotted lines mark the 10% and 90% points of a signal Two horizontal dotted lines mark the 10% and 90% points of a signal
that takes up six vertical divisions. These lines can help you make riseĆ that takes up six vertical divisions. These lines can help you make riseĆ
and fallĆtime measurements, as explained on page AĆ7. and fallĆtime measurements, as explained on page AĆ7.

Figure AĆ1 illustrates these markings. Figure AĆ1 illustrates these markings.

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

Figure AĆ1:ăThe Screen Markings Figure AĆ1:ăThe Screen Markings

The screen markings are internal, so that no matter what angle you The screen markings are internal, so that no matter what angle you
view it from, your measurements are always accurate. view it from, your measurements are always accurate.

Measuring Voltage Measuring Voltage

The following two procedures will help you get started making peakĆtoĆ The following two procedures will help you get started making peakĆtoĆ
peak and groundĆreference measurements. peak and groundĆreference measurements.

NOTE NOTE
When you are measuring a stored waveform, use the When you are measuring a stored waveform, use the
vertical and horizontal scale factors that were in effect vertical and horizontal scale factors that were in effect
when you first saved the waveform. The scale factors in when you first saved the waveform. The scale factors in
effect when you recall the waveform are unrelated to it. effect when you recall the waveform are unrelated to it.

AĆ2 Appendices AĆ2 Appendices

 Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

Measuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages Measuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages

To find the voltage of a waveform peakĆtoĆpeak, follow these steps. To find the voltage of a waveform peakĆtoĆpeak, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPosition the waveform so that either the lowest or the ĂĂStep 1:ăPosition the waveform so that either the lowest or the
highest point (peak) is at the horizontal center of the screen. In highest point (peak) is at the horizontal center of the screen. In
Figure AĆ2, the high peak is at the center of the screen. Use the Figure AĆ2, the high peak is at the center of the screen. Use the
vertical center line to help you. vertical center line to help you.

ĂĂStep 2:ăCount the vertical major and minor divisions occupied by ĂĂStep 2:ăCount the vertical major and minor divisions occupied by
the waveform from its high point (labeled A in Figure AĆ2) to its the waveform from its high point (labeled A in Figure AĆ2) to its
low point (labeled B in Figure AĆ2). low point (labeled B in Figure AĆ2).

ĂĂStep 3:ăMultiply the number of divisions by the volts per division. ĂĂStep 3:ăMultiply the number of divisions by the volts per division.

A A

.2 V .2 V
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

+ +

Vertical Vertical
Divisions Divisions

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

B B

Figure AĆ2:ăMeasuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages Figure AĆ2:ăMeasuring PeakĆtoĆPeak Voltages

For example, Figure AĆ2 shows a sine wave that is five major divisions For example, Figure AĆ2 shows a sine wave that is five major divisions
high. As the readout at the top left indicates, the vertical scale factor is high. As the readout at the top left indicates, the vertical scale factor is
0.2 volts per division. Therefore, the peakĆtoĆpeak voltage of the sine 0.2 volts per division. Therefore, the peakĆtoĆpeak voltage of the sine
wave is 5  0.2, or 1Ăvolt. wave is 5  0.2, or 1Ăvolt.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ3 222PS Operator Manual AĆ3

Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

NOTE NOTE
The voltsĆperĆdivision scale factor always refers to major The voltsĆperĆdivision scale factor always refers to major
divisions. A minor division is oneĆfifth of a major division. divisions. A minor division is oneĆfifth of a major division.

Using a Ground Reference Point Using a Ground Reference Point

To find the voltage of a waveform with respect to ground, you must first To find the voltage of a waveform with respect to ground, you must first
set a ground reference level. Then you can take the measurement. set a ground reference level. Then you can take the measurement.

To set the ground reference level, follow these steps. To set the ground reference level, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the MODE button and select the AUTOBL trigger ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the MODE button and select the AUTOBL trigger
mode. mode.

ĂĂStep 2:ăSelect ground coupling for the channel you intend to use. ĂĂStep 2:ăSelect ground coupling for the channel you intend to use.
Press the button labeled CH1 (or CH2) located in the middle of Press the button labeled CH1 (or CH2) located in the middle of
the front panel, to the right of the display. the front panel, to the right of the display.

If that channel was selected, a menu appears on the display. If the If that channel was selected, a menu appears on the display. If the
channel was not selected, it now is. Press the button again to channel was not selected, it now is. Press the button again to
invoke the menu. invoke the menu.

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the item labeled GND. The ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the item labeled GND. The
menu disappears and a baseline trace appears on the screen. menu disappears and a baseline trace appears on the screen.

ĂĂStep 4:ăPosition the baseline trace to a reference horizontal line ĂĂStep 4:ăPosition the baseline trace to a reference horizontal line
on the screen. If the signal is positive with respect to ground, the on the screen. If the signal is positive with respect to ground, the
bottom line on the screen is a good reference to choose. bottom line on the screen is a good reference to choose.

ĂĂStep 5:ăChange the channel coupling to DC. ĂĂStep 5:ăChange the channel coupling to DC.

NOTE NOTE
To avoid losing your ground reference, do not change the To avoid losing your ground reference, do not change the
vertical position of the signal after you change to DC vertical position of the signal after you change to DC
coupling. coupling.

You can now make your measurement. You can now make your measurement.

ĂĂStep 6:ăCount the number of vertical divisions from the ground ĂĂStep 6:ăCount the number of vertical divisions from the ground
reference to the measurement point of the signal. reference to the measurement point of the signal.

ĂĂStep 7:ăMultiply the number of divisions by the volts per division. ĂĂStep 7:ăMultiply the number of divisions by the volts per division.

AĆ4 Appendices AĆ4 Appendices

 Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

For example, Figure AĆ3 shows a ground reference at the bottom of For example, Figure AĆ3 shows a ground reference at the bottom of
the screen. The measurement point is the most negative voltage of the the screen. The measurement point is the most negative voltage of the
signal. There are 3.5 major divisions between them. signal. There are 3.5 major divisions between them.

5V 5V
.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

Ground Vertical Ground Vertical

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....
Divisions Divisions
Reference Reference
Line Line

Figure AĆ3:ăMeasuring With Respect to Ground Figure AĆ3:ăMeasuring With Respect to Ground

The vertical scale factor is 5Ăvolts per division. Performing the multipliĆ The vertical scale factor is 5Ăvolts per division. Performing the multipliĆ
cation of 5  3.5 = 17.5 tells us that the most negative voltage of the cation of 5  3.5 = 17.5 tells us that the most negative voltage of the
signal is 17.5ĂVĂabove ground. signal is 17.5ĂVĂabove ground.

Measuring Time Measuring Time

The following two procedures will help you get started taking general The following two procedures will help you get started taking general
timing and riseĆtime measurements. timing and riseĆtime measurements.

NOTE NOTE
When you are measuring a stored waveform, use the When you are measuring a stored waveform, use the
vertical and horizontal scale factors that were in effect vertical and horizontal scale factors that were in effect
when you first saved the waveform. The scale factors in when you first saved the waveform. The scale factors in
effect when you recall the waveform are unrelated to it. effect when you recall the waveform are unrelated to it.

To measure the time a signal represents, use the following procedure. To measure the time a signal represents, use the following procedure.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ5 222PS Operator Manual AĆ5

Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

ĂĂStep 1:ăPosition the waveform so that its center crosses the ĂĂStep 1:ăPosition the waveform so that its center crosses the
vertical center of the screen, as shown in Figure AĆ4. Use the vertical center of the screen, as shown in Figure AĆ4. Use the
horizontal center line to help you. horizontal center line to help you.

ĂĂStep 2:ăCount the horizontal major and minor divisions occupied ĂĂStep 2:ăCount the horizontal major and minor divisions occupied
by one complete period of the waveform Ċ from the time it by one complete period of the waveform Ċ from the time it
crosses the center line in the positive direction until it again crosses the center line in the positive direction until it again
crosses the center line in the positive direction. crosses the center line in the positive direction.

ĂĂStep 3:ăMultiply the number of divisions by the seconds per ĂĂStep 3:ăMultiply the number of divisions by the seconds per
division. division.

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

+ +

.... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

1 ms 1 ms

Horizontal Horizontal
Divisions Divisions

Figure AĆ4:ăMeasuring Time Figure AĆ4:ăMeasuring Time

For example, one period of the sine wave in Figure AĆ4 occupies 8 For example, one period of the sine wave in Figure AĆ4 occupies 8
major divisions and 1 minor division. Each minor division is oneĆfifth, major divisions and 1 minor division. Each minor division is oneĆfifth,
or 0.2 of a major division. Therefore the waveform period is 8.2 major or 0.2 of a major division. Therefore the waveform period is 8.2 major
divisions. The horizontal scale factor, as indicated in the bottom right, divisions. The horizontal scale factor, as indicated in the bottom right,
is 1Ăms per division. Therefore, one waveform period is 1  8.2 = is 1Ăms per division. Therefore, one waveform period is 1  8.2 =
8.2Ăms. 8.2Ăms.

AĆ6 Appendices AĆ6 Appendices

 Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

Measuring RiseĆ or FallĆtime Measuring RiseĆ or FallĆtime

To measure the riseĆ or fallĆtime of a signal, follow these steps. To measure the riseĆ or fallĆtime of a signal, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPut the instrument in store mode. Press the button ĂĂStep 1:ăPut the instrument in store mode. Press the button
labeled STORE on the top panel of the instrument. labeled STORE on the top panel of the instrument.

ĂĂStep 2:ăSet the trigger position for the display's midpoint. Press ĂĂStep 2:ăSet the trigger position for the display's midpoint. Press
the button labeled TRIG POS and select the menu item MID. the button labeled TRIG POS and select the menu item MID.

ĂĂStep 3:ăSelect a voltsĆperĆdivision setting that produces a trace ĂĂStep 3:ăSelect a voltsĆperĆdivision setting that produces a trace
that occupies more than six vertical divisions. that occupies more than six vertical divisions.

ĂĂStep 4:ăUse the variable volts per division knob to adjust the trace ĂĂStep 4:ăUse the variable volts per division knob to adjust the trace
so that it occupies exactly six vertical divisions. so that it occupies exactly six vertical divisions.

ĂĂStep 5:ăCenter the trace vertically, as shown in Figure AĆ5, so that ĂĂStep 5:ăCenter the trace vertically, as shown in Figure AĆ5, so that
the baseline is at the first vertical division and the peak is at the the baseline is at the first vertical division and the peak is at the
seventh vertical division. seventh vertical division.

ĂĂStep 6:ăMeasure the horizontal distance from the place where the ĂĂStep 6:ăMeasure the horizontal distance from the place where the
trace crosses the 10% dotted line to the place where it crosses the trace crosses the 10% dotted line to the place where it crosses the
90% dotted line. 90% dotted line.

ĂĂStep 7:ăMultiply that distance, in divisions, by the seconds per ĂĂStep 7:ăMultiply that distance, in divisions, by the seconds per
division scale factor. division scale factor.

For example, for the signal in Figure AĆ5, the horizontal distance For example, for the signal in Figure AĆ5, the horizontal distance
between the 10% signal crossover point and the 90% crossover between the 10% signal crossover point and the 90% crossover
point is about nineĆtenths of a division. Multiplying 0.9 by a point is about nineĆtenths of a division. Multiplying 0.9 by a
horizontal scale factor of 50Ăns gives us a rise time of 45Ăns. horizontal scale factor of 50Ăns gives us a rise time of 45Ăns.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ7 222PS Operator Manual AĆ7

Appendix A: Tutorial Appendix A: Tutorial

> .5V > .5V

90% .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... 90% .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

SixĆdivision SixĆdivision
Signal ++ Signal ++

10% .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... 10% .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

50 ns 50 ns

RiseĆTime RiseĆTime

Figure AĆ5:ăMeasuring RiseĆTime Figure AĆ5:ăMeasuring RiseĆTime

ĂĂStep 8:ăTo change from riseĆtime to fallĆtime, press the SLOPE ĂĂStep 8:ăTo change from riseĆtime to fallĆtime, press the SLOPE
button in the trigger controls area of the front panel and repeat the button in the trigger controls area of the front panel and repeat the
procedure. procedure.

AĆ8 Appendices AĆ8 Appendices

 Appendix B: Appendix B:
Remote Communication Remote Communication
This appendix provides detailed information on remote communication This appendix provides detailed information on remote communication
between a 222PS Digital Storage Oscilloscope and an IBM PC/XT®. It between a 222PS Digital Storage Oscilloscope and an IBM PC/XT®. It
contains the following subsections: contains the following subsections:

H Introductory Information H Introductory Information

H Setting the Baud Rate H Setting the Baud Rate

H Command Formats H Command Formats

H Front Panel Encoding H Front Panel Encoding

H Error Codes H Error Codes

H Transfer Options H Transfer Options

H Interface Specifications H Interface Specifications

H Optional Accessories H Optional Accessories

NOTE NOTE
With the exceptions of the Introductory Information" and With the exceptions of the Introductory Information" and
Setting the Baud Rate" subsections, this appendix Setting the Baud Rate" subsections, this appendix
contains highly technical data and procedures. To use this contains highly technical data and procedures. To use this
data to its greatest potential, you must already have a data to its greatest potential, you must already have a
strong background in modern telecommunications. strong background in modern telecommunications.

Introductory Information Introductory Information

You can connect the 222PS to a PC using the RSĆ232 communications You can connect the 222PS to a PC using the RSĆ232 communications
port located on the rear panel, as shown in Figure AĆ6. port located on the rear panel, as shown in Figure AĆ6.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ9 222PS Operator Manual AĆ9

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

Figure AĆ6:ăRSĆ232 Communications Port Figure AĆ6:ăRSĆ232 Communications Port

You can connect the 222PS to a PC directly, using the optional accesĆ You can connect the 222PS to a PC directly, using the optional accesĆ
sory cable. (If you connect the 222PS to a different model PC, you sory cable. (If you connect the 222PS to a different model PC, you
may need a different cable.) You can also connect the 222PS to a PC may need a different cable.) You can also connect the 222PS to a PC
through modems that can communicate over a telephone line. FigĆ through modems that can communicate over a telephone line. FigĆ
ure AĆ7 illustrates both these possible arrangements. ure AĆ7 illustrates both these possible arrangements.

Modem Modem Modem Modem

Figure AĆ7:ăCommunication Between the 222PS and a PC Figure AĆ7:ăCommunication Between the 222PS and a PC

AĆ10 Appendices AĆ10 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

In either case, the PC must run appropriate terminal emulation and In either case, the PC must run appropriate terminal emulation and
communications software, such as the CAT200 software package communications software, such as the CAT200 software package
available from Tektronix or Procomm®, or a similar application. available from Tektronix or Procomm®, or a similar application.

If you are using the CAT200 software package from Tektronix and wish If you are using the CAT200 software package from Tektronix and wish
to use the same telephone connection for both voice and data comĆ to use the same telephone connection for both voice and data comĆ
munications, you can use the MODEM ON menu item on the configuĆ munications, you can use the MODEM ON menu item on the configuĆ
ration menu to start sending data. For more information, see the ration menu to start sending data. For more information, see the
manual that comes with the CAT200 software. manual that comes with the CAT200 software.

Setting the Baud Rate Setting the Baud Rate

Before the 222PS can communicate through modems to a computer, Before the 222PS can communicate through modems to a computer,
you must set the baud rate Ċ the rate at which the two machines send you must set the baud rate Ċ the rate at which the two machines send
and receive data. The 222PS gives you the choice of four baud rates: and receive data. The 222PS gives you the choice of four baud rates:
9600, 2400, 1200, or 300. 9600, 2400, 1200, or 300.

Determine the appropriate baud rate by checking the baud rate of your Determine the appropriate baud rate by checking the baud rate of your
modems. Configure your communications software to the same rate. modems. Configure your communications software to the same rate.

To set the 222PS baud rate, follow these steps. To set the 222PS baud rate, follow these steps.

ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the button labeled AUX FUNCT on the top panel. ĂĂStep 1:ăPress the button labeled AUX FUNCT on the top panel.
This accesses the auxiliary functions menu, as shown in FigĆ This accesses the auxiliary functions menu, as shown in FigĆ
ure AĆ8. ure AĆ8.

AUX: ALIGN AUX: ALIGN

SELF CAL SELF CAL

CONFIG CONFIG

MOTOR TRIG MOTOR TRIG

Figure AĆ8:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu Figure AĆ8:ăThe Auxiliary Functions Menu

222PS Operator Manual AĆ11 222PS Operator Manual AĆ11

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the menu item CONFIG to ĂĂStep 2:ăPress the menu button next to the menu item CONFIG to
access the configuration menu, as shown in Figure AĆ9. access the configuration menu, as shown in Figure AĆ9.

CONFIG: TIME OUT CONFIG: TIME OUT

BAUD BAUD

MODEM ON MODEM ON

PROBE PROBE

Figure AĆ9:ăThe Configuration Menu Figure AĆ9:ăThe Configuration Menu

ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the menu item BAUD. This ĂĂStep 3:ăPress the menu button next to the menu item BAUD. This
accesses the baud settings menu, as shown in Figure AĆ10. The accesses the baud settings menu, as shown in Figure AĆ10. The
selected baud rate appears boxed. selected baud rate appears boxed.

BAUD: 9600 BAUD: 9600

2400 2400

1200 1200

300 300

Figure AĆ10:ăThe Baud Settings Menu Figure AĆ10:ăThe Baud Settings Menu

AĆ12 Appendices AĆ12 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

ĂĂStep 4:ăIf the baud rate currently selected is the rate you require, ĂĂStep 4:ăIf the baud rate currently selected is the rate you require,
press CLEAR. Otherwise, press the menu button next to the baud press CLEAR. Otherwise, press the menu button next to the baud
rate you require. Then press CLEAR to remove the menu from the rate you require. Then press CLEAR to remove the menu from the
display. display.

Command Formats Command Formats

Commands, front panel setups, and waveforms sent over the RSĆ232 Commands, front panel setups, and waveforms sent over the RSĆ232
interface are composed of ASCII character strings. The ASCII characĆ interface are composed of ASCII character strings. The ASCII characĆ
ters represent hexadecimal numbers, with two characters per number. ters represent hexadecimal numbers, with two characters per number.
(See Front Panel Encoding for the meanings of the numbers.) (See Front Panel Encoding for the meanings of the numbers.)

The general RSĆ232 command format is The general RSĆ232 command format is

cmd arg:data; cmd arg:data;

where where

cmd is the command; cmd is the command;

arg is an argument to the command; and arg is an argument to the command; and

data is any additional data needed for the command. data is any additional data needed for the command.

There must be a single white space (either a space or a tab) between There must be a single white space (either a space or a tab) between
the command and argument. There must be no white space on either the command and argument. There must be no white space on either
side of the colon delimiter between the argument and the data. The side of the colon delimiter between the argument and the data. The
semicolon is the command terminator, but a carriage return also semicolon is the command terminator, but a carriage return also
terminates the command. Semicolons are necessary only in multipleĆ terminates the command. Semicolons are necessary only in multipleĆ
command strings. command strings.

NOTE NOTE
The interface executes a command as soon as it receives The interface executes a command as soon as it receives
the command terminator. If you place multiple commands the command terminator. If you place multiple commands
on one line, the interface executes them in sequence. You on one line, the interface executes them in sequence. You
can abort a command by sending an escape character. can abort a command by sending an escape character.

Commands, Queries, and Responses Commands, Queries, and Responses

Figure AĆ11 shows the set of commands and queries sent to the Figure AĆ11 shows the set of commands and queries sent to the
instrument and the responses sent by the instrument. Explanation for instrument and the responses sent by the instrument. Explanation for
each is given in the following text. each is given in the following text.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ13 222PS Operator Manual AĆ13

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

COMMANDS QUERIES RESPONSES COMMANDS QUERIES RESPONSES

CURV CURV? CURV CURV CURV? CURV
BUT ID? ID BUT ID? ID
DAC TRG? TRG DAC TRG? TRG
FP STA? READY FP STA? READY
DAC? DAC DAC? DAC
FP? FP XXX; FP? FP XXX;

Figure AĆ11:ăCommands, Queries, and Responses Figure AĆ11:ăCommands, Queries, and Responses

Commands Ċ The 222PS Digital Oscilloscope RSĆ232 interface Commands Ċ The 222PS Digital Oscilloscope RSĆ232 interface
supports these commands. supports these commands.

H CURV <frame>: <wfrm data>; H CURV <frame>: <wfrm data>;

This command loads waveform data into the specified 222PS This command loads waveform data into the specified 222PS
reference memory (REF1-REF4). The waveform data must be reference memory (REF1-REF4). The waveform data must be
sent as hexĆencoded ASCII characters. sent as hexĆencoded ASCII characters.

NOTE NOTE
Waveforms may be written back to channel 1 and channel Waveforms may be written back to channel 1 and channel
2, but the next acquisitions into those memories will 2, but the next acquisitions into those memories will
overwrite any previously saved waveforms. overwrite any previously saved waveforms.

<frame> is one of the following strings: <frame> is one of the following strings:

CH 1 Channel 1 waveform CH 1 Channel 1 waveform

CH 2 Channel 2 waveform CH 2 Channel 2 waveform
REF1 Reference waveform 1 REF1 Reference waveform 1
REF2 Reference waveform 2 REF2 Reference waveform 2
REF3 Reference waveform 3 REF3 Reference waveform 3
REF4 Reference waveform 4 REF4 Reference waveform 4

<wfrm data> is composed of <fp data>,<modebyte>,<byte <wfrm data> is composed of <fp data>,<modebyte>,<byte
count>,<waveform data>, and <checksum>, which are count>,<waveform data>, and <checksum>, which are
defined as follows: defined as follows:

<fp data> is composed of ten ASCII characters that repreĆ <fp data> is composed of ten ASCII characters that repreĆ
sent hexadecimal bytes of the frontĆpanel settings for the sent hexadecimal bytes of the frontĆpanel settings for the
waveform data. See Front Panel Encoding for the meanĆ waveform data. See Front Panel Encoding for the meanĆ
ing of the characters. ing of the characters.

AĆ14 Appendices AĆ14 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

<mode byte> is composed of two characters that indicate <mode byte> is composed of two characters that indicate
the mode the 222PS requires to display a waveform. the mode the 222PS requires to display a waveform.
Normally this byte will be 00. If the waveform is not Normally this byte will be 00. If the waveform is not
completely filled (which can happen at very high sweep completely filled (which can happen at very high sweep
speeds), this byte will be 02. If it is an XY waveform, the speeds), this byte will be 02. If it is an XY waveform, the
byte will be 03. byte will be 03.

<byte count> is composed of four ASCII characters repreĆ <byte count> is composed of four ASCII characters repreĆ
senting the data byte count for the waveform data (in senting the data byte count for the waveform data (in
hexadecimal). hexadecimal).

<waveform data> can be one of two ASCII character <waveform data> can be one of two ASCII character
sequences, depending on which display mode the sequences, depending on which display mode the
instrument is in. In YT mode, each data point is the instrument is in. In YT mode, each data point is the
hexadecimal value (represented by two ASCII characĆ hexadecimal value (represented by two ASCII characĆ
ters) of the YĆcoordinate. In XY mode, the XĆ and YĆcoorĆ ters) of the YĆcoordinate. In XY mode, the XĆ and YĆcoorĆ
dinates are sent as two hexadecimal values (represented dinates are sent as two hexadecimal values (represented
by four ASCII characters) with the XĆcoordinate value by four ASCII characters) with the XĆcoordinate value
first, followed by the YĆcoordinate value. first, followed by the YĆcoordinate value.

<checksum> is composed of two ASCII characters that <checksum> is composed of two ASCII characters that
represent the hexadecimal twos complement of the represent the hexadecimal twos complement of the
modulo 256 checksum of all data bytes, byte count modulo 256 checksum of all data bytes, byte count
bytes, and mode byte. bytes, and mode byte.

NOTE NOTE
Programmers: additional bytes may be added to the data Programmers: additional bytes may be added to the data
string after the checksum byte. This space is reserved for string after the checksum byte. This space is reserved for
future expansion. future expansion.

H BUT <button>; H BUT <button>;

This command simulates a button press, where <button> is This command simulates a button press, where <button> is
composed of one or two ASCII characters that represent a button composed of one or two ASCII characters that represent a button
code. The button codes are shown in Table AĆ1. code. The button codes are shown in Table AĆ1.

TableĂAĆ1:ăBUT Button Codes TableĂAĆ1:ăBUT Button Codes

Code Simulated Button Press Code Simulated Button Press

1 CLEAR 1 CLEAR
2 Menu Item 0 2 Menu Item 0
3 Menu Item 1 3 Menu Item 1

222PS Operator Manual AĆ15 222PS Operator Manual AĆ15

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ1:ăBUT Button Codes (Cont.) TableĂAĆ1:ăBUT Button Codes (Cont.)

Code Simulated Button Press Code Simulated Button Press

4 Menu Item 2 4 Menu Item 2
5 Menu Item 3 5 Menu Item 3
6 OFF 6 OFF
9 Trigger SOURCE 9 Trigger SOURCE
A Trigger MODE A Trigger MODE
B Trigger SLOPE B Trigger SLOPE
C CH 2 Select C CH 2 Select
D Ch1 Select D Ch1 Select
E AUTO SETUP E AUTO SETUP
11 FrontĆPanel Setup Menu 11 FrontĆPanel Setup Menu
12 Trigger Position Menu 12 Trigger Position Menu
13 Auxiliary Function Menu 13 Auxiliary Function Menu
14 Display Mode Menu 14 Display Mode Menu
19 Save Waveform Menu 19 Save Waveform Menu
1A Recall Waveform Menu 1A Recall Waveform Menu
1B STORE/NONSTORE 1B STORE/NONSTORE
1C Acquisition Mode Menu 1C Acquisition Mode Menu
20 X10 MAG 20 X10 MAG
21 Variable Gain 21 Variable Gain
22 AUTO LVL: PUSH 22 AUTO LVL: PUSH

H DAC <DAC code>: <DAC value>; H DAC <DAC code>: <DAC value>;
This command sets a DAC value. A DAC is a digitalĆtoĆanalog This command sets a DAC value. A DAC is a digitalĆtoĆanalog
converters for digitized potentiometer settings. The digitalĆtoĆanaĆ converters for digitized potentiometer settings. The digitalĆtoĆanaĆ
log converters determine the variable control settings for the log converters determine the variable control settings for the
POSITION controls (horizontal and vertical), the trigger LEVEL POSITION controls (horizontal and vertical), the trigger LEVEL
settings (CH1, CH2, and EXT), and the variable vertical gain (CH1 settings (CH1, CH2, and EXT), and the variable vertical gain (CH1
and CH2). See Table AĆ2 for the DAC code and DAC value data. and CH2). See Table AĆ2 for the DAC code and DAC value data.

AĆ16 Appendices AĆ16 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ2:ăDAC Code and Value Data TableĂAĆ2:ăDAC Code and Value Data

DAC DAC Range Scale Reference DAC DAC Range Scale Reference
Code Code
Horiz POSITION 00 0-1FFC ±5 div Full left 0 Horiz POSITION 00 0-1FFC ±5 div Full left 0
CH 1 Trigger LEVEL 01 0-1FFC ±30 div Center 0FFF CH 1 Trigger LEVEL 01 0-1FFC ±30 div Center 0FFF
CH 2 Trigger LEVEL 02 0-1FFC ±30 div Center 0FFF CH 2 Trigger LEVEL 02 0-1FFC ±30 div Center 0FFF
EXT Trigger LEVEL 03 0-1FFC ±2.33 V Center 0FFF EXT Trigger LEVEL 03 0-1FFC ±2.33 V Center 0FFF
CH 2 VAR Gain 04 0-03FF -2.5:1 to Cal'd 03FF CH 2 VAR Gain 04 0-03FF -2.5:1 to Cal'd 03FF
1:1 1:1
CH 1 VAR Gain 05 0-03FF -2.5:1 to Cal'd 03FF CH 1 VAR Gain 05 0-03FF -2.5:1 to Cal'd 03FF
1:1 1:1
CH 2 POSITION 06 0-1FFC ±12 div Center 0FFF CH 2 POSITION 06 0-1FFC ±12 div Center 0FFF
CH 1 POSITION 07 0-1FFC ±12 div Center 0FFF CH 1 POSITION 07 0-1FFC ±12 div Center 0FFF

H FP <log fp>:<fp data>; H FP <log fp>:<fp data>;

This command sends a frontĆpanel setup to the <log fp> locaĆ This command sends a frontĆpanel setup to the <log fp> locaĆ
tion. tion.

<log fp> is one of the following: <log fp> is one of the following:

ACQ Acquisition system ACQ Acquisition system

REF1 Reference waveform 1 REF1 Reference waveform 1
REF2 Reference waveform 2 REF2 Reference waveform 2
REF3 Reference waveform 3 REF3 Reference waveform 3
REF4 Reference waveform 4 REF4 Reference waveform 4
STR1 Front panel setup 1 STR1 Front panel setup 1
STR2 Front panel setup 2 STR2 Front panel setup 2
STR3 Front panel setup 3 STR3 Front panel setup 3
STR4 Front panel setup 4 STR4 Front panel setup 4

<fp data> is composed of ten ASCII characters that represent <fp data> is composed of ten ASCII characters that represent
the five, twoĆcharacter hexadecimal bytes of a logical frontĆ the five, twoĆcharacter hexadecimal bytes of a logical frontĆ
panel setup. See Tables AĆ3 through AĆ6 to encode and panel setup. See Tables AĆ3 through AĆ6 to encode and
decode <fpdata>. decode <fpdata>.

NOTE NOTE
REF1-REF4 front panel volts can be affected by the REF1-REF4 front panel volts can be affected by the
selected probe configuration in the 222PS instrument (see selected probe configuration in the 222PS instrument (see
Front Panel Encoding section). Front Panel Encoding section).

222PS Operator Manual AĆ17 222PS Operator Manual AĆ17

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

Queries Ċ The 222PS Digital Storage Oscilloscope RSĆ232 interface Queries Ċ The 222PS Digital Storage Oscilloscope RSĆ232 interface
supports the following queries: supports the following queries:

H CURV? <frame>; H CURV? <frame>;

This query requests waveform data. The instrument sends waveĆ This query requests waveform data. The instrument sends waveĆ
form data as hexĆencoded ASCII characters. <frame> is one of form data as hexĆencoded ASCII characters. <frame> is one of
six possible sources for curve data (CH1, CH2, REF1, REF2, six possible sources for curve data (CH1, CH2, REF1, REF2,
REF3, or REF4). REF3, or REF4).

H ID?; H ID?;
This query requests instrument identification and software version. This query requests instrument identification and software version.

H TRG?; H TRG?;
This query requests the trigger state. This query requests the trigger state.

H STA?; H STA?;
This query requests the communication task status. This query requests the communication task status.

H DAC? <DAC code> H DAC? <DAC code>

This query requests a DAC value. <DACcode> is one of eight This query requests a DAC value. <DACcode> is one of eight
DACs for digitized potentiometer settings. See Table AĆ2 for DAC DACs for digitized potentiometer settings. See Table AĆ2 for DAC
identification. identification.

H FP? <log fp> H FP? <log fp>

This query requests a front panel setup. See page AĆ17 for a This query requests a front panel setup. See page AĆ17 for a
listing of <logfp> values. listing of <logfp> values.

NOTE NOTE
If you query an empty reference waveform location, you If you query an empty reference waveform location, you
will receive a status error (STA 0005) in response. If you will receive a status error (STA 0005) in response. If you
query an empty frontĆpanel location, the response you query an empty frontĆpanel location, the response you
receive will contain unreliable <fp data>. If you query an receive will contain unreliable <fp data>. If you query an
active channel before it acquires a waveform the response active channel before it acquires a waveform the response
you receive will contain unreliable <wfrm data>. you receive will contain unreliable <wfrm data>.

AĆ18 Appendices AĆ18 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

Responses Ċ The following responses occur as a result of the Responses Ċ The following responses occur as a result of the
associated query: associated query:

NOTE NOTE
If the query or command is terminated by a semicolon, If the query or command is terminated by a semicolon,
responses will be terminated by a semicolon. If the query responses will be terminated by a semicolon. If the query
or command is terminated by a carriage return, the or command is terminated by a carriage return, the
response will be terminated by a semicolon followed by a response will be terminated by a semicolon followed by a
carriage return. carriage return.

H CURV <frame>:<wfrm data> H CURV <frame>:<wfrm data>

A frame is one of the six possible sources of waveform data in the A frame is one of the six possible sources of waveform data in the
instrument (CH1, CH2, REF1, REF2, REF3, or REF4) asked for in instrument (CH1, CH2, REF1, REF2, REF3, or REF4) asked for in
the CURV? query. The waveform data includes the frontĆpanel the CURV? query. The waveform data includes the frontĆpanel
setting and the waveform data point values as hexĆencoded ASCII setting and the waveform data point values as hexĆencoded ASCII
characters, as with the CURV command. characters, as with the CURV command.

H ID TEKĆ222PSVER:X.XX H ID TEKĆ222PSVER:X.XX
This response is in reply to an ID? query. X.XX is the firmware This response is in reply to an ID? query. X.XX is the firmware
version installed in the instrument. version installed in the instrument.

H TRG YES or NO H TRG YES or NO

This response indicates if the TRIG'D LED is on (YES: triggered) This response indicates if the TRIG'D LED is on (YES: triggered)
or off (NO: not triggered) in response to the TRG? query. or off (NO: not triggered) in response to the TRG? query.

H READY H READY
This is the reply to a STA? query when the instrument is ready to This is the reply to a STA? query when the instrument is ready to
communicate. The the instrument sends the same response as communicate. The the instrument sends the same response as
the result of a carriage return. If the instrument is not ready, it the result of a carriage return. If the instrument is not ready, it
delays reply until ready. delays reply until ready.

H DAC <DAC code>:<DAC value> H DAC <DAC code>:<DAC value>

In response to the DAC? query, the setting of the queried DAC is In response to the DAC? query, the setting of the queried DAC is
returned in the same form as the DAC command. See Table AĆ2 returned in the same form as the DAC command. See Table AĆ2
for DAC identification data. for DAC identification data.

H FP <log fp>:<fp data> H FP <log fp>:<fp data>

This response is in the same form as the FP command. The byte This response is in the same form as the FP command. The byte
decoding (by bit) for the frontĆpanel settings is given in Tables AĆ3 decoding (by bit) for the frontĆpanel settings is given in Tables AĆ3
through AĆ6; each table shows the decoding for one of the hexaĆ through AĆ6; each table shows the decoding for one of the hexaĆ
decimal bytes. decimal bytes.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ19 222PS Operator Manual AĆ19

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

NOTE NOTE
If you send <fp data> originally taken from a location If you send <fp data> originally taken from a location
where a setup had not yet been saved, the resulting where a setup had not yet been saved, the resulting
instrument setup will be unreliable, possibly inducing a instrument setup will be unreliable, possibly inducing a
lock up condition. lock up condition.

NOTE NOTE
REF1 through REF4 front panel volts can be affected by REF1 through REF4 front panel volts can be affected by
probe configuration in the 222PS (see the Front Panel probe configuration in the 222PS (see the Front Panel
Encoding section). Encoding section).

FrontĆPanel Encoding FrontĆPanel Encoding

Tables AĆ3 through AĆ6 show how the ten ASCII characters of the Tables AĆ3 through AĆ6 show how the ten ASCII characters of the
logical frontĆpanel hexadecimal bytes are encoded. The tables divide logical frontĆpanel hexadecimal bytes are encoded. The tables divide
the coded number of the front panel setup into five bytes of two ASCII the coded number of the front panel setup into five bytes of two ASCII
characters each. characters each.

Vertical Settings Vertical Settings

From Table AĆ3 you can decode the ASCII characters for the channel 1 From Table AĆ3 you can decode the ASCII characters for the channel 1
and channel 2 vertical settings. For example, in the setup data string and channel 2 vertical settings. For example, in the setup data string
FP ACQ:24240C2112 the first four characters are 2424. Breaking FP ACQ:24240C2112 the first four characters are 2424. Breaking
these numbers into binary bits, a 2 equals 0010, and a 4 equals 0100. these numbers into binary bits, a 2 equals 0010, and a 4 equals 0100.
Looking at the bit information for the first character tells us that INVERT Looking at the bit information for the first character tells us that INVERT
is OFF, VAR is disabled, and the input coupling is GND. For the is OFF, VAR is disabled, and the input coupling is GND. For the
second character, its bit values are given, but looking at the Hex Value second character, its bit values are given, but looking at the Hex Value
column tells us that the VOLTS/DIV setting is 0.1 V per division. Exactly column tells us that the VOLTS/DIV setting is 0.1 V per division. Exactly
the same values are given for characters 3 and 4 as 1 and 2, respecĆ the same values are given for characters 3 and 4 as 1 and 2, respecĆ
tively; therefore the channel 2 settings are the same as the channel 1 tively; therefore the channel 2 settings are the same as the channel 1
settings. settings.

To change the VOLTS/DIV setting for channel 1 to 1 V, change the To change the VOLTS/DIV setting for channel 1 to 1 V, change the
value of character 2 from 4 to 7 in the front panel setup string when it is value of character 2 from 4 to 7 in the front panel setup string when it is
sent back to the oscilloscope. The string sent back then is FP sent back to the oscilloscope. The string sent back then is FP
ACQ:27240C2112. ACQ:27240C2112.

AĆ20 Appendices AĆ20 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ3:ăChannel Settings TableĂAĆ3:ăChannel Settings

CHAR 1 CHAR 2 HEX BITS VOLTS/ CHAR 1 CHAR 2 HEX BITS VOLTS/
VALUE 3 2 1 0 DIV VALUE 3 2 1 0 DIV
BYTE 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 mV BYTE 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 mV
1 0 0 0 1 10 mV 1 0 0 0 1 10 mV
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 0 0 1 0 20 mV 2 0 0 1 0 20 mV
3 0 0 1 1 50 mV 3 0 0 1 1 50 mV
4 0 1 0 0 0.1 V 4 0 1 0 0 0.1 V
5 0 1 0 1 0.2 V 5 0 1 0 1 0.2 V
6 0 1 1 0 0.5 V 6 0 1 1 0 0.5 V
7 0 1 1 1 1V 7 0 1 1 1 1V
8 1 0 0 0 2V 8 1 0 0 0 2V
9 1 0 0 1 5V 9 1 0 0 1 5V
A 1 0 1 0 10 V A 1 0 1 0 10 V
B 1 0 1 1 20 V B 1 0 1 1 20 V
C 1 1 0 0 50 V C 1 1 0 0 50 V
D* 1 1 0 1 100 V D* 1 1 0 1 100 V
E* 1 1 1 0 200 V E* 1 1 1 0 200 V

*Available for recalled waveforms only. *Available for recalled waveforms only.

BITS CLPG BITS CLPG

5 4 5 4
0 0 DC 0 0 DC
0 1 AC 0 1 AC
1 0 GND 1 0 GND
1 1 CH OFF 1 1 CH OFF

BIT VAR BIT VAR

6 6
0 CAL'd 0 CAL'd
1 UNCAL'd 1 UNCAL'd

BIT INVERT BIT INVERT

7 7
0 OFF 0 OFF
1 ON 1 ON

222PS Operator Manual AĆ21 222PS Operator Manual AĆ21

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

SEC/DIV Setting SEC/DIV Setting

Characters 5 and 6 from the example string are 0 and C. In binary bits, Characters 5 and 6 from the example string are 0 and C. In binary bits,
these characters are 0000 and 1100 respectively. You can see from these characters are 0000 and 1100 respectively. You can see from
Table AĆ4 that the bits of character 5 define several settings of the front Table AĆ4 that the bits of character 5 define several settings of the front
panel. The example bit values of 0000 decode to show that the panel. The example bit values of 0000 decode to show that the
READOUT OFF menu choice is OFF (not selected, so the readout is READOUT OFF menu choice is OFF (not selected, so the readout is
on), XY display mode is OFF, and X10 MAG is OFF. on), XY display mode is OFF, and X10 MAG is OFF.

The fourth bit of character 5 is assigned to the secondsĆperĆdivision The fourth bit of character 5 is assigned to the secondsĆperĆdivision
settings along with all four bits of character 6. A bit value of 0 for this settings along with all four bits of character 6. A bit value of 0 for this
bit defines secondsĆperĆdivision settings of 5 ms and faster. A bit value bit defines secondsĆperĆdivision settings of 5 ms and faster. A bit value
of 1 defines secondsĆperĆdivision settings of 10 ms and slower. The of 1 defines secondsĆperĆdivision settings of 10 ms and slower. The
four bits of character 6 are all used to define the secondsĆperĆdivision four bits of character 6 are all used to define the secondsĆperĆdivision
setting. In the example the secondsĆperĆdivision setting is below 10 ms setting. In the example the secondsĆperĆdivision setting is below 10 ms
(0 value of bit 4 of character 5), and the 1100 (hex C) value of characĆ (0 value of bit 4 of character 5), and the 1100 (hex C) value of characĆ
ter 6 gives a secondsĆperĆdivision setting of 0.5 ms per division. ter 6 gives a secondsĆperĆdivision setting of 0.5 ms per division.

To change the secondsĆperĆdivision setting to 0.1 ms, change characĆ To change the secondsĆperĆdivision setting to 0.1 ms, change characĆ
ter 6 from C to A. However to change to 20 ms, the value of character ter 6 from C to A. However to change to 20 ms, the value of character
5 will also have to change from 0 to 1 in the setup example string while 5 will also have to change from 0 to 1 in the setup example string while
character 6 changes to a 1. character 6 changes to a 1.

AĆ22 Appendices AĆ22 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ4:ăSecondsĆperĆDivision and Misc. Settings TableĂAĆ4:ăSecondsĆperĆDivision and Misc. Settings

CHAR 5 CHAR 6 CHAR 5 CHAR 6

BYTE 3 BYTE 3

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BITS SEC/DIV HEX BITS SEC/DIV HEX

VALUE VALUE
4 3 2 1 0 4 3 2 1 0
BIT X10 0 0 0 0 0 50 ns 0 BIT X10 0 0 0 0 0 50 ns 0
5 MAG 0 0 0 0 1 0.1 ms 1 5 MAG 0 0 0 0 1 0.1 ms 1
0 OFF 0 0 0 1 0 0.2 ms 2 0 OFF 0 0 0 1 0 0.2 ms 2
1 ON 0 0 0 1 1 0.5 ms 3 1 ON 0 0 0 1 1 0.5 ms 3
0 0 1 0 0 1 ms 4 0 0 1 0 0 1 ms 4
0 0 1 0 1 2 ms 5 0 0 1 0 1 2 ms 5
BIT
XY 0 0 1 1 0 5 ms 6 BIT
XY 0 0 1 1 0 5 ms 6
6 0 0 1 1 1 10 ms 7 6 0 0 1 1 1 10 ms 7
0 OFF 0 1 0 0 0 20 ms 8 0 OFF 0 1 0 0 0 20 ms 8
1 ON 0 1 0 0 1 50 ms 9 1 ON 0 1 0 0 1 50 ms 9
0 1 0 1 0 0.1 ms A 0 1 0 1 0 0.1 ms A
0 1 0 1 1 0.2 ms B 0 1 0 1 1 0.2 ms B
BIT RO 0 1 1 0 0 0.5 ms C BIT RO 0 1 1 0 0 0.5 ms C
7 OFF 0 1 1 0 1 1 ms D 7 OFF 0 1 1 0 1 1 ms D
0 OFF 0 1 1 1 0 2 ms E 0 OFF 0 1 1 1 0 2 ms E
1 ON 1 1 1 1 1 5 ms F 1 ON 1 1 1 1 1 5 ms F
1 0 0 0 0 10 ms 0 1 0 0 0 0 10 ms 0
1 0 0 0 1 20 ms 1 1 0 0 0 1 20 ms 1
1 0 0 1 0 50 ms 2 1 0 0 1 0 50 ms 2
1 0 0 1 1 0.1 s 3 1 0 0 1 1 0.1 s 3
1 0 1 0 0 0.2 s 4 1 0 1 0 0 0.2 s 4
1 0 1 0 1 0.5 s 5 1 0 1 0 1 0.5 s 5
1 0 1 1 0 1s 6 1 0 1 1 0 1s 6
1 0 1 1 1 2s 7 1 0 1 1 1 2s 7
1 1 0 0 0 5s 8 1 1 0 0 0 5s 8
1 1 0 0 1 10 s 9 1 1 0 0 1 10 s 9
1 1 0 1 0 20 s A 1 1 0 1 0 20 s A

222PS Operator Manual AĆ23 222PS Operator Manual AĆ23

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

Trigger Positions, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings Trigger Positions, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings
Characters 7 and 8 of the frontĆpanel setup string define several of the Characters 7 and 8 of the frontĆpanel setup string define several of the
trigger settings of the instrument. Two bit values of the characters are trigger settings of the instrument. Two bit values of the characters are
used to define the Trigger SOURCE setting (bit 4 of character 7 and bit used to define the Trigger SOURCE setting (bit 4 of character 7 and bit
1 of character 8). Therefore, both characters must be set correctly to 1 of character 8). Therefore, both characters must be set correctly to
control the Trigger SOURCE setting. See Table AĆ5 for detailed inforĆ control the Trigger SOURCE setting. See Table AĆ5 for detailed inforĆ
mation. mation.

In our example front panel setup string, characters 7 and 8 are 2 and 1 In our example front panel setup string, characters 7 and 8 are 2 and 1
respectively. The binary bits are 0010 and 0001 for these two characĆ respectively. The binary bits are 0010 and 0001 for these two characĆ
ters. The first two bits of character 7 define the TRIG POS setting; the ters. The first two bits of character 7 define the TRIG POS setting; the
bit values of 0 0 in these positions decode to a TRIG POS of POST. bit values of 0 0 in these positions decode to a TRIG POS of POST.
The third bit is a 1 and decodes to a + SLOPE setting. The third bit is a 1 and decodes to a + SLOPE setting.

The last bit of character 7 and the first bit of character 8 are 0 and 0 The last bit of character 7 and the first bit of character 8 are 0 and 0
respectively and decode to VERT Trigger SOURCE. The last three bits respectively and decode to VERT Trigger SOURCE. The last three bits
of character 8 are 001 and decode to AUTO LVL Trigger MODE. of character 8 are 001 and decode to AUTO LVL Trigger MODE.

AĆ24 Appendices AĆ24 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ5:ăTrigger Position, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings TableĂAĆ5:ăTrigger Position, Slope, Source, and Mode Settings

CHAR 7 CHAR 8 CHAR 7 CHAR 8

BYTE 4 BYTE 4

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

BITS TRIG BITS TRIG

2 1 0 MODE 2 1 0 MODE
0 0 0 NORM 0 0 0 NORM
0 0 1 AUTO LVL 0 0 1 AUTO LVL
0 1 0 AUTOBL 0 1 0 AUTOBL
0 1 1 SSEQ 0 1 1 SSEQ

BITS TRIG BITS TRIG

4 3 SRC 4 3 SRC
0 0 VERT 0 0 VERT
0 1 CH 1 0 1 CH 1
1 0 CH 2 1 0 CH 2
1 1 EXT 1 1 EXT

BIT TRIG BIT TRIG

5 SLOPE 5 SLOPE
0 - 0 -
1 + 1 +

BITS TRIG BITS TRIG

7 6 POS 7 6 POS
0 0 POST 0 0 POST
0 1 MID 0 1 MID
1 0 PRE 1 0 PRE

222PS Operator Manual AĆ25 222PS Operator Manual AĆ25

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

Acquisition Mode and Miscellaneous Settings Acquisition Mode and Miscellaneous Settings
Characters 9 and 10 of the front panelĆsetup string define the remainĆ Characters 9 and 10 of the front panelĆsetup string define the remainĆ
ing settings not defined by the other 8 characters. Table AĆ6 shows ing settings not defined by the other 8 characters. Table AĆ6 shows
setup state controlled by each bit. The only twoĆbit setting is for setup state controlled by each bit. The only twoĆbit setting is for
Acquisition MODE. Acquisition MODE.

The last two characters of our example setup string are 1 and 2. The The last two characters of our example setup string are 1 and 2. The
bit values for these are 0001 and 0010, respectively. The decoding for bit values for these are 0001 and 0010, respectively. The decoding for
the bit values of character 9 is then the following: the bit values of character 9 is then the following:

H TIME OUT is enabled H TIME OUT is enabled

H CH2 is selected to respond to the controls settings H CH2 is selected to respond to the controls settings

H It is not a recalled waveform H It is not a recalled waveform

H It is a valid store H It is a valid store

Character 10 (0010) decodes as follows: Character 10 (0010) decodes as follows:

H The Acquisition MODE (2 bits) is NORM H The Acquisition MODE (2 bits) is NORM

H It is in STORE mode H It is in STORE mode

H AUTO TRIGGER is not enabled H AUTO TRIGGER is not enabled

AĆ26 Appendices AĆ26 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ6:ăAcquisition Mode and Misc. Settings TableĂAĆ6:ăAcquisition Mode and Misc. Settings

CHAR 9 CHAR 10 BIT AUTO TRIG CHAR 9 CHAR 10 BIT AUTO TRIG
0 ENABLED 0 ENABLED
BYTE 5 0 NO BYTE 5 0 NO
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 YES 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 YES

BIT STORE BIT STORE

1 MODE 1 MODE
0 NONSTORE 0 NONSTORE
1 STORE 1 STORE
BITS ACQ BITS ACQ
3 2 MODE 3 2 MODE
0 0 NORM 0 0 NORM
0 1 ENV 0 1 ENV
1 0 AVG 1 0 AVG
1 1 C ENV 1 1 C ENV

BIT VALID BIT VALID

4 STORE 4 STORE
0 NO 0 NO
1 YES 1 YES
BIT RCL'D BIT RCL'D
5 WFM 5 WFM
0 NO 0 NO
1 YES 1 YES
BIT CHAN BIT CHAN
6 SEL 6 SEL
0 CH2 0 CH2
1 CH1 1 CH1
BIT TIME BIT TIME
7 OUT 7 OUT
0 YES 0 YES
1 NO 1 NO

222PS Operator Manual AĆ27 222PS Operator Manual AĆ27

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

RSĆ232 Error Codes RSĆ232 Error Codes

When you connect the instrument to a terminal or PC, you can read When you connect the instrument to a terminal or PC, you can read
RSĆ232 error codes. There are two types of error codes. Status mesĆ RSĆ232 error codes. There are two types of error codes. Status mesĆ
sages result from a command error; diagnostic error codes result from sages result from a command error; diagnostic error codes result from
errors that occur during normal operation or when running the calibraĆ errors that occur during normal operation or when running the calibraĆ
tion routine. If there are no errors, the instrument responds with tion routine. If there are no errors, the instrument responds with
READY;" when it is ready to respond to commands. READY;" when it is ready to respond to commands.

Status Messages Status Messages

Status messages are returned when an error is detected in a Status messages are returned when an error is detected in a
command. command.

STAtus 0001 Unrecognized command STAtus 0001 Unrecognized command

STAtus 0002 Unrecognized character STAtus 0002 Unrecognized character
STAtus 0003 Command is query only STAtus 0003 Command is query only
STAtus 0004 Command has no query STAtus 0004 Command has no query
STAtus 0005 Bad command argument STAtus 0005 Bad command argument
STAtus 0006 Bad data STAtus 0006 Bad data
STAtus 0007 Data is required STAtus 0007 Data is required
STAtus 0008 Argument is required STAtus 0008 Argument is required
STAtus 0009 Communication task is busy STAtus 0009 Communication task is busy
STAtus 000A CURV command had bad checksum STAtus 000A CURV command had bad checksum
STAtus 000B Bad task name for message STAtus 000B Bad task name for message
STAtus FFFF User pressed escape STAtus FFFF User pressed escape

Diagnostic Error Codes Diagnostic Error Codes

If an error is detected in the oscilloscope during normal operation or If an error is detected in the oscilloscope during normal operation or
calibration, an error message is output to an external terminal via the calibration, an error message is output to an external terminal via the
RSĆ232 serial port. These error codes are formatted as ERROR wxyy RSĆ232 serial port. These error codes are formatted as ERROR wxyy
zzzz where wxyy and zzzz are 16Ćbit hexadecimal numbers representĆ zzzz where wxyy and zzzz are 16Ćbit hexadecimal numbers representĆ
ing the error message. ing the error message.

The code key is as follows: The code key is as follows:

w = the error type w = the error type

0 = error during normal calibration 0 = error during normal calibration

2 = EEPROM programming error 2 = EEPROM programming error
4 = EEPROM calibration constant area error 4 = EEPROM calibration constant area error
8 = Calibration error 8 = Calibration error
F = Fatal system error F = Fatal system error

AĆ28 Appendices AĆ28 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

x = the channel affected by the error x = the channel affected by the error

1 = Channel 1 1 = Channel 1
2 = Channel 2 2 = Channel 2
0 = Channel not specified 0 = Channel not specified

yy = the error code. The value depends on the type of error (0, 2, 4, 8, yy = the error code. The value depends on the type of error (0, 2, 4, 8,
or F) at the w position in the portion of the first code group (wxyy) as or F) at the w position in the portion of the first code group (wxyy) as
follows: follows:

Error type 0: Error type 0:

Error code 09 = Trigger search error (auto level mode). Error code 09 = Trigger search error (auto level mode).

Error type 2: Error type 2:

Error code XX = The data that failed to program. The value of the Error code XX = The data that failed to program. The value of the
second code group (zzzz) is the address that failed to program. second code group (zzzz) is the address that failed to program.

Error type 4: Error type 4:

Error code 01 = Bad EEPROM checksum detected. Error code 01 = Bad EEPROM checksum detected.

Error code 02 = Calibration needed. The following zzzz codes Error code 02 = Calibration needed. The following zzzz codes
indicate which calibration routine needs to be done: indicate which calibration routine needs to be done:

0001 = Channel 1 offset/gain calibration 0001 = Channel 1 offset/gain calibration

0002 = Channel 2 offset/gain calibration 0002 = Channel 2 offset/gain calibration
0004 = Channel 1 offset DAC calibration 0004 = Channel 1 offset DAC calibration
0008 = Channel 2 offset DAC calibration 0008 = Channel 2 offset DAC calibration
0010 = Channel 1 trigger calibration 0010 = Channel 1 trigger calibration
0020 = Channel 2 trigger calibration 0020 = Channel 2 trigger calibration
0040 = External trigger calibration 0040 = External trigger calibration
0080 = Clock delay calibration 0080 = Clock delay calibration

If the zzzz error code is FFFF, no calibration routines have been If the zzzz error code is FFFF, no calibration routines have been
done since all the default values were loaded into the EEPROM done since all the default values were loaded into the EEPROM
(this error code is seen only at the first factory calibration). (this error code is seen only at the first factory calibration).

Error type 8: Error type 8:

01 = Acquisition timeout error 01 = Acquisition timeout error

02 = Mid position search error 02 = Mid position search error
03 = Mid position range error 03 = Mid position range error
04 = Offset search error 04 = Offset search error
05 = Offset range error 05 = Offset range error
06 = Offset gain error 06 = Offset gain error
07 = Gain range error 07 = Gain range error
08 = Gain search error 08 = Gain search error

222PS Operator Manual AĆ29 222PS Operator Manual AĆ29

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

09 = Trigger search error 09 = Trigger search error

10 = Trigger offset range error 10 = Trigger offset range error
11 = Trigger gain error 11 = Trigger gain error
12 = Trigger hysteresis error 12 = Trigger hysteresis error
13 = External trigger offset range error 13 = External trigger offset range error
14 = External trigger hysteresis error 14 = External trigger hysteresis error
15 = Clock delay error 15 = Clock delay error
16 = Acquisition delay error 16 = Acquisition delay error

Error type F Error type F

00 = COP timeout error 00 = COP timeout error

01 = Illegal opcode execution 01 = Illegal opcode execution
02 = Interrupt exception 02 = Interrupt exception
03 = Task exception 03 = Task exception

NOTE NOTE
A COP timeout error most likely indicates that your comĆ A COP timeout error most likely indicates that your comĆ
munications software is not compatible with the 222PS. munications software is not compatible with the 222PS.

zzzz = an additional 16Ćbit value the meaning of which depends on zzzz = an additional 16Ćbit value the meaning of which depends on
the first error word. The zzzz values are meaningful only when error the first error word. The zzzz values are meaningful only when error
type 2 and error type 4 codes are given. type 2 and error type 4 codes are given.

Transfer Options Transfer Options

There are two ways to transfer data between the 222PS Digital Storage There are two ways to transfer data between the 222PS Digital Storage
Oscilloscope and a PC: local transfer and transfer via modem. Oscilloscope and a PC: local transfer and transfer via modem.

Transfer to a Local PC Transfer to a Local PC

With a PC/XT as the host computer, the optional RSĆ232 interconnecĆ With a PC/XT as the host computer, the optional RSĆ232 interconnecĆ
tion cable provides the required match from the 25Ćpin connector on tion cable provides the required match from the 25Ćpin connector on
the PC to the 9Ćpin connector on the instrument. The optional cable is the PC to the 9Ćpin connector on the instrument. The optional cable is
also compatible with a PC/AT that has a 25Ćpin communications port. also compatible with a PC/AT that has a 25Ćpin communications port.

Transfer via Modem Transfer via Modem

Telephone lines may be used to control a remote instrument and to Telephone lines may be used to control a remote instrument and to
transfer waveforms between the instrument and a PC. transfer waveforms between the instrument and a PC.

AĆ30 Appendices AĆ30 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

The software utility program you have will determine the operations The software utility program you have will determine the operations
you need for controlling the modem. If the software does not have a you need for controlling the modem. If the software does not have a
modem control routine, you must first use a terminal communications modem control routine, you must first use a terminal communications
utility to make the modem connection. You must then exit that utility to utility to make the modem connection. You must then exit that utility to
permit the instrument control program to function. The CAT200 softĆ permit the instrument control program to function. The CAT200 softĆ
ware provides for modem control. Once the software is installed on the ware provides for modem control. Once the software is installed on the
PC and the actions needed at both ends of the link have been deĆ PC and the actions needed at both ends of the link have been deĆ
cided, the general procedure to capture a waveform follows: cided, the general procedure to capture a waveform follows:

ĂĂStep 1:ăAt the remote site, the instrument operator must hook up ĂĂStep 1:ăAt the remote site, the instrument operator must hook up
the instrument to a modem and acquire the test waveforms to be the instrument to a modem and acquire the test waveforms to be
transferred to the PC. In the operation described here, the modem transferred to the PC. In the operation described here, the modem
connected to the instrument at the remote site must be set to auto connected to the instrument at the remote site must be set to auto
answer mode (see your modem manual for operating instructions) answer mode (see your modem manual for operating instructions)
and told to perform the following actions: and told to perform the following actions:

H Answer the phone after a predetermined number of rings H Answer the phone after a predetermined number of rings
Hayes: ATS0=2 Hayes: ATS0=2

H Not transfer status information H Not transfer status information

Hayes: ATQ1 Hayes: ATQ1

H Not echo commands back to the 220 series instrument H Not echo commands back to the 220 series instrument
Hayes: ATE0 Hayes: ATE0

H Enable the CONNECT 1200/2400 code H Enable the CONNECT 1200/2400 code
Hayes: ATX1 Hayes: ATX1

For modems with nonvolatile memory, each Hayes command For modems with nonvolatile memory, each Hayes command
should be followed by &W to preserve this configuration even if the should be followed by &W to preserve this configuration even if the
modem loses power. modem loses power.

ĂĂStep 2:ăNow the PC operator must call the remote site and ĂĂStep 2:ăNow the PC operator must call the remote site and
establish the modem link. If the instrument control utility does not establish the modem link. If the instrument control utility does not
have modem access capabilities, the PC operator must first use a have modem access capabilities, the PC operator must first use a
terminal communications utility (such as Kermit or Procomm) to terminal communications utility (such as Kermit or Procomm) to
establish the modem link. When the remote modem answers, the establish the modem link. When the remote modem answers, the
PC operator can exit the communications utility and start the PC operator can exit the communications utility and start the
instrument control utility (either by command or by exiting the instrument control utility (either by command or by exiting the
terminal communications utility without hanging up the modem). terminal communications utility without hanging up the modem).

222PS Operator Manual AĆ31 222PS Operator Manual AĆ31

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

ĂĂStep 3:ăThe PC operator is now in control of the instrument and ĂĂStep 3:ăThe PC operator is now in control of the instrument and
may request waveforms from it. Waveforms may be transferred may request waveforms from it. Waveforms may be transferred
from the reference memories and from the two vertical channels. If from the reference memories and from the two vertical channels. If
the PC operator needs more waveforms, the instrument operator the PC operator needs more waveforms, the instrument operator
must move the probes to new test points or make other adjustĆ must move the probes to new test points or make other adjustĆ
ments to gather new waveforms. The operator at the PC may ments to gather new waveforms. The operator at the PC may
store new waveforms into the reference memories or, if wanted, store new waveforms into the reference memories or, if wanted,
continually ask for new waveforms from channel 1 and channel 2 continually ask for new waveforms from channel 1 and channel 2
as they acquire new waveforms. The waveforms received can be as they acquire new waveforms. The waveforms received can be
filed in the PC for future study. filed in the PC for future study.

ĂĂStep 4:ăThe instrument does not support user messages onĆ ĂĂStep 4:ăThe instrument does not support user messages onĆ
screen, so a second voice telephone connection between the two screen, so a second voice telephone connection between the two
operators may be useful when a series of different waveforms operators may be useful when a series of different waveforms
needs to be transferred for use at the PC site. If the modems in needs to be transferred for use at the PC site. If the modems in
use have the capability, VOICE/DATA switching solves the probĆ use have the capability, VOICE/DATA switching solves the probĆ
lem. The CAT200 software provides this utility. You may need to lem. The CAT200 software provides this utility. You may need to
consult your modem/communications software manual for operatĆ consult your modem/communications software manual for operatĆ
ing details. ing details.

RSĆ232 Interface Specifications RSĆ232 Interface Specifications

RSĆ232 Communication Parameters RSĆ232 Communication Parameters

Start bits: 1 Start bits: 1

Stop bits: 1 Stop bits: 1

Data bits: 8 Data bits: 8

Parity: None Parity: None

Flow Control: XON/XOFF Flow Control: XON/XOFF

Signals: RX, TX, and SGND are functional. SGND is connected Signals: RX, TX, and SGND are functional. SGND is connected
internally to EXT TRIG COMM. DSR and CTS are always high. internally to EXT TRIG COMM. DSR and CTS are always high.
DTR going active turns the scope on and RTS is ignored. DTR going active turns the scope on and RTS is ignored.

Baud Rates Baud Rates

300, 1200, 2400, 9600; 0.1% accuracy based on the microprocessor 300, 1200, 2400, 9600; 0.1% accuracy based on the microprocessor
clock. clock.

AĆ32 Appendices AĆ32 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

Levels Levels
Compatible with RSĆ232ĆC. Compatible with RSĆ232ĆC.

Maximum Applied Voltage Maximum Applied Voltage

25 V (DC + peak AC) to any pin. 25 V (DC + peak AC) to any pin.

Plotter/Printer Support Plotter/Printer Support

There is no plotter/printer support in the instrument. There is no plotter/printer support in the instrument.

Messages Messages
UserĆmessage displays on the instrument CRT are not supported. The UserĆmessage displays on the instrument CRT are not supported. The
controlling PC cannot send messages to be displayed for the operator controlling PC cannot send messages to be displayed for the operator
of the instrument. of the instrument.

Optional Accessories Optional Accessories

CAT200 CAT200
This is a Tektronix software product. It provides a virtual front panel (a This is a Tektronix software product. It provides a virtual front panel (a
graphical interface with mouseĆinput facilities) on the PC screen that graphical interface with mouseĆinput facilities) on the PC screen that
allows you to fully control 222PS functions from the PC. Waveforms allows you to fully control 222PS functions from the PC. Waveforms
may be transferred either to or from a local instrument connected to may be transferred either to or from a local instrument connected to
the serial communications port of the PC or a remote instrument via a the serial communications port of the PC or a remote instrument via a
telephone modem. There are no capabilities for further processing of telephone modem. There are no capabilities for further processing of
the captured waveform data or for automated control of the front panel the captured waveform data or for automated control of the front panel
under CAT200 programming. under CAT200 programming.

NOTE NOTE
You must use CAT200 Version 1.2 or above with the You must use CAT200 Version 1.2 or above with the
222PS. 222PS.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ33 222PS Operator Manual AĆ33

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

RSĆ232 Interconnection Cables RSĆ232 Interconnection Cables

The optional accessory RSĆ232 interconnection cable supports attachĆ The optional accessory RSĆ232 interconnection cable supports attachĆ
ment of the instrument with its DEĆ9 connector to a PC/XT or compatĆ ment of the instrument with its DEĆ9 connector to a PC/XT or compatĆ
ible with a DBĆ25 connector (see Figure AĆ12). For connection to other ible with a DBĆ25 connector (see Figure AĆ12). For connection to other
types of equipment a user must provide the correct cabling (see types of equipment a user must provide the correct cabling (see
Table AĆ7 for typical pin connections). Table AĆ7 for typical pin connections).

(DTE) Female (DTE) Female

(DCE)Male at a (DCE)Male at a
at a PC/XT at a PC/XT
222PS 222PS

CD 8 1 CD CD 8 1 CD
RX 3 2 RX RX 3 2 RX
I I
B TX 2 3 TX B TX 2 3 TX
M DTR 20 4 DTR D M DTR 20 4 DTR D
S S
GND 7 5 GND O GND 7 5 GND O
P P
C DSR 6 6 DSR C DSR 6 6 DSR
X RTS 4 7 RTS X RTS 4 7 RTS
T CTS CTS T CTS CTS
5 8 5 8
RI 22 9 RI RI 22 9 RI

DBĆ25 9 DBĆ25 9
RSĆ232ĆC PIN RSĆ232ĆC PIN
DEĆ9 DEĆ9

Figure AĆ12:ăRSĆ232 Interconnection Cable Pin Wiring Figure AĆ12:ăRSĆ232 Interconnection Cable Pin Wiring

TableĂAĆ7:ă222PS Interconnect Pin Assignments TableĂAĆ7:ă222PS Interconnect Pin Assignments

(DCE) Male at TO TO TO (DCE) Male at TO TO TO

the DSO (DCE) Modem (DTE) PC/XT (DTE) PC/AT the DSO (DCE) Modem (DTE) PC/XT (DTE) PC/AT
1* CD 6 DSR 8 CD 1 CD 1* CD 6 DSR 8 CD 1 CD
2ă RX 2 TX 3 RX 2 RX 2ă RX 2 TX 3 RX 2 RX
3ă TX 3 RX 2 TX 3 TX 3ă TX 3 RX 2 TX 3 TX
4ă DTR 8 CD 20 DTR 4 DTR 4ă DTR 8 CD 20 DTR 4 DTR

AĆ34 Appendices AĆ34 Appendices

 Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

TableĂAĆ7:ă222PS Interconnect Pin Assignments (Cont.) TableĂAĆ7:ă222PS Interconnect Pin Assignments (Cont.)

(DCE) Male at TO TO TO (DCE) Male at TO TO TO

the DSO (DCE) Modem (DTE) PC/XT (DTE) PC/AT the DSO (DCE) Modem (DTE) PC/XT (DTE) PC/AT
5* SGND 7 GND 7 GND 5 SGND 5* SGND 7 GND 7 GND 5 SGND
6ă DSR 20 DTR 6 DSR 6 DSR 6ă DSR 20 DTR 6 DSR 6 DSR
7* RTS 5 CTS 4 RTS 7 RTS 7* RTS 5 CTS 4 RTS 7 RTS
8ă CTS 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 CTS 8ă CTS 4 RTS 5 CTS 8 CTS
9* RI 22 RI 22 RI 9 RI 9* RI 22 RI 22 RI 9 RI

*Connection optional *Connection optional

222PS Operator Manual AĆ35 222PS Operator Manual AĆ35

Appendix B: Remote Communication Appendix B: Remote Communication

AĆ36 Appendices AĆ36 Appendices

 Appendix C: Appendix C:
Quick Checks Quick Checks
This subsection contains quickĆtoĆperform procedures that you can This subsection contains quickĆtoĆperform procedures that you can
use to verify that the 222PS functions properly. use to verify that the 222PS functions properly.

The Self Cal Tests procedure uses internal routines to confirm that The Self Cal Tests procedure uses internal routines to confirm that
both input channels can be calibrated and that the display is working both input channels can be calibrated and that the display is working
properly. The only test equipment required is a patch cord. properly. The only test equipment required is a patch cord.

The Autoset Tests procedure uses the automatic setup feature of the The Autoset Tests procedure uses the automatic setup feature of the
222PS to verify the acquisition system, trigger circuits and waveform 222PS to verify the acquisition system, trigger circuits and waveform
display capability. The standardĆaccessory probes, included with this display capability. The standardĆaccessory probes, included with this
oscilloscope, are the only equipment needed. oscilloscope, are the only equipment needed.

General Instructions General Instructions

The Self Cal Tests and Autoset Tests procedures combine with the The Self Cal Tests and Autoset Tests procedures combine with the
Performance Tests found later in this section to extensively test the Performance Tests found later in this section to extensively test the
222PS. 222PS.

You may not need to perform both the Brief Procedures and the You may not need to perform both the Brief Procedures and the
Performance Tests, depending on what you want to accomplish: Performance Tests, depending on what you want to accomplish:

H To rapidly confirm that this oscilloscope functions and was adĆ H To rapidly confirm that this oscilloscope functions and was adĆ
justed properly, just do the procedure under Self Cal Tests, which justed properly, just do the procedure under Self Cal Tests, which
begins on page AĆ39. begins on page AĆ39.

H To further check functionality, first do the Self Cal Tests just menĆ H To further check functionality, first do the Self Cal Tests just menĆ
tioned, and then do the procedure under Autoset Tests that begins tioned, and then do the procedure under Autoset Tests that begins
on page AĆ41. on page AĆ41.

H If more extensive confirmation of performance is desired, do the H If more extensive confirmation of performance is desired, do the
Performance Tests, beginning on page AĆ43, after doing the Self Performance Tests, beginning on page AĆ43, after doing the Self
Cal Tests and Autoset Tests. The Performance Tests directly check Cal Tests and Autoset Tests. The Performance Tests directly check
warranted specifications, but they require more time and specific warranted specifications, but they require more time and specific
test equipment. test equipment.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ37 222PS Operator Manual AĆ37

Appendix C: Quick Checks Appendix C: Quick Checks

Conventions Conventions
Throughout these procedures the following conventions apply: Throughout these procedures the following conventions apply:

H Each test procedure uses the following general format: H Each test procedure uses the following general format:

Title of Test Title of Test

Equipment Required Equipment Required

Prerequisites Prerequisites

Procedure Procedure

H Each procedure consists of many steps, substeps, and subparts H Each procedure consists of many steps, substeps, and subparts
as required to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are as required to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are
sequenced as follows: sequenced as follows:

1. First Step 1. First Step

a. First Substep a. First Substep

H First Subpart H First Subpart

H Second Subpart H Second Subpart

b. Second Substep b. Second Substep

2. Second Step 2. Second Step

H Where instructed to use a frontĆpanel button or knob or verify a H Where instructed to use a frontĆpanel button or knob or verify a
readout or status message, the name of the button or knob readout or status message, the name of the button or knob
appears in boldface type: Rotate the VERT POS knob to position appears in boldface type: Rotate the VERT POS knob to position
the waveform at center screen." the waveform at center screen."

The symbol above is accompanied by information you The symbol above is accompanied by information you
must read to do the procedure properly. must read to do the procedure properly.

AĆ38 Appendices AĆ38 Appendices

 Appendix C: Quick Checks Appendix C: Quick Checks

Initial Setup Procedure Initial Setup Procedure

This procedure connects the oscilloscope to external power and This procedure connects the oscilloscope to external power and
installs probes for the tests that follow. installs probes for the tests that follow.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8, page AĆ45) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8, page AĆ45)
P850 probe (standard accessory, Item 13) P850 probe (standard accessory, Item 13)
External Power AC Adapter (standard accessory, Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (standard accessory, Item 3)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
None None

Procedure Procedure
1. Plug the External Power AC Adapter into the AC power source. 1. Plug the External Power AC Adapter into the AC power source.

2. Plug in the cord from the adapter to the EXT POWER INPUT 2. Plug in the cord from the adapter to the EXT POWER INPUT
connector on the rear panel of the oscilloscope. connector on the rear panel of the oscilloscope.

3. Open the zipper on the probe pouch and remove the probes. If 3. Open the zipper on the probe pouch and remove the probes. If
disconnected, connect the probes through the oval opening at the disconnected, connect the probes through the oval opening at the
rear of the pouch to the connectors on the oscilloscope. rear of the pouch to the connectors on the oscilloscope.

4. Press the ON button of the oscilloscope to toggle it into the 4. Press the ON button of the oscilloscope to toggle it into the
operating mode. operating mode.

Self Cal Tests Self Cal Tests

This procedure uses internal routines to verify that this 222PS functions This procedure uses internal routines to verify that this 222PS functions
and can properly perform selfĆcalibration of both input channels. This and can properly perform selfĆcalibration of both input channels. This
procedure also guarantees the highest accuracy state for the PerformĆ procedure also guarantees the highest accuracy state for the PerformĆ
ance Tests that follow. ance Tests that follow.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8, page AĆ45) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8, page AĆ45)
Connector; femaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug (Item 7 ) Connector; femaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug (Item 7 )
External Power AC Adapter (standard accessory, Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (standard accessory, Item 3)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
Initial Setup Procedure Initial Setup Procedure

222PS Operator Manual AĆ39 222PS Operator Manual AĆ39

Appendix C: Quick Checks Appendix C: Quick Checks

Procedure Procedure
1. Press the AUX FUNCT button to bring up the AUX menu. 1. Press the AUX FUNCT button to bring up the AUX menu.

2. Select SELF CAL from the menu. 2. Select SELF CAL from the menu.

NOTE NOTE
Disconnect both the Channel 1 and Channel 2 probes Disconnect both the Channel 1 and Channel 2 probes
from any signal source before performing the selfĆcalibraĆ from any signal source before performing the selfĆcalibraĆ
tion routines. tion routines.

3. Select CH1 from the SELF CAL submenu to start the Channel 1 3. Select CH1 from the SELF CAL submenu to start the Channel 1
selfĆcalibration routine. When the oscilloscope displays a PASS/ selfĆcalibration routine. When the oscilloscope displays a PASS/
FAIL message, the first routine is done. FAIL message, the first routine is done.

4. Select CH2 from the SELF CAL submenu to start the Channel 2 4. Select CH2 from the SELF CAL submenu to start the Channel 2
selfĆcalibration routine. When the oscilloscope displays a PASS/ selfĆcalibration routine. When the oscilloscope displays a PASS/
FAIL message, the second routine is done. FAIL message, the second routine is done.

5. Select EXT TRIG to display the external trigger selfĆcalibration 5. Select EXT TRIG to display the external trigger selfĆcalibration
menu. menu.

NOTE NOTE
For this selfĆcalibration routine, the EXT TRIG COMM and For this selfĆcalibration routine, the EXT TRIG COMM and
EXT TRIG INPUT connectors must be connected together. EXT TRIG INPUT connectors must be connected together.
Use a short jumper with banana plug connectors to make Use a short jumper with banana plug connectors to make
the connection. the connection.

6. Select CAL to start the external trigger selfĆcalibration routine after 6. Select CAL to start the external trigger selfĆcalibration routine after
the EXT TRIG COMM and EXT TRIG INPUT connectors are the EXT TRIG COMM and EXT TRIG INPUT connectors are
joined. A PASS/FAIL message is displayed when the routine is joined. A PASS/FAIL message is displayed when the routine is
done. Remove the jumper. done. Remove the jumper.

7. Press the CLEAR button at the completion of the selfĆcalibration 7. Press the CLEAR button at the completion of the selfĆcalibration
routines to return to normal oscilloscope operation. You are now routines to return to normal oscilloscope operation. You are now
ready to make the performance checks. ready to make the performance checks.

If a selfĆcalibration step fails, the currently stored calibration constants If a selfĆcalibration step fails, the currently stored calibration constants
are not changed. Run the failed routine again. Refer to the TroubleĆ are not changed. Run the failed routine again. Refer to the TroubleĆ
shooting in the Maintenance section of the 222PS service manual for shooting in the Maintenance section of the 222PS service manual for
an explanation of the error codes. an explanation of the error codes.

AĆ40 Appendices AĆ40 Appendices

 Appendix C: Quick Checks Appendix C: Quick Checks

If the failure persists, further information about the nature of the failure If the failure persists, further information about the nature of the failure
may be found by connecting the RSĆ232 interface port to a terminal or may be found by connecting the RSĆ232 interface port to a terminal or
host computer and rerunning the failed selfĆcalibration routine. A host computer and rerunning the failed selfĆcalibration routine. A
coded error message is output when the error occurs. coded error message is output when the error occurs.

Refer to the Remote Communication section of this manual for explaĆ Refer to the Remote Communication section of this manual for explaĆ
nations of the error codes. nations of the error codes.

Autoset Tests Autoset Tests

The autoset test procedure, while simple and easy to perform, will The autoset test procedure, while simple and easy to perform, will
check 90% of the functionality of your 222PS Digital Storage OscilloĆ check 90% of the functionality of your 222PS Digital Storage OscilloĆ
scope. scope.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8)
P850 probe (standard accessory, Item 13) P850 probe (standard accessory, Item 13)
External Power AC Adapter (standard accessory, Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (standard accessory, Item 3)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
Initial Setup Procedure Initial Setup Procedure

Procedure Procedure
1. Remove the retractable hook tip from the channel 1 probe. 1. Remove the retractable hook tip from the channel 1 probe.

2. Display the channel 1 signal. 2. Display the channel 1 signal.

3. Hold the probe tip to the end of your finger. Make good contact, 3. Hold the probe tip to the end of your finger. Make good contact,
but do not puncture yourself. but do not puncture yourself.

4. With one of your other fingers, press the AUTO SETUP button. 4. With one of your other fingers, press the AUTO SETUP button.

5. When the autoĆsetup sequence is complete, channel 1 should 5. When the autoĆsetup sequence is complete, channel 1 should
show a 60 Hz noisy sine waveform. show a 60 Hz noisy sine waveform.

6. Repeat this procedure for channel 2. 6. Repeat this procedure for channel 2.

If the autoĆsetup routine displays a signal for both channels, it indiĆ If the autoĆsetup routine displays a signal for both channels, it indiĆ
cates that most of the instrument's major systems are operational and cates that most of the instrument's major systems are operational and
will perform correctly. will perform correctly.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ41 222PS Operator Manual AĆ41

Appendix C: Quick Checks Appendix C: Quick Checks

AĆ42 Appendices AĆ42 Appendices

 Appendix D: Appendix D:
Performance Tests Performance Tests
This section contains a collection of procedures for checking that the This section contains a collection of procedures for checking that the
222PS Digital Storage Oscilloscope performs as warranted. 222PS Digital Storage Oscilloscope performs as warranted.

There are three primary performance verification sequences: There are three primary performance verification sequences:

H Vertical Checks H Vertical Checks

H Horizontal Checks H Horizontal Checks

H Trigger Checks H Trigger Checks

These performance check procedures verify the performance requireĆ These performance check procedures verify the performance requireĆ
ments of the instrument as listed in Appendix D: Specification. These ments of the instrument as listed in Appendix D: Specification. These
checks may be used as an acceptance test or as a preliminary troubleĆ checks may be used as an acceptance test or as a preliminary troubleĆ
shooting aid to help determine the need for repair or readjustment. shooting aid to help determine the need for repair or readjustment.

These procedures extend the confidence level provided These procedures extend the confidence level provided
by the basic procedures described in the previous secĆ by the basic procedures described in the previous secĆ
tion. Perform the basic procedures first, then continue to tion. Perform the basic procedures first, then continue to
these if needed. these if needed.

Prerequisites Prerequisites
To ensure the validity of these performance check procedures, the To ensure the validity of these performance check procedures, the
testing environment must meet these qualifications: testing environment must meet these qualifications:

H The cabinet must be in place. H The cabinet must be in place.

H You must perform and pass the selfĆcalibration routines and H You must perform and pass the selfĆcalibration routines and
functional tests found on page AĆ39. functional tests found on page AĆ39.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ43 222PS Operator Manual AĆ43

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Related Information Related Information

Read General Instructions and Conventions that start on page AĆ37. Read General Instructions and Conventions that start on page AĆ37.

Equipment Required Equipment Required

Table AĆ8 lists all the test equipment required to do the performance Table AĆ8 lists all the test equipment required to do the performance
check procedure. Test equipment specifications described are the check procedure. Test equipment specifications described are the
minimum necessary to provide accurate results. For test equipment minimum necessary to provide accurate results. For test equipment
operation information, refer to the appropriate test equipment instrucĆ operation information, refer to the appropriate test equipment instrucĆ
tion manual. tion manual.

When you use equipment other than that recommended, you may When you use equipment other than that recommended, you may
have to make some changes to the test setups. If the exact example have to make some changes to the test setups. If the exact example
equipment in Table AĆ8 is not available, use the Minimum Specification equipment in Table AĆ8 is not available, use the Minimum Specification
column to determine if any other available test equipment might be column to determine if any other available test equipment might be
adequate to do the check. adequate to do the check.

AĆ44 Appendices AĆ44 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

TableĂAĆ8:ăTest Equipment TableĂAĆ8:ăTest Equipment

Item Number Minimum Example Purpose Item Number Minimum Example Purpose
and Description Requirements and Description Requirements
1 Adapter Connectors: BNC Tektronix part Signal 1 Adapter Connectors: BNC Tektronix part Signal
maleĆtoĆdualĆbaĆ number connection maleĆtoĆdualĆbaĆ number connection
nanaĆjack. 103Ć0035Ć00 nanaĆjack. 103Ć0035Ć00

2 Calibration StandardĆampliĆ TEKTRONIX Gain and tranĆ 2 Calibration StandardĆampliĆ TEKTRONIX Gain and tranĆ
Generator tude signal PG506A sient response Generator tude signal PG506A sient response
levels (DC and Calibration checks levels (DC and Calibration checks
square wave): Generator square wave): Generator
5 mV to 100 V. 5 mV to 100 V.
Accuracy: 5 mV to Accuracy: 5 mV to
100 V ±0.25%. 100 V ±0.25%.
HighĆamplitude HighĆamplitude
signal levels: 1 V signal levels: 1 V
to 60 V. to 60 V.
Repetition rate: Repetition rate:
1 kHz. 1 kHz.
FastĆrise signal FastĆrise signal
level: 1 V. level: 1 V.
Repetition rate: Repetition rate:
1 MHz. 1 MHz.
Rise time: 1 ns or Rise time: 1 ns or
less. less.
Flatness: ±0.5% Flatness: ±0.5%

3 AC Power External Power AC Standard (U.S.) Reliable power 3 AC Power External Power AC Standard (U.S.) Reliable power
Source Adapter External Power AC for oscilloscope Source Adapter External Power AC for oscilloscope
Adapter, Tektronix and defeats Adapter, Tektronix and defeats
part number autoĆshutdown part number autoĆshutdown
120Ć1807Ć00 120Ć1807Ć00

4 Adjustment Small flat blade, General Tool Adjust focus 4 Adjustment Small flat blade, General Tool Adjust focus
Tool narrow tip 120Ć250 before measureĆ Tool narrow tip 120Ć250 before measureĆ
ments ments

5 Termination, Impedance 50 W; Tektronix part Impedance 5 Termination, Impedance 50 W; Tektronix part Impedance
50 W connectors: feĆ number matching beĆ 50 W connectors: feĆ number matching beĆ
male BNC input, 011Ć0049Ć01 tween generaĆ male BNC input, 011Ć0049Ć01 tween generaĆ
male BNC output tors and probes male BNC output tors and probes

6 Cable, 50 W 50 W, 36 in, maleĆ Tektronix part Signal 6 Cable, 50 W 50 W, 36 in, maleĆ Tektronix part Signal
Coaxial toĆmale BNC conĆ number connection Coaxial toĆmale BNC conĆ number connection
nectors 012Ć0482Ć00 nectors 012Ć0482Ć00

222PS Operator Manual AĆ45 222PS Operator Manual AĆ45

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

TableĂAĆ8:ăTest Equipment (Cont.) TableĂAĆ8:ăTest Equipment (Cont.)

Item Number Minimum Example Purpose Item Number Minimum Example Purpose
and Description Requirements and Description Requirements

7 Connector; BNC femaleĆtoĆ Tektronix part Signal coupling 7 Connector; BNC femaleĆtoĆ Tektronix part Signal coupling
dualĆbanana dualĆbanana plug number to External TrigĆ dualĆbanana dualĆbanana plug number to External TrigĆ
103Ć0090Ć00 ger and ComĆ 103Ć0090Ć00 ger and ComĆ
mon inputs mon inputs

8 Connector, Male, BNCĆtoĆ Tektronix part CheckingTrigger 8 Connector, Male, BNCĆtoĆ Tektronix part CheckingTrigger
BNCĆT dualĆfemale BNC number Sensitivity BNCĆT dualĆfemale BNC number Sensitivity
103Ć0030Ć00 103Ć0030Ć00

9 Generator, 50 kHz to 20 MHz; TEKTRONIX SG Checking VertiĆ 9 Generator, 50 kHz to 20 MHz; TEKTRONIX SG Checking VertiĆ
Leveled Sine Variable amplitude 503 Leveled Sine cal Triggering Leveled Sine Variable amplitude 503 Leveled Sine cal Triggering
Wave from 5ĂmV to 5 V Wave Generator and Bandwidth Wave from 5ĂmV to 5 V Wave Generator and Bandwidth
pĆp into 50 W. pĆp into 50 W.
Amplitude Amplitude
accuracy: accuracy:
constant within constant within
1.5% of reference 1.5% of reference
frequency to frequency to
20 MHz 20 MHz

10 Generator, Variable marker TEKTRONIX Checking 10 Generator, Variable marker TEKTRONIX Checking
Time Mark frequency from TG501A Time SampleĆRate Time Mark frequency from TG501A Time SampleĆRate
0.55 ms to 5 ns; Mark Generator and DelayĆtime 0.55 ms to 5 ns; Mark Generator and DelayĆtime
accuracy within Accuracy accuracy within Accuracy
2 ppm 2 ppm

11 Probe P850 10X TEKTRONIX P850 Connect 11 Probe P850 10X TEKTRONIX P850 Connect
(2 required) oscilloscope to (2 required) oscilloscope to
signal source signal source

12 Wire Leads 18 gauge bare Tektronix part Interconnect beĆ 12 Wire Leads 18 gauge bare Tektronix part Interconnect beĆ
wire; two 1Ćinch number tween the BNCĆ wire; two 1Ćinch number tween the BNCĆ
pieces 176Ć0120Ć00 toĆdualĆbanana pieces 176Ć0120Ć00 toĆdualĆbanana
jack and probe jack and probe
tip and ground tip and ground

AĆ46 Appendices AĆ46 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Preparation Preparation
The performance verification procedure is divided into subsections to The performance verification procedure is divided into subsections to
let you check individual sections of the instrument when it is not let you check individual sections of the instrument when it is not
necessary to do the complete performance check. An Equipment necessary to do the complete performance check. An Equipment
Required block at the beginning of each subsection lists the equipĆ Required block at the beginning of each subsection lists the equipĆ
ment from Table AĆ8 that is needed to do the checks in that subsecĆ ment from Table AĆ8 that is needed to do the checks in that subsecĆ
tion. tion.

The initial control settings at the beginning of each subsection prepare The initial control settings at the beginning of each subsection prepare
the instrument for the first step of the subsection. Do each of the steps the instrument for the first step of the subsection. Do each of the steps
in a subsection completely and in order to ensure the correct control in a subsection completely and in order to ensure the correct control
settings for the steps that follow. Let the test equipment warmĆup for 20 settings for the steps that follow. Let the test equipment warmĆup for 20
minutes to obtain a valid performance check to the accuracies stated minutes to obtain a valid performance check to the accuracies stated
in Appendix D: Specifications. in Appendix D: Specifications.

Preliminaries Preliminaries
This preliminary procedure adjusts the display for greatest clarity prior This preliminary procedure adjusts the display for greatest clarity prior
to making measurements in the Performance Verification checks. You to making measurements in the Performance Verification checks. You
will make only externally available adjustments. will make only externally available adjustments.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8)
External Power AC Adapter (Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (Item 3)
Adjustment Tool (Item 4) Adjustment Tool (Item 4)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39. Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39.

Initial Control Settings Initial Control Settings

Power and Display Power and Display
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC
Adapter connected Adapter connected
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

FrontĆPanel Controls FrontĆPanel Controls

AUTO SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press for initial signal display AUTO SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press for initial signal display

222PS Operator Manual AĆ47 222PS Operator Manual AĆ47

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Procedure Procedure
1. Check/Adjust Intensity Control 1. Check/Adjust Intensity Control

a. Adjust the INTEN control for a sharp display. a. Adjust the INTEN control for a sharp display.

2. Adjust FOCUS Control 2. Adjust FOCUS Control

a. Press the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel. a. Press the AUX FUNCT button on the top panel.

b. Select the ALIGN menu choice, then the XY menu choice. b. Select the ALIGN menu choice, then the XY menu choice.
These selections display a test pattern on the CRT. These selections display a test pattern on the CRT.

c. Adjust the FOCUS control for the best definition of the c. Adjust the FOCUS control for the best definition of the
pattern. pattern.

d. Press the CLEAR button to remove the display pattern and d. Press the CLEAR button to remove the display pattern and
return to normal operation. return to normal operation.

Vertical Checks Vertical Checks

These procedures check characteristics for the signal acquisition and These procedures check characteristics for the signal acquisition and
display systems that are listed as checked under Warranted CharacterĆ display systems that are listed as checked under Warranted CharacterĆ
istics in Appendix E: Specifications. Set up the test equipment as istics in Appendix E: Specifications. Set up the test equipment as
shown in Figure AĆ13. The calibration generator and the leveled shown in Figure AĆ13. The calibration generator and the leveled
sineĆwave generator will not be used at the same time but they should sineĆwave generator will not be used at the same time but they should
both remain powered up during the procedure to ensure stable both remain powered up during the procedure to ensure stable
operation. operation.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8)
Leveled Sine Wave Generator (Item 9) Leveled Sine Wave Generator (Item 9)
Calibration Generator (Item 2) Calibration Generator (Item 2)
50ĂW BNC Termination (Item 5) 50ĂW BNC Termination (Item 5)
BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack Adapter (Item 1) BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack Adapter (Item 1)
External Power AC Adapter (Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (Item 3)
2 P850 Probes (Item 11) 2 P850 Probes (Item 11)
Wire Leads (Item 12) Wire Leads (Item 12)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39 Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39

Preliminaries on page AĆ47 Preliminaries on page AĆ47

AĆ48 Appendices AĆ48 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Sine Wave Calibration Sine Wave Calibration

Generator Generator Generator Generator

Output Output

Figure AĆ13:ăInitial Setup for Vertical Checks Figure AĆ13:ăInitial Setup for Vertical Checks

Initial Control Settings Initial Control Settings

Power and Display Power and Display
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC
Adapter connected Adapter connected
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

Vertical Area Vertical Area

CH 2 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mV CH 2 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mV
CH 2 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF CH 2 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
CH 2 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL CH 2 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mV CH 1 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mV
CH 1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND CH 1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
CH 1 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL CH 1 Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

Horizontal Area Horizontal Area

SEC/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms SEC/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms
X10 MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF X10 MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . center the waveform POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . center the waveform

222PS Operator Manual AĆ49 222PS Operator Manual AĆ49

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Trigger Area Trigger Area

Trigger MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOBL Trigger MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOBL
Trigger SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERT Trigger SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERT
Trigger SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Trigger SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +

Top Panel Controls Top Panel Controls

TRIG POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST TRIG POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST
STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STORE STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STORE

DISPL DISPL
INV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF INV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
INV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF INV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
RO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (not selected) RO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (not selected)
ACQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM ACQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

AĆ50 Appendices AĆ50 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Procedure Procedure
1. Check Input Current, DC Balance, and Invert Balance 1. Check Input Current, DC Balance, and Invert Balance

a. Connect the channel 1 ground lead to the probe tip. a. Connect the channel 1 ground lead to the probe tip.

b. Press the CLEAR button to clear the display. b. Press the CLEAR button to clear the display.

c. Vertically position the channel 1 trace to the center horizontal c. Vertically position the channel 1 trace to the center horizontal
graticule line. graticule line.

d. Set the channel 1 coupling to DC. d. Set the channel 1 coupling to DC.

e. CHECK for 0.5 division or less shift from the center horizontal e. CHECK for 0.5 division or less shift from the center horizontal
graticule line. graticule line.

f. Set channel 1 coupling to GND. f. Set channel 1 coupling to GND.

g. Rotate the VOLTS/DIV control from 50 mV to 500 V. g. Rotate the VOLTS/DIV control from 50 mV to 500 V.

h. CHECK for 0.2 division or less shift from the center horizontal h. CHECK for 0.2 division or less shift from the center horizontal
graticule line. graticule line.

i. Set the VOLTS/DIV control to 50 mV. i. Set the VOLTS/DIV control to 50 mV.

j. Select channel invert by pressing the DISPL button and j. Select channel invert by pressing the DISPL button and
selecting INV1. selecting INV1.

k. CHECK for 0.4 division or less shift from the center horizontal k. CHECK for 0.4 division or less shift from the center horizontal
graticule line. graticule line.

l. Set channel 1 coupling to CH1 OFF. l. Set channel 1 coupling to CH1 OFF.

m. Set channel 2 coupling to GND. m. Set channel 2 coupling to GND.

n. Turn off channel invert by pressing the DISPL button and n. Turn off channel invert by pressing the DISPL button and
selecting INV1. selecting INV1.

o. Repeat steps a through n for channel 2. o. Repeat steps a through n for channel 2.

2. Check Input Coupling (Set up the test equipment as shown in 2. Check Input Coupling (Set up the test equipment as shown in
Figure AĆ14.) Figure AĆ14.)

222PS Operator Manual AĆ51 222PS Operator Manual AĆ51

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Calibration Calibration
Generator Generator

BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ
Jack Adapter Jack Adapter
with Wire Leads with Wire Leads

Channel 2 Probe Channel 2 Probe

Figure AĆ14:ăSetup for Input Coupling Check Figure AĆ14:ăSetup for Input Coupling Check

a. Set: CH 2 Coupling DC a. Set: CH 2 Coupling DC

SEC/DIV 0.5 ms SEC/DIV 0.5 ms
Trigger MODE AUTOLVL Trigger MODE AUTOLVL
CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V

b. Set the Calibration Generator to a standardĆamplitude mode b. Set the Calibration Generator to a standardĆamplitude mode
output signal of 2.0 V. output signal of 2.0 V.

c. Vertically position the bottom of the signal to the center c. Vertically position the bottom of the signal to the center
horizontal graticule line. horizontal graticule line.

d. Set the channel 2 coupling to AC. d. Set the channel 2 coupling to AC.

e. CHECK that the display moves to approximately vertical e. CHECK that the display moves to approximately vertical
center screen. center screen.

f. Set: CH 2 Coupling CH2 OFF f. Set: CH 2 Coupling CH2 OFF

CH 1 Coupling DC CH 1 Coupling DC
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V

AĆ52 Appendices AĆ52 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

g. Disconnect the channel 2 probe from the test equipment and g. Disconnect the channel 2 probe from the test equipment and
connect the channel 1 probe. connect the channel 1 probe.

h. Repeat parts c, d, and e for channel 1. h. Repeat parts c, d, and e for channel 1.

3. Check the VoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy 3. Check the VoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy

a. Set Calibration Generator for a standardĆamplitude output a. Set Calibration Generator for a standardĆamplitude output
signal of 0.2 V. signal of 0.2 V.

b. Set the channel 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 50 mV. b. Set the channel 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 50 mV.
Set: CH 1 Coupling DC Set: CH 1 Coupling DC

c. Vertically center the display. c. Vertically center the display.

d. CHECK all positions of the volts per division settings for d. CHECK all positions of the volts per division settings for
correct signalĆtoĆgraticule accuracy using the VOLTS/DIV correct signalĆtoĆgraticule accuracy using the VOLTS/DIV
control and Calibration Generator settings and amplitude control and Calibration Generator settings and amplitude
limits given in Table AĆ9. limits given in Table AĆ9.

e. Return the Calibration Generator output to 0.2 V. e. Return the Calibration Generator output to 0.2 V.

f. Set: CH 1 Coupling CH1 OFF f. Set: CH 1 Coupling CH1 OFF

CH 2 Coupling DC CH 2 Coupling DC
CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV

g. Disconnect the channel 1 probe from the test equipment and g. Disconnect the channel 1 probe from the test equipment and
connect the channel 2 probe. connect the channel 2 probe.

h. Repeat part d and e for channel 2. h. Repeat part d and e for channel 2.

i. Disconnect the test equipment from the oscilloscope. i. Disconnect the test equipment from the oscilloscope.

TableĂAĆ9:ăVoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy Settings TableĂAĆ9:ăVoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy Settings

Volts/Div Calibration Generator Amplitude Limits Volts/Div Calibration Generator Amplitude Limits

5 mV1 20 mV 3.84 div - 4.16 div 5 mV1 20 mV 3.84 div - 4.16 div
10 mV1 50 mV 4.80 div - 5.20 div 10 mV1 50 mV 4.80 div - 5.20 div
20 mV1 0.1 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 20 mV1 0.1 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div
50 mV 0.2 V 3.84 div - 4.16 div 50 mV 0.2 V 3.84 div - 4.16 div

0.1 V 0.5 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 0.1 V 0.5 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div
0.2 V 1V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 0.2 V 1V 4.80 div - 5.20 div
0.5 V 2V 3.84 div - 4.16 div 0.5 V 2V 3.84 div - 4.16 div
1 These ranges are available only with a P400 X1 probe. 1 These ranges are available only with a P400 X1 probe.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ53 222PS Operator Manual AĆ53

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

TableĂAĆ9:ăVoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy Settings (Cont.) TableĂAĆ9:ăVoltsĆperĆDivision Accuracy Settings (Cont.)

Volts/Div Calibration Generator Amplitude Limits Volts/Div Calibration Generator Amplitude Limits

1V 5V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 1V 5V 4.80 div - 5.20 div

2V 10 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 2V 10 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div
5V 20 V 3.84 div - 4.16 div 5V 20 V 3.84 div - 4.16 div

10 V 50 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 10 V 50 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div

20 V 100 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div 20 V 100 V 4.80 div - 5.20 div
50 V 100 V 1.92 div - 2.08 div 50 V 100 V 1.92 div - 2.08 div

100 V ĊĊ ĊĊ2 100 V ĊĊ ĊĊ2

200 V ĊĊ ĊĊ2 200 V ĊĊ ĊĊ2
500 V ĊĊ ĊĊ2 500 V ĊĊ ĊĊ2
2For P850 probe only; not practical to check due to calibration 2For P850 probe only; not practical to check due to calibration
generator limitation. To check attenuator accuracy in these generator limitation. To check attenuator accuracy in these
positions, check the 10 and 20 V per division settings. positions, check the 10 and 20 V per division settings.

4. Check Probe Compensation (Low Frequency Pulse Response) 4. Check Probe Compensation (Low Frequency Pulse Response)

a. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure AĆ15. a. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure AĆ15.

AĆ54 Appendices AĆ54 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Calibration Calibration
Generator Generator

50 W Termination 50 W Termination
BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ
Jack Adapter Jack Adapter
with Wire Leads with Wire Leads

Channel 1 Probe Channel 1 Probe

Figure AĆ15:ăSetup for Probe Compensation Check Figure AĆ15:ăSetup for Probe Compensation Check

b. Set: CH 2 Coupling OFF b. Set: CH 2 Coupling OFF

CH 1 Coupling DC CH 1 Coupling DC
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV
SEC/DIV 0.2 ms SEC/DIV 0.2 ms
TRIG POS MID TRIG POS MID

c. Set the Calibration Generator output for a positive fastĆrise c. Set the Calibration Generator output for a positive fastĆrise
signal with a 1 ms period. signal with a 1 ms period.

d. Adjust the Calibration Generator pulse amplitude for a d. Adjust the Calibration Generator pulse amplitude for a
5Ćdivision display. 5Ćdivision display.

e. Vertically position the top of the square wave on the second e. Vertically position the top of the square wave on the second
horizontal graticule line above the center. horizontal graticule line above the center.

f. Position the rising edge at the trigger position to the center f. Position the rising edge at the trigger position to the center
vertical graticule line. vertical graticule line.

g. CHECK for 0.15 division or less of rolloff or overshoot at the g. CHECK for 0.15 division or less of rolloff or overshoot at the
front corner. front corner.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ55 222PS Operator Manual AĆ55

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

h. Set: CH 1 Coupling CH1 OFF h. Set: CH 1 Coupling CH1 OFF

CH 2 Coupling DC CH 2 Coupling DC
CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV

i. Disconnect the channel 1 probe from the BNCĆtoĆbananaĆ i. Disconnect the channel 1 probe from the BNCĆtoĆbananaĆ
jack adapter and connect the channel 2 probe. jack adapter and connect the channel 2 probe.

j. Repeat parts e - g for channel 2. j. Repeat parts e - g for channel 2.

k. Disconnect the channel 2 probe from the test equipment. k. Disconnect the channel 2 probe from the test equipment.

5. Check Analog Bandwidth (Set up the test equipment as shown in 5. Check Analog Bandwidth (Set up the test equipment as shown in
Figure AĆ16.) Figure AĆ16.)

Sine Wave Sine Wave

Generator Generator

50 W Termination 50 W Termination

BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ
Jack Adapter Jack Adapter
with Wire Leads with Wire Leads

Channel 2 Probe Channel 2 Probe

Figure AĆ16:ăSetup for Analog Bandwidth Check Figure AĆ16:ăSetup for Analog Bandwidth Check

a. Set: CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V a. Set: CH 2 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V

SEC/DIV 5 ms SEC/DIV 5 ms

b. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator for a display amplitude b. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator for a display amplitude
of 6 divisions at 50 kHz. of 6 divisions at 50 kHz.

AĆ56 Appendices AĆ56 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

c. Set the SEC/DIV control to 50 ns. c. Set the SEC/DIV control to 50 ns.

d. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator output frequency to d. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator output frequency to
10 MHz. 10 MHz.

e. CHECK that the display amplitude is at least 4.2 divisions. e. CHECK that the display amplitude is at least 4.2 divisions.

f. Return the Leveled Sine Wave Generator output frequency to f. Return the Leveled Sine Wave Generator output frequency to
50 kHz. 50 kHz.

g. Set: CH 2 Coupling CH2 OFF g. Set: CH 2 Coupling CH2 OFF

CH 1 Coupling DC CH 1 Coupling DC
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.5 V
SEC/DIV 5 ms SEC/DIV 5 ms

h. Disconnect the channel 2 probe from the test equipment and h. Disconnect the channel 2 probe from the test equipment and
connect the channel 1 probe. connect the channel 1 probe.

i. Vertically center the display. i. Vertically center the display.

j. Repeat parts b, c, d, and e for channel 1. j. Repeat parts b, c, d, and e for channel 1.

Horizontal Check Horizontal Check

This horizontal check procedure verifies characteristics that relate to This horizontal check procedure verifies characteristics that relate to
the timeĆbase system and that are listed as checked under Warranted the timeĆbase system and that are listed as checked under Warranted
Characteristics in Appendix D: Specification. Set up the test equipĆ Characteristics in Appendix D: Specification. Set up the test equipĆ
ment as shown in Figure AĆ17. ment as shown in Figure AĆ17.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8)
TimeĆMark Generator (Item 10) TimeĆMark Generator (Item 10)
50 W BNC Termination (Item 5) 50 W BNC Termination (Item 5)
BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack Adapter (Item 1) BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack Adapter (Item 1)
External Power AC Adapter (Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (Item 3)
2 P850 probes (Item 11) 2 P850 probes (Item 11)
Wire Leads (Item 12) Wire Leads (Item 12)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39 Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39

Preliminaries on page AĆ47 Preliminaries on page AĆ47

222PS Operator Manual AĆ57 222PS Operator Manual AĆ57

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Time Mark Time Mark

Generator Generator

50 W Termination 50 W Termination

BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ
Jack Adapter Jack Adapter
with Wire Leads with Wire Leads

Channel 1 Probe Channel 1 Probe

Figure AĆ17:ăSetup for Horizontal Test Figure AĆ17:ăSetup for Horizontal Test

Initial Control Settings Initial Control Settings

Power and Display Power and Display
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC Adapter External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC Adapter
connected connected
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON
Vertical Area Vertical Area
CH 2 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2 OFF CH 2 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2 OFF
CH 1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC CH 1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 V CH 1 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 V
CH 1 VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL CH 1 VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

Horizontal Area Horizontal Area

SEC/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms SEC/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms
X10 MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF X10 MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF

AĆ58 Appendices AĆ58 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Trigger Area Trigger Area

Trigger MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOLVL Trigger MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOLVL
Trigger SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERT Trigger SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERT
Trigger SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Trigger SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +

Top Panel Controls Top Panel Controls

TRIG POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST TRIG POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST
STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STORE STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STORE

DISPL DISPL
INV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF INV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
INV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF INV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
RO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (not selected) RO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (not selected)

ACQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM ACQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

Procedure Procedure
1. Check X1 SecondsĆperĆDivision Accuracy 1. Check X1 SecondsĆperĆDivision Accuracy

a. Press the CLEAR button to clear the display. a. Press the CLEAR button to clear the display.

b. Set the Time Mark Generator to output 1 ms time markers. b. Set the Time Mark Generator to output 1 ms time markers.

c. Vertically position the baseline of the timeĆmark signal to the c. Vertically position the baseline of the timeĆmark signal to the
center horizontal graticule line. center horizontal graticule line.

d. Horizontally position the left time marker with the first vertical d. Horizontally position the left time marker with the first vertical
graticule line. graticule line.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ59 222PS Operator Manual AĆ59

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

e. CHECK the accuracy over the center 8 divisions. Accuracy e. CHECK the accuracy over the center 8 divisions. Accuracy
should be ± 0.16 divisions (2%). should be ± 0.16 divisions (2%).

f. Disconnect the test equipment from the oscilloscope. f. Disconnect the test equipment from the oscilloscope.

Trigger Checks Trigger Checks

The Trigger Checks procedures verify those characteristics that relate The Trigger Checks procedures verify those characteristics that relate
to the trigger systems and that are listed as checked under Warranted to the trigger systems and that are listed as checked under Warranted
Characteristics in Appendix D: Specifications. Set up the test equipĆ Characteristics in Appendix D: Specifications. Set up the test equipĆ
ment as shown in Figure AĆ18. ment as shown in Figure AĆ18.

Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8) Equipment Required (See Table AĆ8)
Leveled Sine Wave Generator (Item 9) Leveled Sine Wave Generator (Item 9)
BNCĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug Adapter (Item 7) BNCĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug Adapter (Item 7)
BNCĆT connector (Item 8) BNCĆT connector (Item 8)
BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack Adapter (Item 1) BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack Adapter (Item 1)
50 W BNC Termination (Item 5) 50 W BNC Termination (Item 5)
External Power AC Adapter (Item 3) External Power AC Adapter (Item 3)
BNC Coaxial Cable (Item 6) BNC Coaxial Cable (Item 6)
2 P850 Probes (Item 11) 2 P850 Probes (Item 11)

Wire Leads (Item 12) Wire Leads (Item 12)

Prerequisites Prerequisites
Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39 Self Tests and Autoset Tests starting on page AĆ39

Preliminaries on page AĆ47 Preliminaries on page AĆ47

AĆ60 Appendices AĆ60 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Sine Wave Sine Wave

Generator Generator

50 W Termination 50 W Termination

BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ
Jack Adapter Jack Adapter
with Wire Leads with Wire Leads

Channel 1 Probe Channel 1 Probe

Figure AĆ18:ăSetup for Trigger Checks Figure AĆ18:ăSetup for Trigger Checks

Initial Control Settings Initial Control Settings

Power and Display Power and Display
External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC External Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Power AC
Adapter connected Adapter connected
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ON

Vertical Area Vertical Area

CH 2 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2 OFF CH 2 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH2 OFF
CH 2 VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL CH 2 VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

CH 1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC CH 1 Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mV CH 1 VOLTS/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mV
CH 1 VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL CH 1 VAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAL

222PS Operator Manual AĆ61 222PS Operator Manual AĆ61

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

Horizontal Area Horizontal Area

X10 MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF X10 MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
SEC/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ns SEC/DIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 ns

Trigger Area Trigger Area

Trigger MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOLVL Trigger MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTOLVL
Trigger SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . + Trigger SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +
Trigger SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERT Trigger SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VERT

Top Panel Controls Top Panel Controls

TRIG POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST TRIG POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . POST
STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STORE STORE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . STORE

DISPL DISPL
INV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF INV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
INV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF INV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF XY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF
RO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (not selected) RO OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OFF (not selected)

ACQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM ACQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM

Procedure Procedure
1. Check Trigger Sensitivity 1. Check Trigger Sensitivity

a. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator for a 5 division display a. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator for a 5 division display
amplitude at 10 MHz. amplitude at 10 MHz.

b. Set the channel 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 0.5 V. b. Set the channel 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 0.5 V.

c. Push AUTOLVL knob. c. Push AUTOLVL knob.

d. CHECK for a stable display with the TRIG'D indicator on. d. CHECK for a stable display with the TRIG'D indicator on.

e. Set the SEC/DIV control to 5 ms. e. Set the SEC/DIV control to 5 ms.

f. Set channel 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 50 mV. f. Set channel 1 VOLTS/DIV control to 50 mV.

g. Return the Leveled Sine Wave Generator to 50 kHz and g. Return the Leveled Sine Wave Generator to 50 kHz and
adjust for a 5 division display amplitude. adjust for a 5 division display amplitude.

h. Set the SEC/DIV control to 0.2 ms. h. Set the SEC/DIV control to 0.2 ms.

AĆ62 Appendices AĆ62 Appendices

 Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

i. Press INIT to restart the acquisition. i. Press INIT to restart the acquisition.

j. CHECK that the display fills completely in less than 10 s. j. CHECK that the display fills completely in less than 10 s.

2. Check External Trigger Sensitivity (Set up the test equipment as 2. Check External Trigger Sensitivity (Set up the test equipment as
shown in Figure AĆ19.) shown in Figure AĆ19.)

Sine Wave Sine Wave

50 W Termination Generator 50 W Termination Generator

Coaxial Cable Coaxial Cable

BNCĆT BNCĆT
BNC Channel 1 Probe Connector BNC Channel 1 Probe Connector
FemaleĆtoĆDualĆBananaĆ FemaleĆtoĆDualĆBananaĆ
Plug Adapter BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ Plug Adapter BNCĆtoĆBananaĆ
Jack Adapter Jack Adapter
with Wire Leads with Wire Leads

Figure AĆ19:ăSetup for External Trigger Sensitivity Check Figure AĆ19:ăSetup for External Trigger Sensitivity Check

a. Set: CH 2 Coupling GND a. Set: CH 2 Coupling GND

CH 1 Coupling DC CH 1 Coupling DC
CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 50 mV
Trigger SOURCE EXT Trigger SOURCE EXT
STORE OFF (not selected) STORE OFF (not selected)
SEC/DIV 5 ms SEC/DIV 5 ms

b. Connect the Leveled Sine Wave Generator output via a 50 W b. Connect the Leveled Sine Wave Generator output via a 50 W
termination, a BNCĆT connector, and a BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack termination, a BNCĆT connector, and a BNCĆtoĆbananaĆjack
adapter to the channel 1 probe. adapter to the channel 1 probe.

c. Connect the other side of the BNCĆT connector via a 50 W c. Connect the other side of the BNCĆT connector via a 50 W
coaxial cable and BNCĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug connector to the coaxial cable and BNCĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug connector to the
EXT TRIG INPUT and EXT TRIG COMM input jacks on the EXT TRIG INPUT and EXT TRIG COMM input jacks on the
rear panel. rear panel.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ63 222PS Operator Manual AĆ63

Appendix D: Performance Tests Appendix D: Performance Tests

d. Vertically center the display. d. Vertically center the display.

e. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator to display 5 divisions of e. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator to display 5 divisions of
amplitude at 50 kHz. amplitude at 50 kHz.

f. CHECK for a triggered display (TRIG'D indicator light on). f. CHECK for a triggered display (TRIG'D indicator light on).

g. Set the SEC/DIV control to 50 ns. g. Set the SEC/DIV control to 50 ns.

h. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator to display 5 divisions of h. Set the Leveled Sine Wave Generator to display 5 divisions of
amplitude at 10 MHz. amplitude at 10 MHz.

i. CHECK for a triggered display (TRIG'D indicator light on). i. CHECK for a triggered display (TRIG'D indicator light on).

j. Disconnect the probe from the test equipment. j. Disconnect the probe from the test equipment.

3. Check Motor Trigger 3. Check Motor Trigger

a. Set: CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.1 V a. Set: CH 1 VOLTS/DIV 0.1 V

SEC/DIV 1 ms SEC/DIV 1 ms
Trigger MODE AUTO BL Trigger MODE AUTO BL
Trigger SOURCE VERT Trigger SOURCE VERT
TRIG POS MID TRIG POS MID
MOTOR TRIG ON MOTOR TRIG ON

b. Connect the fast rise output of the Calibration Generator b. Connect the fast rise output of the Calibration Generator
through the BNCĆtoĆbananaĆplug adapter to the CH 1 probe through the BNCĆtoĆbananaĆplug adapter to the CH 1 probe
tip and adjust the fast rise amplitude for 4 divisions. tip and adjust the fast rise amplitude for 4 divisions.

c. Set the Calibration Generator frequency to 1 kHz. c. Set the Calibration Generator frequency to 1 kHz.

d. Press the AUTO:LVL PUSH button to center the trigger level d. Press the AUTO:LVL PUSH button to center the trigger level
on the waveform. on the waveform.

e. Adjust the Calibration Generator frequency variable to the e. Adjust the Calibration Generator frequency variable to the
point where the trigger of the waveform is just able to be point where the trigger of the waveform is just able to be
maintained. maintained.

f. Verify that the negative portion of the displayed square wave f. Verify that the negative portion of the displayed square wave
is between 2.0 and 3.0 ms. is between 2.0 and 3.0 ms.

g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument. g. Disconnect the test equipment from the instrument.

AĆ64 Appendices AĆ64 Appendices

 Appendix E: Appendix E:
Specifications Specifications
This section contains a collection of tables that list the various traits This section contains a collection of tables that list the various traits
that describe the 222PS PowerScout. This section is divided into three that describe the 222PS PowerScout. This section is divided into three
subsections, one for each of three classes of traits: nominal traits, subsections, one for each of three classes of traits: nominal traits,
warranted characteristics, and typical characteristics. warranted characteristics, and typical characteristics.

Nominal Traits Nominal Traits

This subsection contains a collection of tables that list the various This subsection contains a collection of tables that list the various
nominal traits that describe the 222PS PowerScout. Included are nominal traits that describe the 222PS PowerScout. Included are
electrical and mechanical traits. electrical and mechanical traits.

Nominal traits are described using simple statements of fact such as Nominal traits are described using simple statements of fact such as
Two full featured" for the trait Input Channels, Number of," rather Two full featured" for the trait Input Channels, Number of," rather
than in terms of limits that are performance requirements. than in terms of limits that are performance requirements.

TableĂAĆ10:ăNominal TraitsĊVertical System TableĂAĆ10:ăNominal TraitsĊVertical System

Name Description Name Description

Digitizers, Number of Two, both identical Digitizers, Number of Two, both identical

Digitized Bits, 8 bits, 25 levels per division, 10.24 divisions of Digitized Bits, 8 bits, 25 levels per division, 10.24 divisions of
Number of dynamic range Number of dynamic range

Input Channels, Two fullĆfeatured (CH 1 and CH 2) Input Channels, Two fullĆfeatured (CH 1 and CH 2)
Number of Number of

Input Coupling DC, AC, GND or OFF Input Coupling DC, AC, GND or OFF

Maximum Input Voltage, 850 V (DC + peak AC) or 600 VAC rms1; Peak Maximum Input Voltage, 850 V (DC + peak AC) or 600 VAC rms1; Peak
Probe Tip to Common Surge Voltage: 6000 V for 250 ms or less (P850 Probe Tip to Common Surge Voltage: 6000 V for 250 ms or less (P850
only); derate with increased frequency accordĆ only); derate with increased frequency accordĆ
ing to Figure AĆ20 ing to Figure AĆ20

222PS Operator Manual AĆ65 222PS Operator Manual AĆ65

Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ10:ăNominal TraitsĊVertical System (Cont.) TableĂAĆ10:ăNominal TraitsĊVertical System (Cont.)

Name Description Name Description

Maximum Input Voltage, 850 V (DC + peak AC) or 600 VAC rms1; Peak Maximum Input Voltage, 850 V (DC + peak AC) or 600 VAC rms1; Peak
Probe Common to Surge Voltage: 6000 V for 250 ms or less (P850 Probe Common to Surge Voltage: 6000 V for 250 ms or less (P850
Chassis only); derate with increased frequency accordĆ Chassis only); derate with increased frequency accordĆ
ing to Figure AĆ21 ing to Figure AĆ21

Maximum Input Voltage, 1700 V (DC + peak AC) or 1200 VAC rms1 Maximum Input Voltage, 1700 V (DC + peak AC) or 1200 VAC rms1
Between Channels Between Channels

Pulse Width, Minimum Envelope and Continuous Envelope Modes: Pulse Width, Minimum Envelope and Continuous Envelope Modes:
Detectable 100 ns Detectable 100 ns

Range, Sensitivity, 1X probe: 5 mV/div to 50 V/div in a 1Ć2Ć5 Range, Sensitivity, 1X probe: 5 mV/div to 50 V/div in a 1Ć2Ć5
CH 1 and CH 2 settings sequence10X probe: 50 mV/div to CH 1 and CH 2 settings sequence10X probe: 50 mV/div to
500 V/div in a 1Ć2Ć5 settings sequence 500 V/div in a 1Ć2Ć5 settings sequence

Single Shot Storage, Normal Acquisition Mode: Single Shot Storage, Normal Acquisition Mode:
Useful Bandwidth2 Useful Bandwidth2
5 5
Hz or 1 MHz, whichever is Hz or 1 MHz, whichever is
SECńDIVĄ Setting SECńDIVĄ Setting
less less
Envelope and Continuous Envelope Envelope and Continuous Envelope
Modes: 1 MHz Modes: 1 MHz

1 Performance requirement not checked in manual. 1 Performance requirement not checked in manual.
2 Useful storage bandwidth is limited to the frequency where there are 10 Display 2 Useful storage bandwidth is limited to the frequency where there are 10 Display
Sample/Sine Wave Signal periods. At secondsĆperĆdivision settings faster than Sample/Sine Wave Signal periods. At secondsĆperĆdivision settings faster than
5 ms/Div, Storage Bandwidths are limited to 1 MHz max sampling rate. 5 ms/Div, Storage Bandwidths are limited to 1 MHz max sampling rate.

AĆ66 Appendices AĆ66 Appendices

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

1000 1000
P850 P850
600 V 600 V

P400 P400
Voltage Voltage
100 100
(RMS) (RMS)

10 10

0.1 MHz 1 MHz 10 MHz 0.1 MHz 1 MHz 10 MHz

Frequency Frequency

Figure AĆ20:ăMaximum NormalĆMode Voltage Versus Figure AĆ20:ăMaximum NormalĆMode Voltage Versus
Frequency Derating Curve Frequency Derating Curve

222PS Operator Manual AĆ67 222PS Operator Manual AĆ67

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

600 600

Voltage 60 Voltage 60
(RMS) (RMS)
Chassis Floating Chassis Grounded Chassis Floating Chassis Grounded

30 V 30 V
6 6

DC 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz DC 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz
Frequency Frequency

Figure AĆ21:ăMaximum CommonĆMode Voltage Versus Figure AĆ21:ăMaximum CommonĆMode Voltage Versus
Frequency Derating Curve Frequency Derating Curve

TableĂAĆ11:ăNominal TraitsĊHorizontal System TableĂAĆ11:ăNominal TraitsĊHorizontal System

Name Description Name Description

Range, SampleĆRate Time/Div Acquisition SampleĆRate Range, SampleĆRate Time/Div Acquisition SampleĆRate
Mode Range Mode Range
5 ms to Normal 50/(sec/div) 5 ms to Normal 50/(sec/div)
20 s/div Samples/sec 20 s/div Samples/sec
2 ms/div Normal 5 MSamples/ 2 ms/div Normal 5 MSamples/
sec sec
50 ns to Normal 10 MSamples/ 50 ns to Normal 10 MSamples/
1 ms/div sec 1 ms/div sec
20 ms to Envelope 10 MSamples/ 20 ms to Envelope 10 MSamples/
20 s/div sec 20 s/div sec

Range, Seconds/Division 50 ns/div to 20 s/div; the X10 MAG control Range, Seconds/Division 50 ns/div to 20 s/div; the X10 MAG control
extends the maximum sweep speed to 5 ns/div extends the maximum sweep speed to 5 ns/div

Record Length 512 points; 50 points per division Record Length 512 points; 50 points per division

AĆ68 Appendices AĆ68 Appendices

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ12:ăNominal TraitsĊTriggering System TableĂAĆ12:ăNominal TraitsĊTriggering System

Name Description Name Description

External Trigger MaxiĆ 42 V (DC + peak AC) External Trigger MaxiĆ 42 V (DC + peak AC)
mum Input Voltage1, mum Input Voltage1,
Input to Common, Input Input to Common, Input
to Earth Ground, to Earth Ground,
Common to Earth Ground Common to Earth Ground

1The external trigger input is not intended for floating measurements beyond 1The external trigger input is not intended for floating measurements beyond
42 V peak. 42 V peak.

TableĂAĆ13:ăNominal TraitsĊDisplay System TableĂAĆ13:ăNominal TraitsĊDisplay System

Name Description Name Description

CRT Display Size Display area of 6.4 cm (2.5 in) measured CRT Display Size Display area of 6.4 cm (2.5 in) measured
diagonally diagonally
Waveform Display Single graticule: 8 divisions high by 10 divisions Waveform Display Single graticule: 8 divisions high by 10 divisions
Graticule wide, where divisions are 0.5 cm by 0.5 cm Graticule wide, where divisions are 0.5 cm by 0.5 cm
(0.2 in by 0.2 in) (0.2 in by 0.2 in)

CRT Reflectivity CRT filter shield has an antiĆreflectance surface to CRT Reflectivity CRT filter shield has an antiĆreflectance surface to
aid viewing in high ambient light conditions aid viewing in high ambient light conditions

222PS Operator Manual AĆ69 222PS Operator Manual AĆ69

Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ14:ăNominal TraitsĊPower System TableĂAĆ14:ăNominal TraitsĊPower System

Name Description Name Description

Internal Battery, Type Sealed leadĆacid Internal Battery, Type Sealed leadĆacid

External Power, Input DC: 12 to 28 VDC External Power, Input DC: 12 to 28 VDC
Voltage Range AC: 16 to 20 V AC, 47 Hz to 400 Hz Voltage Range AC: 16 to 20 V AC, 47 Hz to 400 Hz
Pin to Pin Pin to Pin

External Power, Input -0.5 to 28 V (DC + peak AC) External Power, Input -0.5 to 28 V (DC + peak AC)
Voltage Range Voltage Range
Either Pin to EXT TRIG Either Pin to EXT TRIG
COM or RSĆ232 SGND COM or RSĆ232 SGND
(signal ground) (signal ground)

TableĂAĆ15:ăNominal TraitsĊCommunications Interface TableĂAĆ15:ăNominal TraitsĊCommunications Interface

Name Description Name Description

COMM PORT Interface, Complies with RSĆ232ĆC specification COMM PORT Interface, Complies with RSĆ232ĆC specification
Type Type
COMM PORT Interface, 300, 1200, 2400, and 9600 COMM PORT Interface, 300, 1200, 2400, and 9600
Baud Rates Baud Rates

COMM PORT Interface, RD, TD and SGND normally used (configured as COMM PORT Interface, RD, TD and SGND normally used (configured as
Signals a DCE device). When the instrument is off, a risĆ Signals a DCE device). When the instrument is off, a risĆ
ing edge on DTR will turn instrument power on ing edge on DTR will turn instrument power on

Maximum Input Voltage, 25 V (DC + peak AC) Maximum Input Voltage, 25 V (DC + peak AC)
Any Pin Any Pin

AĆ70 Appendices AĆ70 Appendices

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ16:ăNominal TraitsĊMechanical TableĂAĆ16:ăNominal TraitsĊMechanical

Name Description Name Description

Cooling Method Conduction through cabinet walls; there are no Cooling Method Conduction through cabinet walls; there are no
cooling vents cooling vents
Construction Material Cabinet/chassis parts constructed of plastic with Construction Material Cabinet/chassis parts constructed of plastic with
the internal surface coated with conductive paint the internal surface coated with conductive paint
for shielding; circuit boards constructed of glassĆ for shielding; circuit boards constructed of glassĆ
laminate with predominantly surface mount comĆ laminate with predominantly surface mount comĆ
ponents ponents

Finish Type Tektronix Blue cabinet with black synthetic rubber Finish Type Tektronix Blue cabinet with black synthetic rubber
hand grips and black vinyl probe pouch hand grips and black vinyl probe pouch

Weight Without accessories Weight Without accessories

2 kg (4.4 lbs) 2 kg (4.4 lbs)
With accessories With accessories
2.72 kg (6.0 lbs) 2.72 kg (6.0 lbs)

Overall Dimensions Height: 86.4 mm (3.4 in) Overall Dimensions Height: 86.4 mm (3.4 in)
Width: 159 mm (6.25 in), with handle. Width: 159 mm (6.25 in), with handle.
Length: 252 mm (9.9 in) Length: 252 mm (9.9 in)

Probe Length, Detachable 2.0 m (78.7 in), P850 Probe Length, Detachable 2.0 m (78.7 in), P850

Warranted Characteristics Warranted Characteristics

This subsection lists the various warranted characteristics that This subsection lists the various warranted characteristics that
describe the 222PS PowerScout. Included are electrical and describe the 222PS PowerScout. Included are electrical and
environmental characteristics. environmental characteristics.

Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable
performance limits that are warranted. performance limits that are warranted.

NOTE NOTE
In these tables, those warranted characteristics that are In these tables, those warranted characteristics that are
checked in the procedure Performance Verification, found checked in the procedure Performance Verification, found
in Appendix C, appear in boldface type under the column in Appendix C, appear in boldface type under the column
Name. Name.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ71 222PS Operator Manual AĆ71

Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

As stated above, this subsection lists only warranted characteristics. As stated above, this subsection lists only warranted characteristics.
A list of typical characteristics starts on page AĆ76. A list of typical characteristics starts on page AĆ76.

Performance Conditions Performance Conditions

The electrical characteristics found in these tables of warranted charĆ The electrical characteristics found in these tables of warranted charĆ
acteristics apply when the scope has been adjusted at an ambient acteristics apply when the scope has been adjusted at an ambient
temperature between +15_ C and +35_ C and is operating at an temperature between +15_ C and +35_ C and is operating at an
ambient temperature within ±5_ C of the temperature at which selfĆcalĆ ambient temperature within ±5_ C of the temperature at which selfĆcalĆ
ibration was performed (unless otherwise noted). ibration was performed (unless otherwise noted).

TableĂAĆ17:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊVertical System TableĂAĆ17:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊVertical System

Name Description Name Description

Accuracy, DC Gain ±4%, valid when selfĆcal performed within Accuracy, DC Gain ±4%, valid when selfĆcal performed within
(+15 to +35_ C) ±5_ C of ambient temperature (+15 to +35_ C) ±5_ C of ambient temperature
Accuracy, DC Gain ±5%, valid when selfĆcal performed within Accuracy, DC Gain ±5%, valid when selfĆcal performed within
(Ambient Temperature ±5_ C of ambient temperature (Ambient Temperature ±5_ C of ambient temperature
-15 to +15_ C -15 to +15_ C
and +35 to +55_ C) and +35 to +55_ C)

Analog Bandwidth, 5 Hz or 10 MHz whichever Analog Bandwidth, 5 Hz or 10 MHz whichever

Repetitive Signal1 SECńDIVĄ Setting is less Repetitive Signal1 SECńDIVĄ Setting is less

Balance, DC ±0.2 divisions maximum trace shift between Balance, DC ±0.2 divisions maximum trace shift between
VOLTS/DIV settings, valid when selfĆcal perĆ VOLTS/DIV settings, valid when selfĆcal perĆ
formed within ±5_ C of ambient temperature formed within ±5_ C of ambient temperature

Balance, Invert ±0.4 divisions maximum trace shift between Balance, Invert ±0.4 divisions maximum trace shift between
inverted and nonĆinverted displays, valid inverted and nonĆinverted displays, valid
when self cal performed within ±5_ C of when self cal performed within ±5_ C of
ambient temperature ambient temperature

Input Current 2.5 nA maximum (0.5 divisions or less when Input Current 2.5 nA maximum (0.5 divisions or less when
switching between DC and GND input coupling switching between DC and GND input coupling
with VOLTS/DIV set at 50 mV/div) with VOLTS/DIV set at 50 mV/div)

Pulse Response AberraĆ ±3% maximum (0.15 divisions with a 5 diviĆ Pulse Response AberraĆ ±3% maximum (0.15 divisions with a 5 diviĆ
tions, Low Frequency sion signal displayed) tions, Low Frequency sion signal displayed)

AĆ72 Appendices AĆ72 Appendices

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ17:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊVertical System (Cont.) TableĂAĆ17:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊVertical System (Cont.)

Name Description Name Description

Rise Time, Useful for ReĆ (SECńDIVĄ Setting) * 1.6 or 35 ns, whichever Rise Time, Useful for ReĆ (SECńDIVĄ Setting) * 1.6 or 35 ns, whichever
petitive Signals 50 is greater petitive Signals 50 is greater
1Useful repetitive bandwidth is limited to the frequency at which 10 display 1Useful repetitive bandwidth is limited to the frequency at which 10 display
samples are acquired for each sine wave period. For example at 10 ms per samples are acquired for each sine wave period. For example at 10 ms per
division the useful repetitive bandwidth is 500 kHz. At secondsĆperĆdivision division the useful repetitive bandwidth is 500 kHz. At secondsĆperĆdivision
settings faster than 0.5 ms/div, repetitive bandwidth is limited to 10 MHz by settings faster than 0.5 ms/div, repetitive bandwidth is limited to 10 MHz by
the input amplifier. the input amplifier.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ73 222PS Operator Manual AĆ73

Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ18:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System TableĂAĆ18:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System

Name Description Name Description

Accuracy, Displayed ±2% with X1 magnification Accuracy, Displayed ±2% with X1 magnification
(X1) (X1)
Accuracy, Displayed ±5% with X10 magnification Accuracy, Displayed ±5% with X10 magnification
(X10) (X10)

TableĂAĆ19:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊTriggering System TableĂAĆ19:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊTriggering System

Name Description Name Description

Jitter, Trigger 2 ms/div to 50 ns/div: Jitter, Trigger 2 ms/div to 50 ns/div:

ąą1/50 division ±2 ns in X1 magnification ąą1/50 division ±2 ns in X1 magnification
ąą1/5 division ±2 ns in X10 magnification ąą1/5 division ±2 ns in X10 magnification

Sensitivity, CH 1 and 0.5 division pĆp at 10 MHz Sensitivity, CH 1 and 0.5 division pĆp at 10 MHz
CH 21 CH 21

Sensitivity, External 250 mV pĆp at 10ĂMHz Sensitivity, External 250 mV pĆp at 10ĂMHz
Trigger Trigger

1The minimum sensitivity for obtaining a stable trigger. A stable trigger results in a 1The minimum sensitivity for obtaining a stable trigger. A stable trigger results in a
uniform, regular display triggered on the selected slope. The trigger point must not uniform, regular display triggered on the selected slope. The trigger point must not
switch between opposite slopes on the waveform and the display must not roll" switch between opposite slopes on the waveform and the display must not roll"
across the screen on successive acquisitions. The TRIG'D LED stays constantly lit across the screen on successive acquisitions. The TRIG'D LED stays constantly lit
when the secondsĆperĆdivision setting is 2 ms or faster but may flash when the when the secondsĆperĆdivision setting is 2 ms or faster but may flash when the
setting is 10 ms or slower. setting is 10 ms or slower.

AĆ74 Appendices AĆ74 Appendices

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ20:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊ TableĂAĆ20:ăWarranted CharacteristicsĊ

ąąąEnvironmental, Safety, and Reliability ąąąEnvironmental, Safety, and Reliability

Name Description Name Description

Atmospherics Temperature: Atmospherics Temperature:

-15 to +55_ C, operating; -30 to +70_ C, -15 to +55_ C, operating; -30 to +70_ C,
nonĆoperating nonĆoperating
Relative humidity: Relative humidity:
0 to 95% (-5%, +0%), operating to +55_ C; 0 to 95% (-5%, +0%), operating to +55_ C;
nonĆoperating to 60_ C nonĆoperating to 60_ C
Altitude: Altitude:
Operating: to 4572 m (15,000 ft); Operating: to 4572 m (15,000 ft);
Nonoperating: to 15240 m (50,000 ft); Nonoperating: to 15240 m (50,000 ft);
Maximum Operating Temperature decreases Maximum Operating Temperature decreases
1_ C/300 m (1000 ft) above 15240 m 1_ C/300 m (1000 ft) above 15240 m
(50,000 ft) (50,000 ft)

Dynamics Vibration, Sinusoidal (Operating and NonoperatĆ Dynamics Vibration, Sinusoidal (Operating and NonoperatĆ
ing): ing):
Meets or exceeds MILĆTĆ28800D, Class III Meets or exceeds MILĆTĆ28800D, Class III
Shock, 50 G, halfĆsine, 11 ms duration: Shock, 50 G, halfĆsine, 11 ms duration:
Meets or exceeds MILĆTĆ28800D, Class III Meets or exceeds MILĆTĆ28800D, Class III

Emissions, ElectromagĆ Meets or exceeds the requirements of the followĆ Emissions, ElectromagĆ Meets or exceeds the requirements of the followĆ
netic ing standards: netic ing standards:
VDE 0871, Class B! VDE 0871, Class B!
FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart B, FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart B,
Class A Class A

UserĆMisuse Simulation Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility: Conforms UserĆMisuse Simulation Electrostatic Discharge Susceptibility: Conforms
to IEC 801Ć2 to IEC 801Ć2
Bench Use (Operating and Nonoperating): Bench Use (Operating and Nonoperating):
One 10.6 cm (4 in) or balance point drop per One 10.6 cm (4 in) or balance point drop per
corner corner

1To ensure compliance use the specified shielded cable and connector housing for 1To ensure compliance use the specified shielded cable and connector housing for
the RSĆ232 connections and detach the probes or store them in the probe pouch. the RSĆ232 connections and detach the probes or store them in the probe pouch.

222PS Operator Manual AĆ75 222PS Operator Manual AĆ75

Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

Typical Characteristics Typical Characteristics

This subsection contains tables that lists the various typical This subsection contains tables that lists the various typical
characteristics that describe the 222PS PowerScout. characteristics that describe the 222PS PowerScout.

Typical characteristics are described in terms of typical or average Typical characteristics are described in terms of typical or average
performance. Typical characteristics are not warranted. performance. Typical characteristics are not warranted.

This subsection lists only typical characteristics. A list of warranted This subsection lists only typical characteristics. A list of warranted
characteristics starts on page AĆ72. characteristics starts on page AĆ72.

TableĂAĆ21:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊVertical System TableĂAĆ21:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊVertical System

Name Description Name Description

Common Mode Rejection 60 dB minimum (P850 probe), 1000:1 Common Mode Rejection 60 dB minimum (P850 probe), 1000:1
Ratio, DC - 100 kHz 80 dB minimum (P400 probe), 10,000:1 Ratio, DC - 100 kHz 80 dB minimum (P400 probe), 10,000:1
Input Capacitance, 150 pF Input Capacitance, 150 pF
Common to Chassis Common to Chassis

Input Capacitance X1 probe (P400): 30 pF Input Capacitance X1 probe (P400): 30 pF

Probe Tip to Common X10 probe (P850): 4.5 pF Probe Tip to Common X10 probe (P850): 4.5 pF

Input Resistance, X1 probe: 1 MW Input Resistance, X1 probe: 1 MW

Probe Tip to Common X10 probe: 10 MW Probe Tip to Common X10 probe: 10 MW

Isolation, Common Mode, 80 dB minimum Isolation, Common Mode, 80 dB minimum

DC - 100 kHz DC - 100 kHz

Isolation, Normal Mode, 80 dB minimum, 10000:1 (P400) Isolation, Normal Mode, 80 dB minimum, 10000:1 (P400)
DC - 10 MHz DC - 10 MHz

Slew Rate, Maximum 10,000 V/ms Slew Rate, Maximum 10,000 V/ms
Common Mode Common Mode

Range, Position, CH 1 ±12 divisions minimum Range, Position, CH 1 ±12 divisions minimum
and CH 2 and CH 2

Range, Variable Increases deflection factor by ≥250% Range, Variable Increases deflection factor by ≥250%
VOLTS/DIV VOLTS/DIV

AĆ76 Appendices AĆ76 Appendices

 Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ22:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System TableĂAĆ22:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊHorizontal System

Name Description Name Description

Accuracy, Sample Rate ±0.01% Accuracy, Sample Rate ±0.01%

Position Control Range Either end of waveform can be positioned past Position Control Range Either end of waveform can be positioned past
the center vertical graticule line the center vertical graticule line

Display Sweep Length 10.24 divisions Display Sweep Length 10.24 divisions

TableĂAĆ23:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊTriggering System TableĂAĆ23:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊTriggering System

Name Description Name Description

Input Capacitance, 18 pF Input Capacitance, 18 pF

External Input External Input
Input Resistance, External 1 MW Input Resistance, External 1 MW
Input Input

Trigger Level Range, ±2.0 V Trigger Level Range, ±2.0 V

External Input External Input

Trigger Level Range, ±20 divisions Trigger Level Range, ±20 divisions
Internal Internal

TableĂAĆ24:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊPower System TableĂAĆ24:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊPower System

Name Description Name Description

Battery, Charge Time Three hours for full charge with Battery, Charge Time Three hours for full charge with
instrument turned off instrument turned off
Battery, Excessive Instrument operation automatically interrupted Battery, Excessive Instrument operation automatically interrupted
Discharge Protection when battery voltage drops to 7.32 VDC Discharge Protection when battery voltage drops to 7.32 VDC

Battery, Minimum Three hours at 25_ C Battery, Minimum Three hours at 25_ C
Operating Time Operating Time

Battery, Capacity Over -15_ C: 80% Battery, Capacity Over -15_ C: 80%
Operating Temperature 25_ C: 100% Operating Temperature 25_ C: 100%
55_ C: 110% 55_ C: 110%

222PS Operator Manual AĆ77 222PS Operator Manual AĆ77

Appendix E: Specifications Appendix E: Specifications

TableĂAĆ24:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊPower System (Cont.) TableĂAĆ24:ăTypical CharacteristicsĊPower System (Cont.)

Name Description Name Description

Current, Demand 1 A Max (when charging battery) Current, Demand 1 A Max (when charging battery)

Consumption, Maximum 15 watts or 16 VA (maximum power demand Consumption, Maximum 15 watts or 16 VA (maximum power demand
occurs when charging the battery) occurs when charging the battery)

AĆ78 Appendices AĆ78 Appendices

 Appendix F: Appendix F:
Accessories Accessories
This appendix provides a list of standard and optional accessories for This appendix provides a list of standard and optional accessories for
the 222PS, with Tektronix part numbers. To order an accessory, the 222PS, with Tektronix part numbers. To order an accessory,
determine its part number and contact your local Tektronix field office determine its part number and contact your local Tektronix field office
or representative. In the United States, you can also call the Tektronix or representative. In the United States, you can also call the Tektronix
National Marketing Center tollĆfree at 1Ć800Ć426Ć2200. National Marketing Center tollĆfree at 1Ć800Ć426Ć2200.

For more information about Tektronix products and accessories, see For more information about Tektronix products and accessories, see
the current Tektronix Product Catalog. the current Tektronix Product Catalog.

Standard Accessories Standard Accessories

The following accessories come with the instrument. The following accessories come with the instrument.

TableĂAĆ25:ăStandard Accessories TableĂAĆ25:ăStandard Accessories

Accessory Part Number Accessory Part Number
222PS PowerScout Operator Manual 070Ć8097ĆXX 222PS PowerScout Operator Manual 070Ć8097ĆXX
222PS, 222A, and 224 Reference 070Ć8965ĆXX 222PS, 222A, and 224 Reference 070Ć8965ĆXX
External power AC adapter (110 VAC) 120Ć1807Ć00 External power AC adapter (110 VAC) 120Ć1807Ć00
Instrument carrying case 016Ć1024Ć01 Instrument carrying case 016Ć1024Ć01
Cabinet feet accessory kit 020Ć1752Ć00 Cabinet feet accessory kit 020Ć1752Ć00
10X probe with accessories (two each) P850 10X probe with accessories (two each) P850

Industrial Lead Set (2) 012Ć1392Ć00 Industrial Lead Set (2) 012Ć1392Ć00

222PS Operator Manual AĆ79 222PS Operator Manual AĆ79

Appendix F: Accessories Appendix F: Accessories

Optional Accessories Optional Accessories

You can order the following accessories. You can order the following accessories.

TableĂAĆ26:ăOptional Accessories TableĂAĆ26:ăOptional Accessories

Accessory Part Number Accessory Part Number
222PS PowerScout Service Manual 070Ć8098ĆXX 222PS PowerScout Service Manual 070Ć8098ĆXX
Spare battery 146Ć0075Ć00 Spare battery 146Ć0075Ć00
Accessory pouch (for spare battery or external 016Ć0993Ć01 Accessory pouch (for spare battery or external 016Ć0993Ć01
power AC adapter) power AC adapter)
RSĆ232 cable 174Ć1453Ć00 RSĆ232 cable 174Ć1453Ć00
BNCĆfemaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug adapter 103Ć0090Ć00 BNCĆfemaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug adapter 103Ć0090Ć00
BNCĆmaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆjack adapter 103Ć0035Ć00 BNCĆmaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆjack adapter 103Ć0035Ć00

Version 2.1 utility software 063Ć1585Ć00 Version 2.1 utility software 063Ć1585Ć00

1X probe with accessories P400 1X probe with accessories P400

Automotive lead set 020Ć2080Ć00 Automotive lead set 020Ć2080Ć00

Automotive selfĆstudy training package 650Ć3076Ć00 Automotive selfĆstudy training package 650Ć3076Ć00

External trigger probe with accessories (requires P6122 External trigger probe with accessories (requires P6122
BNCĆfemaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug adapter) BNCĆfemaleĆtoĆdualĆbananaĆplug adapter)
Virtual instrument software package CAT200 Virtual instrument software package CAT200
Intelligent printer interface WP200 Intelligent printer interface WP200
1X BNCĆtoĆProbe Adaptor 206Ć0451Ć00 1X BNCĆtoĆProbe Adaptor 206Ć0451Ć00

External battery charger with field accessories: BAT200 External battery charger with field accessories: BAT200
External battery charger External battery charger
External battery charger data sheet External battery charger data sheet
Accessory pouch Accessory pouch
Viewing hood Viewing hood
Spare battery Spare battery
Cigarette lighter adapter power cable Cigarette lighter adapter power cable
Accessory kit data sheet Accessory kit data sheet

AĆ80 Appendices AĆ80 Appendices

 Appendix F: Accessories Appendix F: Accessories

Instrument Options Instrument Options

You can order the following options for the 222PS PowerScout. You can order the following options for the 222PS PowerScout.

TableĂAĆ27:ăInstrument Options TableĂAĆ27:ăInstrument Options

Description Part Number Description Part Number
Option 05 Ċ instrument supplied with CAT200 VirtuĆ CAT200 Option 05 Ċ instrument supplied with CAT200 VirtuĆ CAT200
al Instrument Software al Instrument Software
Option 04 Ċ instrument supplied with WP200 IntelliĆ WP200 Option 04 Ċ instrument supplied with WP200 IntelliĆ WP200
gent Printer Interface gent Printer Interface

External Power AC Adapter Options External Power AC Adapter Options

You can order the following options for the external power AC adapter. You can order the following options for the external power AC adapter.

TableĂAĆ28:ăExternal Power AC Adapter Options TableĂAĆ28:ăExternal Power AC Adapter Options

Description Part Number Description Part Number
Option 02 Ċ instrument supplied without external ĊĊĊĊĊĊĊ Option 02 Ċ instrument supplied without external ĊĊĊĊĊĊĊ
power AC adapter power AC adapter
Option A1 Ċ European 220ĂV 120Ć1826Ć00 Option A1 Ċ European 220ĂV 120Ć1826Ć00
Option A2 Ċ UK 240ĂV 120Ć1827Ć00 Option A2 Ċ UK 240ĂV 120Ć1827Ć00

222PS Operator Manual AĆ81 222PS Operator Manual AĆ81

Appendix F: Accessories Appendix F: Accessories

AĆ82 Appendices AĆ82 Appendices

Glossary Glossary
& Index & Index
 Glossary Glossary
AC Coupling AC Coupling
A means to block the DC component of an input signal and to A means to block the DC component of an input signal and to
display only its AC component. display only its AC component.

Acquisition Mode Acquisition Mode

A manner of acquiring the signal and constructing a waveform. A manner of acquiring the signal and constructing a waveform.
The 222PS has four acquisition modes: normal, averaging, The 222PS has four acquisition modes: normal, averaging,
envelope, and continuous envelope. (See those definitions.) envelope, and continuous envelope. (See those definitions.)

Acquisition Sample Interval Acquisition Sample Interval

The time between each sample the instrument acquires from the The time between each sample the instrument acquires from the
input signal. input signal.

Aliasing Aliasing
A condition in which a waveform appears to have a frequency A condition in which a waveform appears to have a frequency
much lower than is accurate, because it has not been sampled much lower than is accurate, because it has not been sampled
often enough. often enough.

Attenuation Attenuation
The sensitivity of a probe. The sensitivity of a probe.

AutoĆBaseline Trigger Mode AutoĆBaseline Trigger Mode

A trigger mode in which the instrument acquires and displays A trigger mode in which the instrument acquires and displays
whatever data it can capture, regardless of whether a trigger event whatever data it can capture, regardless of whether a trigger event
has occurred. This allows you to display information even when a has occurred. This allows you to display information even when a
signal is too small to trigger on. signal is too small to trigger on.

AutoĆLevel Trigger Mode AutoĆLevel Trigger Mode

A trigger mode in which the instrument determines the peak A trigger mode in which the instrument determines the peak
values of the incoming signal and sets the trigger level to its values of the incoming signal and sets the trigger level to its
midpoint. This allows you to display a waveform without setting midpoint. This allows you to display a waveform without setting
the trigger level. the trigger level.

Auto Setup Auto Setup

A function that automatically sets frontĆpanel controls in a manner A function that automatically sets frontĆpanel controls in a manner
that depends on the signals applied to channels 1 and 2, speedĆ that depends on the signals applied to channels 1 and 2, speedĆ
ing the process of setting up the instrument. ing the process of setting up the instrument.

222PS Operator Manual GĆ1 222PS Operator Manual GĆ1

Glossary Glossary

Averaging Acquisition Mode Averaging Acquisition Mode

An acquisition mode in which the instrument displays a waveform An acquisition mode in which the instrument displays a waveform
that is the pointĆbyĆpoint average of the last four waveforms that is the pointĆbyĆpoint average of the last four waveforms
acquired. acquired.

Baud Rate Baud Rate

The rate at which two connected electronic devices exchange The rate at which two connected electronic devices exchange
data. data.

Brightness Brightness
The intensity with which the phosphor glows on the screen. The intensity with which the phosphor glows on the screen.

Calibration Calibration
The adjustment of instrument performance to meet published The adjustment of instrument performance to meet published
specifications or to verify such performance, according to external specifications or to verify such performance, according to external
reference standards. reference standards.

Channel Channel
One input path to the instrument. When you connect a probe or One input path to the instrument. When you connect a probe or
cable to the channel input connector, you can conduct a signal cable to the channel input connector, you can conduct a signal
into that input path. into that input path.

Channel Coupling Channel Coupling

The means by which an input signal is passed into a measureĆ The means by which an input signal is passed into a measureĆ
ment channel. A channel can be AC coupled, DC coupled, or ment channel. A channel can be AC coupled, DC coupled, or
ground coupled. (See those definitions.) ground coupled. (See those definitions.)

Continuous Envelope Acquisition Mode Continuous Envelope Acquisition Mode

An acquisition mode in which the instrument continues to accuĆ An acquisition mode in which the instrument continues to accuĆ
mulate and display the positive and negative peak values of the mulate and display the positive and negative peak values of the
signal until you press the INIT button. signal until you press the INIT button.

Cycle Cycle
A complete, single unit of a periodic waveform. A complete, single unit of a periodic waveform.

DC Coupling DC Coupling
A means to pass both AC and DC frequency components of the A means to pass both AC and DC frequency components of the
input signal for display. input signal for display.

Deflection Deflection
The amount of movement of an indicating device, such as a meter The amount of movement of an indicating device, such as a meter
needle or oscilloscope trace, due to some change in voltage, needle or oscilloscope trace, due to some change in voltage,
current, or resistance. current, or resistance.

Display Sample Interval Display Sample Interval

The time interval between two points of the waveform on the The time interval between two points of the waveform on the
screen. screen.

GĆ2 Glossary GĆ2 Glossary

 Glossary Glossary

Envelope Acquisition Mode Envelope Acquisition Mode

An acquisition mode in which the instrument displays the positive An acquisition mode in which the instrument displays the positive
and negative peak values of the signal. An enveloped waveform and negative peak values of the signal. An enveloped waveform
shows the maximum and minimum variations in the signal. shows the maximum and minimum variations in the signal.

EquivalentĆTime TimeĆBase Mode EquivalentĆTime TimeĆBase Mode

The timeĆbase mode required to display a signal when the time The timeĆbase mode required to display a signal when the time
base is fastĊ2Ăms to 50Ăns. In equivalentĆtime timeĆbase mode, base is fastĊ2Ăms to 50Ăns. In equivalentĆtime timeĆbase mode,
the instrument cannot capture all 512 samples and display them the instrument cannot capture all 512 samples and display them
in one pass. Therefore, the instrument depends on successive in one pass. Therefore, the instrument depends on successive
repetitions of the same waveform to fill the display with samples. repetitions of the same waveform to fill the display with samples.

External Trigger Source External Trigger Source

A trigger source derived from a nondisplayable signal acquired A trigger source derived from a nondisplayable signal acquired
through the external trigger input connector on the rear panel of through the external trigger input connector on the rear panel of
the 222PS. the 222PS.

Ground Coupling Ground Coupling

A means to connect a channel input to a ground reference. A means to connect a channel input to a ground reference.

Horizontal Axis Horizontal Axis

Usually, the axis along which an oscilloscope measures the timing Usually, the axis along which an oscilloscope measures the timing
of a signal. The exception to this is XY mode. (See definition of a signal. The exception to this is XY mode. (See definition
below.) The timing of a signal is usually measured in secondsĆperĆ below.) The timing of a signal is usually measured in secondsĆperĆ
division, or fractions of a secondĆperĆdivision. division, or fractions of a secondĆperĆdivision.

Inverted Waveform Inverted Waveform

A waveform that is flipped along its horizontal axis, so that it A waveform that is flipped along its horizontal axis, so that it
appears upsideĆdown. appears upsideĆdown.

Major Division Major Division

One mark dividing the screen either horizontally or vertically for One mark dividing the screen either horizontally or vertically for
measurement purposes. The 222PS has eight major vertical measurement purposes. The 222PS has eight major vertical
divisions and ten major horizontal divisions. divisions and ten major horizontal divisions.

Memory Memory
The ability of the instrument to store data such as waveforms, The ability of the instrument to store data such as waveforms,
frontĆpanel settings, and configurations. frontĆpanel settings, and configurations.

Menu Menu
A list of choices that you can select in order to perform some A list of choices that you can select in order to perform some
action, such as placing the instrument in a specific mode, or action, such as placing the instrument in a specific mode, or
enabling or disabling a specific feature. enabling or disabling a specific feature.

222PS Operator Manual GĆ3 222PS Operator Manual GĆ3

Glossary Glossary

Menu Button Menu Button

One of four buttons alongside the right edge of the screen that One of four buttons alongside the right edge of the screen that
can be associated with a menu item. Pressing a menu button can be associated with a menu item. Pressing a menu button
performs the action associated with the item next to it. performs the action associated with the item next to it.

Menu Item Menu Item

One of four action choices printed at the right edge of the screen, One of four action choices printed at the right edge of the screen,
alongside the menu buttons. Pressing the button next to the menu alongside the menu buttons. Pressing the button next to the menu
item performs the action represented by that item. item performs the action represented by that item.

Minor Division Minor Division

Subdivisions of major divisions for more accurate measurement. Subdivisions of major divisions for more accurate measurement.
Minor divisions are seen as marks along the horizontal and Minor divisions are seen as marks along the horizontal and
vertical center lines. The 222PS has five minor divisions in each vertical center lines. The 222PS has five minor divisions in each
major division in both directions. major division in both directions.

Normal Acquisition Mode Normal Acquisition Mode

The most commonly used acquisition mode, in which the instruĆ The most commonly used acquisition mode, in which the instruĆ
ment displays one sample point for each point it acquires. ment displays one sample point for each point it acquires.

Normal Trigger Mode Normal Trigger Mode

A trigger mode in which the instrument does not acquire or A trigger mode in which the instrument does not acquire or
display a waveform until a trigger occurs. The trigger source, display a waveform until a trigger occurs. The trigger source,
level, and slope must be set appropriately. level, and slope must be set appropriately.

PeakĆtoĆPeak voltage (VpĆp) PeakĆtoĆPeak voltage (VpĆp)

The voltage between the positive and negative peaks of a sine The voltage between the positive and negative peaks of a sine
wave. wave.

Peak Voltage (Vp) Peak Voltage (Vp)

The voltage between the mean or average value and the peak of The voltage between the mean or average value and the peak of
the sine wave of an alternating voltage. the sine wave of an alternating voltage.

Probe Probe
A device that allows you to transfer an electrical signal from an A device that allows you to transfer an electrical signal from an
external circuit into the oscilloscope. external circuit into the oscilloscope.

Readout Readout
Information, appearing on the screen, that is associated with a Information, appearing on the screen, that is associated with a
signal trace. Readouts can be numeric values such as the voltsĆ signal trace. Readouts can be numeric values such as the voltsĆ
perĆdivision or symbols such as the kind of channel coupling. perĆdivision or symbols such as the kind of channel coupling.

Record TimeĆBase Mode Record TimeĆBase Mode

The timeĆbase mode used for most time bases. When a trigger The timeĆbase mode used for most time bases. When a trigger
occurs, a record of the waveform is acquired and displayed. occurs, a record of the waveform is acquired and displayed.

GĆ4 Glossary GĆ4 Glossary

 Glossary Glossary

RSĆ232 RSĆ232
A communication interface that can be used to control the instruĆ A communication interface that can be used to control the instruĆ
ment and capture data remotely from a computer. ment and capture data remotely from a computer.

Sample Sample
One point of the waveform. Waveforms on the 222PS are made One point of the waveform. Waveforms on the 222PS are made
up of 512 samples. up of 512 samples.

Sample Interval Sample Interval

See acquisition sample interval or display sample interval. See acquisition sample interval or display sample interval.

Sampling Rate Sampling Rate

The number of times per second that the instrument samples the The number of times per second that the instrument samples the
signal it is receiving. signal it is receiving.

Scrolling TimeĆBase Mode Scrolling TimeĆBase Mode

The timeĆbase mode used for slow time bases (20Ăs to 0.1Ăs or The timeĆbase mode used for slow time bases (20Ăs to 0.1Ăs or
50Ăms) when the instrument is using autolevel or autobaseline 50Ăms) when the instrument is using autolevel or autobaseline
trigger mode. In scrolling timeĆbase mode, no trigger is accepted. trigger mode. In scrolling timeĆbase mode, no trigger is accepted.
The first sample appears at the left edge of the display; the The first sample appears at the left edge of the display; the
display fills from left to right. After the display fills, new samples display fills from left to right. After the display fills, new samples
appear at the right edge and the old samples shift left one point at appear at the right edge and the old samples shift left one point at
a time to accommodate the new samples. The oldest sample, the a time to accommodate the new samples. The oldest sample, the
one at the leftmost edge of the screen, is erased. This gives the one at the leftmost edge of the screen, is erased. This gives the
effect of the waveform continuously scrolling across the screen effect of the waveform continuously scrolling across the screen
from right to left. from right to left.

ScrollĆScan TimeĆBase Mode ScrollĆScan TimeĆBase Mode

The timeĆbase mode used for slow time bases (20Ăs to 0.1Ăs or The timeĆbase mode used for slow time bases (20Ăs to 0.1Ăs or
50Ăms) when the instrument is using normal or singleĆsequence 50Ăms) when the instrument is using normal or singleĆsequence
trigger mode. In scrollĆscan timeĆbase mode, the display begins trigger mode. In scrollĆscan timeĆbase mode, the display begins
to fill from left to right until the trigger position is reached. The to fill from left to right until the trigger position is reached. The
trigger system cannot accept a trigger until these pretrigger trigger system cannot accept a trigger until these pretrigger
samples have all been acquired. When the pretrigger portion of samples have all been acquired. When the pretrigger portion of
the display is filled, a trigger can occur. Until a trigger occurs, the display is filled, a trigger can occur. Until a trigger occurs,
however, new samples are continually acquired; they are added however, new samples are continually acquired; they are added
to the right side of the pretrigger portion of the display and scroll to the right side of the pretrigger portion of the display and scroll
off the display to the left. When a trigger occurs, the postĆtrigger off the display to the left. When a trigger occurs, the postĆtrigger
portion of the display starts to fill from the left to the right. When portion of the display starts to fill from the left to the right. When
the entire display is filled, it is erased, and signal acquisition the entire display is filled, it is erased, and signal acquisition
begins again. begins again.

Seconds per Division Seconds per Division

The number of seconds, or fractions of a second, represented by The number of seconds, or fractions of a second, represented by
each major division on the horizontal axis. each major division on the horizontal axis.

222PS Operator Manual GĆ5 222PS Operator Manual GĆ5

Glossary Glossary

Selected Channel Selected Channel

The channel affected by changes to the frontĆpanel controls. The The channel affected by changes to the frontĆpanel controls. The
readout associated with a selected channel appears boxed on the readout associated with a selected channel appears boxed on the
222PS display. 222PS display.

SelfĆCalibration SelfĆCalibration
A procedure which fineĆtunes a system for increased accuracy. A procedure which fineĆtunes a system for increased accuracy.
The 222PS provides selfĆcalibration routines for both channels, the The 222PS provides selfĆcalibration routines for both channels, the
external trigger source, and display alignment. external trigger source, and display alignment.

Setup Setup
A specific configuration of frontĆ and topĆpanel control settings. A specific configuration of frontĆ and topĆpanel control settings.

Sine wave Sine wave

The graphic plot of voltage against time of the normal AC waveĆ The graphic plot of voltage against time of the normal AC waveĆ
form; the most common signal form. form; the most common signal form.

SingleĆSequence Trigger Mode SingleĆSequence Trigger Mode

A trigger mode in which the instrument acquires one triggered A trigger mode in which the instrument acquires one triggered
signal, displays it, and then holds it until you press the INIT button signal, displays it, and then holds it until you press the INIT button
to restart the sequence. to restart the sequence.

SingleĆShot SingleĆShot
SingleĆsequence. SingleĆsequence.

SingleĆSweep SingleĆSweep
SingleĆsequence. SingleĆsequence.

Store Mode Store Mode

A mode in which the instrument continues to display waveforms A mode in which the instrument continues to display waveforms
between trigger events. When not in store mode, waveforms are between trigger events. When not in store mode, waveforms are
displayed until the next trigger event, or until the next display displayed until the next trigger event, or until the next display
updateĊabout 30Ăms. If a trigger has not occurred by the next updateĊabout 30Ăms. If a trigger has not occurred by the next
display update, the display is blanked. display update, the display is blanked.

Time Base Time Base

The number of seconds per division. The number of seconds per division.

TimeĆBase Mode TimeĆBase Mode

The mode required to display a signal, given the timeĆbase of the The mode required to display a signal, given the timeĆbase of the
instrument, and occasionally also depending on other factors instrument, and occasionally also depending on other factors
such as trigger mode, acquisition mode, and whether the instruĆ such as trigger mode, acquisition mode, and whether the instruĆ
ment is in store mode. Possible timeĆbase modes are record, ment is in store mode. Possible timeĆbase modes are record,
equivalentĆtime, scroll, and scrollĆscan. (See those definitions.) equivalentĆtime, scroll, and scrollĆscan. (See those definitions.)

GĆ6 Glossary GĆ6 Glossary

 Glossary Glossary

TimeĆOut Feature TimeĆOut Feature

A feature that shuts off the instrument after two minutes without A feature that shuts off the instrument after two minutes without
changes to the controls, when the instrument is running under changes to the controls, when the instrument is running under
battery power. This feature prevents the battery from being battery power. This feature prevents the battery from being
discharged when the instrument is left unattended. discharged when the instrument is left unattended.

Trigger Trigger
The event that tells the oscilloscope to start acquiring and displayĆ The event that tells the oscilloscope to start acquiring and displayĆ
ing a waveform. ing a waveform.

Trigger Coupling Trigger Coupling

See Channel Coupling. See Channel Coupling.

Trigger Level Trigger Level

The voltage threshold that a signal must cross in order for the The voltage threshold that a signal must cross in order for the
instrument to trigger. instrument to trigger.

Trigger Light Trigger Light

A light on the 222PS front panel, labeled TRIG'D, that indicates A light on the 222PS front panel, labeled TRIG'D, that indicates
when the instrument has acquired a trigger. when the instrument has acquired a trigger.

Trigger Mode Trigger Mode

The way in which the instrument acquires a trigger. The 222PS The way in which the instrument acquires a trigger. The 222PS
has four trigger modes: normal, auto level, auto baseline, and has four trigger modes: normal, auto level, auto baseline, and
singleĆsequence. (See those definitions.) singleĆsequence. (See those definitions.)

Trigger Slope Trigger Slope

The parameter that determines whether the oscilloscope triggers The parameter that determines whether the oscilloscope triggers
as the voltage of the displayed signal is rising or falling. as the voltage of the displayed signal is rising or falling.

Trigger Source Trigger Source

The signal that provides the trigger event. The trigger source can The signal that provides the trigger event. The trigger source can
be a signal acquired through either channel or an external trigger. be a signal acquired through either channel or an external trigger.

Trigger Position Trigger Position

The location of the trigger event relative to the waveform on the The location of the trigger event relative to the waveform on the
display. When the 222PS is in store mode, the trigger position can display. When the 222PS is in store mode, the trigger position can
be at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end of the waveform. be at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end of the waveform.
This allows you to view the waveform data distributed around the This allows you to view the waveform data distributed around the
trigger point in three ways. trigger point in three ways.

Uncalibrated Channel Uncalibrated Channel

A channel manipulated with the variable voltsĆperĆdivision (VAR A channel manipulated with the variable voltsĆperĆdivision (VAR
VOLTS/DIV) knob. This knob allows you to scale a waveform VOLTS/DIV) knob. This knob allows you to scale a waveform
vertically so that it takes up an arbitrary number of vertical diviĆ vertically so that it takes up an arbitrary number of vertical diviĆ
sions. However, after this manipulation, the exact number of sions. However, after this manipulation, the exact number of
voltsĆperĆdivision for that signal is unknown. voltsĆperĆdivision for that signal is unknown.

222PS Operator Manual GĆ7 222PS Operator Manual GĆ7

Glossary Glossary

Vertical Axis Vertical Axis

The axis along which an oscilloscope measures the voltage of a The axis along which an oscilloscope measures the voltage of a
signal, in volts per division or fractions of a volt per division. signal, in volts per division or fractions of a volt per division.

Volt (V) Volt (V)

The unit of potential difference. One volt is the amount of voltage The unit of potential difference. One volt is the amount of voltage
needed to cause one ampere of current to pass through one Ohm needed to cause one ampere of current to pass through one Ohm
of resistance. of resistance.

Volts per Division Volts per Division

The number of volts (or fractions of a volt) represented by each The number of volts (or fractions of a volt) represented by each
major division on the vertical axis, except in XY mode, where both major division on the vertical axis, except in XY mode, where both
axes represent volts per division. axes represent volts per division.

XY Mode XY Mode
A mode in which both the horizontal and the vertical axes of the A mode in which both the horizontal and the vertical axes of the
instrument represent volts per division. The signal acquired instrument represent volts per division. The signal acquired
through channel 1 is displayed on the x (horizontal) axis, and the through channel 1 is displayed on the x (horizontal) axis, and the
signal acquired through channel 2 is displayed on the y (vertical) signal acquired through channel 2 is displayed on the y (vertical)
axis. axis.

GĆ8 Glossary GĆ8 Glossary

 Index Index

Symbols of uncalibrated signal, 3Ć76 Symbols of uncalibrated signal, 3Ć76

attenuation, definition, GĆ1 attenuation, definition, GĆ1
+ sign auto baseline trigger mode, 3Ć28 + sign auto baseline trigger mode, 3Ć28
readout, 2Ć9 and scroll timeĆbase mode, 3Ć72 readout, 2Ć9 and scroll timeĆbase mode, 3Ć72
trigger slope, 3Ć69 definition, GĆ1 trigger slope, 3Ć69 definition, GĆ1
- sign with averaging acquisition, 3Ć1 - sign with averaging acquisition, 3Ć1
readout, 2Ć9 auto level trigger mode, 3Ć28, readout, 2Ć9 auto level trigger mode, 3Ć28,
trigger slope, 3Ć69 3Ć72ć3Ć73 trigger slope, 3Ć69 3Ć72ć3Ć73
= sign, readout, 2Ć7 definition, GĆ1 = sign, readout, 2Ć7 definition, GĆ1
> sign, readout, 2Ć7, 3Ć76 with averaging acquisition, 3Ć1 > sign, readout, 2Ć7, 3Ć76 with averaging acquisition, 3Ć1
~ sign, readout, 2Ć7 AUTO SETUP, 3Ć5, 3Ć15 ~ sign, readout, 2Ć7 AUTO SETUP, 3Ć5, 3Ć15
definition, GĆ1 definition, GĆ1
with highĆfrequency signals, 3Ć6 with highĆfrequency signals, 3Ć6
with lowĆfrequency signals, 3Ć6 with lowĆfrequency signals, 3Ć6
auto setup, button, 2Ć3 auto setup, button, 2Ć3
A auto trigger level, 3Ć70 A auto trigger level, 3Ć70
AUTOLVL:PUSH button, 2Ć5, 3Ć66, AUTOLVL:PUSH button, 2Ć5, 3Ć66,
AC coupling, 3Ć19 AC coupling, 3Ć19
3Ć70, 3Ć72 3Ć70, 3Ć72
definition, GĆ1 definition, GĆ1
autoset tests, AĆ41ćAĆ42 autoset tests, AĆ41ćAĆ42
readout, 2Ć7 readout, 2Ć7
AUX FUNCT button, 2Ć12, 3Ć9, 3Ć31 AUX FUNCT button, 2Ć12, 3Ć9, 3Ć31
accessories, ordering, AĆ79 accessories, ordering, AĆ79
auxiliary functions menu, 3Ć10, 3Ć31, auxiliary functions menu, 3Ć10, 3Ć31,
accessory pouch, AĆ80 3Ć38, 3Ć45 accessory pouch, AĆ80 3Ć38, 3Ć45
ACQ, AĆ17 averaging acquisition mode, 3Ć1, ACQ, AĆ17 averaging acquisition mode, 3Ć1,
ACQ button, 2Ć11, 3Ć3ć3Ć4 3Ć28 ACQ button, 2Ć11, 3Ć3ć3Ć4 3Ć28
acquisition mode, 3Ć1ć3Ć4, 3Ć27, definition, GĆ2 acquisition mode, 3Ć1ć3Ć4, 3Ć27, definition, GĆ2
3Ć28 3Ć28
averaging, 3Ć1 averaging, 3Ć1
continuous envelope, 3Ć2ć3Ć3 continuous envelope, 3Ć2ć3Ć3
definition, GĆ1 definition, GĆ1
envelope, 3Ć2 B envelope, 3Ć2 B
menu, 3Ć3 menu, 3Ć3
BAT200, AĆ80 BAT200, AĆ80
normal, 3Ć1 normal, 3Ć1
battery battery
selecting, 3Ć3ć3Ć4 selecting, 3Ć3ć3Ć4
charging, 3Ć37 charging, 3Ć37
acquisition sample interval, definiĆ temperature, 3Ć37 acquisition sample interval, definiĆ temperature, 3Ć37
tion, GĆ1 tion, GĆ1
connecting, 2Ć13, 3Ć35ć3Ć36 connecting, 2Ć13, 3Ć35ć3Ć36
aliasing, 3Ć26ć3Ć28 aliasing, 3Ć26ć3Ć28
deep discharge of, 3Ć40ć3Ć41 deep discharge of, 3Ć40ć3Ć41
definition, GĆ1 definition, GĆ1
low charge indicator, 3Ć37 low charge indicator, 3Ć37
amplitude amplitude
operating with, 3Ć35ć3Ć41 operating with, 3Ć35ć3Ć41
and triggering, 3Ć76 and triggering, 3Ć76

222PS Operator Manual IĆ1 222PS Operator Manual IĆ1

Index Index

recharging after deep discharge, coupling, setting, 3Ć19ć3Ć20 recharging after deep discharge, coupling, setting, 3Ć19ć3Ć20
3Ć40ć3Ć41 DC coupling, 3Ć19 3Ć40ć3Ć41 DC coupling, 3Ć19
replacing, 3Ć39 definition, GĆ2 replacing, 3Ć39 definition, GĆ2
spare, AĆ80 displaying, 3Ć18ć3Ć19 spare, AĆ80 displaying, 3Ć18ć3Ć19
time out feature and, 3Ć37 ground coupling, 3Ć19 time out feature and, 3Ć37 ground coupling, 3Ć19
battery power, slow time bases with, inverting, 2Ć7, 3Ć22ć3Ć23 battery power, slow time bases with, inverting, 2Ć7, 3Ć22ć3Ć23
3Ć26 button for, 2Ć12 3Ć26 button for, 2Ć12
baud rate selected, 2Ć7 baud rate selected, 2Ć7
definition, GĆ2 selecting, 3Ć17, 3Ć80 definition, GĆ2 selecting, 3Ć17, 3Ć80
setting, 2Ć12, AĆ11ćAĆ36 selector buttons, 3Ć18, 3Ć19 setting, 2Ć12, AĆ11ćAĆ36 selector buttons, 3Ć18, 3Ć19
baud rates, AĆ32 settings, 3Ć19 baud rates, AĆ32 settings, 3Ć19
BNCĆfemaleĆtoĆdualĆbanana adaptĆ turning off, 3Ć18, 3Ć19 BNCĆfemaleĆtoĆdualĆbanana adaptĆ turning off, 3Ć18, 3Ć19
er, AĆ80 uncalibrated, 2Ć7, 3Ć76 er, AĆ80 uncalibrated, 2Ć7, 3Ć76
BNCĆmaleĆtoĆdualĆbanana adapter, definition, GĆ7 BNCĆmaleĆtoĆdualĆbanana adapter, definition, GĆ7
AĆ80 channel coupling, definition, GĆ2 AĆ80 channel coupling, definition, GĆ2
brightness, definition, GĆ2 charging the battery, 3Ć37 brightness, definition, GĆ2 charging the battery, 3Ć37
brightness knob, 2Ć15 CLEAR button, 3Ć13, 3Ć19, 3Ć39, 3Ć47 brightness knob, 2Ć15 CLEAR button, 3Ć13, 3Ć19, 3Ć39, 3Ć47
BUT, AĆ15 clearing a menu, 2Ć10 BUT, AĆ15 clearing a menu, 2Ć10
COMM PORT connector, 2Ć14, AĆ9 COMM PORT connector, 2Ć14, AĆ9
communication parameters, AĆ32 communication parameters, AĆ32
configuration menu, 3Ć38, 3Ć45 configuration menu, 3Ć38, 3Ć45
C configuring the probes, 3Ć45ć3Ć47 C configuring the probes, 3Ć45ć3Ć47
connecting connecting
cabinet feet, AĆ79 battery, 3Ć35ć3Ć36 cabinet feet, AĆ79 battery, 3Ć35ć3Ć36
calibrating probes, 3Ć44 calibrating probes, 3Ć44
channel 1, 3Ć11 to a PC, AĆ10 channel 1, 3Ć11 to a PC, AĆ10
channel 2, 3Ć11 continuous envelope acquisition channel 2, 3Ć11 continuous envelope acquisition
external trigger input, 3Ć11 mode, 3Ć2ć3Ć3, 3Ć28 external trigger input, 3Ć11 mode, 3Ć2ć3Ć3, 3Ć28
instrument, 3Ć9ć3Ć14 definition, GĆ2 instrument, 3Ć9ć3Ć14 definition, GĆ2
calibration conventions, performance verificaĆ calibration conventions, performance verificaĆ
button, 2Ć12 tion, AĆ38 button, 2Ć12 tion, AĆ38
definition, GĆ6 coupling, menu, 3Ć18 definition, GĆ6 coupling, menu, 3Ć18
carrying case, AĆ79 CTS, AĆ32 carrying case, AĆ79 CTS, AĆ32
CAT200, AĆ11, AĆ33, AĆ80 CURV, AĆ14, AĆ19 CAT200, AĆ11, AĆ33, AĆ80 CURV, AĆ14, AĆ19
CAUTION CURV?, AĆ18 CAUTION CURV?, AĆ18
statement in manuals, 1Ć2 cycle, definition, GĆ2 statement in manuals, 1Ć2 cycle, definition, GĆ2
statement on equipment, 1Ć3 statement on equipment, 1Ć3
CH1 button, 3Ć18, 3Ć19 CH1 button, 3Ć18, 3Ć19
CH2 button, 3Ć18, 3Ć19 CH2 button, 3Ć18, 3Ć19
channel, 3Ć17ć3Ć20 D channel, 3Ć17ć3Ć20 D
AC coupling, 3Ć19 AC coupling, 3Ć19
as trigger source, 3Ć15, 3Ć18 DAC, AĆ16, AĆ19 as trigger source, 3Ć15, 3Ć18 DAC, AĆ16, AĆ19
coupling, 2Ć7, 3Ć19ć3Ć20, AĆ4 DAC?, AĆ18 coupling, 2Ć7, 3Ć19ć3Ć20, AĆ4 DAC?, AĆ18
coupling of stored waveform, 2Ć8 coupling of stored waveform, 2Ć8

IĆ2 Index IĆ2 Index

 Index Index

DANGER, statement on equipment, operating with, 3Ć41ć3Ć42 DANGER, statement on equipment, operating with, 3Ć41ć3Ć42
1Ć3 external power AC adapter, 3Ć37, 1Ć3 external power AC adapter, 3Ć37,
data bits, AĆ32 3Ć41ć3Ć42, AĆ79, AĆ81 data bits, AĆ32 3Ć41ć3Ć42, AĆ79, AĆ81
DC coupling, 3Ć19 external power indicator, 3Ć42 DC coupling, 3Ć19 external power indicator, 3Ć42
definition, GĆ2 external power source, 3Ć42 definition, GĆ2 external power source, 3Ć42
readout, 2Ć7 AC, 3Ć42 readout, 2Ć7 AC, 3Ć42
decoding DC, 3Ć42 decoding DC, 3Ć42
acquisition mode settings, AĆ26 external trigger, 3Ć66 acquisition mode settings, AĆ26 external trigger, 3Ć66
miscellaneous, AĆ26 common reference, 3Ć11 miscellaneous, AĆ26 common reference, 3Ć11
SEC/DIV setting, AĆ22 connecting, 2Ć15 SEC/DIV setting, AĆ22 connecting, 2Ć15
trigger functions, AĆ24 grounding, 2Ć15 trigger functions, AĆ24 grounding, 2Ć15
vertical settings, AĆ20 grounding, input voltage limit, vertical settings, AĆ20 grounding, input voltage limit,
deflection, definition, GĆ2 2Ć15, 3Ć65 deflection, definition, GĆ2 2Ć15, 3Ć65
DISPL button, 2Ć12, 3Ć21, 3Ć22, 3Ć79 probe for, AĆ80 DISPL button, 2Ć12, 3Ć21, 3Ć22, 3Ć79 probe for, AĆ80
display, 2Ć6, 3Ć21ć3Ć24 source, definition, GĆ3 display, 2Ć6, 3Ć21ć3Ć24 source, definition, GĆ3
brightness, 2Ć15, 3Ć23 brightness, 2Ć15, 3Ć23
focus, 2Ć14 focus, 2Ć14
intensity, 3Ć23 intensity, 3Ć23
inverting, 3Ć22ć3Ć23 F inverting, 3Ć22ć3Ć23 F
menu, 3Ć79ć3Ć80 menu, 3Ć79ć3Ć80
display menu, 3Ć23 firmware version, 3Ć31 display menu, 3Ć23 firmware version, 3Ć31
display sample interval, definition, identifying, 3Ć31ć3Ć33 display sample interval, definition, identifying, 3Ć31ć3Ć33
GĆ2 flow control, AĆ32 GĆ2 flow control, AĆ32
down arrow, readout, 2Ć7 focus knob, 2Ć14 down arrow, readout, 2Ć7 focus knob, 2Ć14
DSR, AĆ32 FP, AĆ17, AĆ19 DSR, AĆ32 FP, AĆ17, AĆ19
DTR, AĆ32 fp data, AĆ17 DTR, AĆ32 fp data, AĆ17
FP?, AĆ18 FP?, AĆ18
frame, AĆ14 frame, AĆ14
front panel, 2Ć2 front panel, 2Ć2
E front panel encoding, AĆ20 E front panel encoding, AĆ20
frontĆpanel controls, with continuous frontĆpanel controls, with continuous
envelope acquisition mode, 3Ć2 envelope acquisition mode, 3Ć2 envelope acquisition mode, 3Ć2 envelope acquisition mode, 3Ć2
definition, GĆ3 definition, GĆ3
equivalentĆtime timeĆbase mode, equivalentĆtime timeĆbase mode,
3Ć27 3Ć27
definition, GĆ3
error codes, diagnostic, AĆ28
G definition, GĆ3
error codes, diagnostic, AĆ28
G
EXT POWER INPUT connector, 2Ć15 glitch, detecting, 3Ć2 EXT POWER INPUT connector, 2Ć15 glitch, detecting, 3Ć2
EXT TRIG INPUT connector, 2Ć15, ground coupling, 3Ć19 EXT TRIG INPUT connector, 2Ć15, ground coupling, 3Ć19
3Ć66 definition, GĆ3 3Ć66 definition, GĆ3
external battery charger, AĆ80 readout, 2Ć7 external battery charger, AĆ80 readout, 2Ć7
external power ground symbol, readout, 2Ć7 external power ground symbol, readout, 2Ć7
connecting, 2Ć15, 3Ć41 connecting, 2Ć15, 3Ć41

222PS Operator Manual IĆ3 222PS Operator Manual IĆ3

Index Index

H M H M
horizontal axis, definition, GĆ3 magnifying a signal, 3Ć29ć3Ć30 horizontal axis, definition, GĆ3 magnifying a signal, 3Ć29ć3Ć30
horizontal controls, 2Ć5, 3Ć25 and timeĆbase modes, 3Ć29 horizontal controls, 2Ć5, 3Ć25 and timeĆbase modes, 3Ć29
horizontal position horizontal position of, 3Ć25 horizontal position horizontal position of, 3Ć25
knob, 2Ć6 in XY mode, 3Ć29 knob, 2Ć6 in XY mode, 3Ć29
of magnified signal, 3Ć25 knob, 2Ć6 of magnified signal, 3Ć25 knob, 2Ć6
of stored waveforms, 3Ć25 readout, 2Ć9, 3Ć29 of stored waveforms, 3Ć25 readout, 2Ć9, 3Ć29
horizontal scale, with AUTO SETUP, stored waveforms and, 3Ć29 horizontal scale, with AUTO SETUP, stored waveforms and, 3Ć29
3Ć6 time base of, 3Ć26 3Ć6 time base of, 3Ć26
trigger position in, 3Ć29 trigger position in, 3Ć29
major division, definition, GĆ3 major division, definition, GĆ3
manual, organization of, i manual, organization of, i
I maximum applied voltage, AĆ33 I maximum applied voltage, AĆ33
measuring signals, AĆ1 measuring signals, AĆ1
ID, AĆ19 fallĆtime, AĆ7 ID, AĆ19 fallĆtime, AĆ7
ID?, AĆ18 floating, 3Ć17 ID?, AĆ18 floating, 3Ć17
INIT button, 3Ć2, 3Ć15, 3Ć16, 3Ć61, groundĆreference, AĆ4 INIT button, 3Ć2, 3Ć15, 3Ć16, 3Ć61, groundĆreference, AĆ4
3Ć73 peakĆtoĆpeak, AĆ3 3Ć73 peakĆtoĆpeak, AĆ3
instrument riseĆtime, AĆ7 instrument riseĆtime, AĆ7
accessories for, AĆ79 time, AĆ5 accessories for, AĆ79 time, AĆ5
calibration, 3Ć9ć3Ć14 voltage, AĆ2 calibration, 3Ć9ć3Ć14 voltage, AĆ2
configuration, 3Ć5ć3Ć8 memory, 3Ć55 configuration, 3Ć5ć3Ć8 memory, 3Ć55
recalling, 2Ć12, 3Ć57ć3Ć60 and power requirements, 3Ć51 recalling, 2Ć12, 3Ć57ć3Ć60 and power requirements, 3Ć51
saving, 2Ć12, 3Ć51, 3Ć55ć3Ć60 definition, GĆ3 saving, 2Ć12, 3Ć51, 3Ć55ć3Ć60 definition, GĆ3
ID, 3Ć31 erasing, 3Ć52, 3Ć54, 3Ć58 ID, 3Ć31 erasing, 3Ć52, 3Ć54, 3Ć58
serial number, 2Ć14, 3Ć31 menu, 2Ć9 serial number, 2Ć14, 3Ć31 menu, 2Ć9
storing, 3Ć40 acquisition, 3Ć3 storing, 3Ć40 acquisition, 3Ć3
turning on, 3Ć42 auxiliary functions, 3Ć10, 3Ć31, turning on, 3Ć42 auxiliary functions, 3Ć10, 3Ć31,
INTEN knob, 2Ć15, 3Ć23 3Ć38, 3Ć45 INTEN knob, 2Ć15, 3Ć23 3Ć38, 3Ć45
inverted waveform, 3Ć22 button, 2Ć10 inverted waveform, 3Ć22 button, 2Ć10
definition, GĆ3 definition, GĆ4 definition, GĆ3 definition, GĆ4
clearing, 3Ć53, 3Ć54 clearing, 3Ć53, 3Ć54
configuration, 3Ć38, 3Ć45 configuration, 3Ć38, 3Ć45
definition, GĆ3 definition, GĆ3
L display, 3Ć23, 3Ć79ć3Ć80 L display, 3Ć23, 3Ć79ć3Ć80
item, 2Ć10 item, 2Ć10
levels, AĆ33 definition, GĆ4 levels, AĆ33 definition, GĆ4
line operation, 2Ć15 name, 2Ć10 line operation, 2Ć15 name, 2Ć10
log fp, AĆ17 probe, 3Ć46 log fp, AĆ17 probe, 3Ć46
logical front panel encoding, AĆ20 selfĆcalibration, 3Ć11 logical front panel encoding, AĆ20 selfĆcalibration, 3Ć11
low battery indicator, 3Ć37 trigger mode, 3Ć73ć3Ć74 low battery indicator, 3Ć37 trigger mode, 3Ć73ć3Ć74
trigger position, 3Ć71 trigger position, 3Ć71
trigger source, 3Ć64ć3Ć65 trigger source, 3Ć64ć3Ć65

IĆ4 Index IĆ4 Index

 Index Index

messages, AĆ33 horizontal check, AĆ57ćAĆ60 messages, AĆ33 horizontal check, AĆ57ćAĆ60
minor division, definition, GĆ4 preliminaries, AĆ47ćAĆ48 minor division, definition, GĆ4 preliminaries, AĆ47ćAĆ48
MODE button, 2Ć4, 3Ć73 preliminary procedure, AĆ47ćAĆ48 MODE button, 2Ć4, 3Ć73 preliminary procedure, AĆ47ćAĆ48
modem, activating, 2Ć12 prerequisites, AĆ43ćAĆ44 modem, activating, 2Ć12 prerequisites, AĆ43ćAĆ44
motor trigger, 3Ć67 trigger check, AĆ60ćAĆ64 motor trigger, 3Ć67 trigger check, AĆ60ćAĆ64
vertical checks, AĆ48ćAĆ57 vertical checks, AĆ48ćAĆ57
performance verification performance verification
autoset tests, AĆ41ćAĆ42 autoset tests, AĆ41ćAĆ42
N general instructions, AĆ37
horizontal check, AĆ57ćAĆ60
N general instructions, AĆ37
horizontal check, AĆ57ćAĆ60
nominal traits initial setup procedure, AĆ39 nominal traits initial setup procedure, AĆ39
defined, AĆ65 performance tests, AĆ43ćAĆ64 defined, AĆ65 performance tests, AĆ43ćAĆ64
listed, AĆ65, AĆ68 purpose and extent of, AĆ37 listed, AĆ65, AĆ68 purpose and extent of, AĆ37
normal acquisition mode, 3Ć1 quick checks, AĆ37 normal acquisition mode, 3Ć1 quick checks, AĆ37
definition, GĆ4 self cal tests, AĆ39ćAĆ41 definition, GĆ4 self cal tests, AĆ39ćAĆ41
normal trigger mode, 3Ć28 trigger checks, AĆ60ćAĆ64 normal trigger mode, 3Ć28 trigger checks, AĆ60ćAĆ64
definition, GĆ4 vertical checks, AĆ48ćAĆ57 definition, GĆ4 vertical checks, AĆ48ćAĆ57
plotter/printer support, AĆ33 plotter/printer support, AĆ33
POS knob, 3Ć29 POS knob, 3Ć29
for uncalibrated waveforms, 3Ć76 for uncalibrated waveforms, 3Ć76
positioning XY waveforms, 3Ć80 positioning XY waveforms, 3Ć80
O printer interface, AĆ80
O printer interface, AĆ80
ON button, 3Ć37, 3Ć42 probe, 3Ć43ć3Ć50 ON button, 3Ć37, 3Ć42 probe, 3Ć43ć3Ć50
operator manual, i, AĆ79 10X, 3Ć43, 3Ć76, AĆ80 operator manual, i, AĆ79 10X, 3Ć43, 3Ć76, AĆ80
1X, 3Ć43, 3Ć76, AĆ79 1X, 3Ć43, 3Ć76, AĆ79
accessories, 3Ć47ć3Ć50 accessories, 3Ć47ć3Ć50
attenuation, 3Ć43 attenuation, 3Ć43
configuring, 3Ć45ć3Ć47 configuring, 3Ć45ć3Ć47
P connecting, 3Ć44 P connecting, 3Ć44
definition, GĆ4 definition, GĆ4
packaging for shipment, 3Ć33 packaging for shipment, 3Ć33
external trigger, AĆ80 external trigger, AĆ80
parity, AĆ32 parity, AĆ32
menu, 3Ć46 menu, 3Ć46
peak voltage, definition, GĆ4 peak voltage, definition, GĆ4
storing, 2Ć13 storing, 2Ć13
peakĆtoĆpeak voltage, definition, GĆ4 peakĆtoĆpeak voltage, definition, GĆ4
performance characteristics performance characteristics
nominal. See nominal traits nominal. See nominal traits
typical. See warranted characterĆ typical. See warranted characterĆ
istics R istics R
warranted. See warranted characĆ warranted. See warranted characĆ
teristics RCL button, 2Ć11, 3Ć53 teristics RCL button, 2Ć11, 3Ć53
performance check, procedures, readout performance check, procedures, readout
AĆ43 > sign, 3Ć76 AĆ43 > sign, 3Ć76
performance tests, AĆ43ćAĆ64 clearing, 3Ć21ć3Ć22 performance tests, AĆ43ćAĆ64 clearing, 3Ć21ć3Ć22
equipment required, AĆ44ćAĆ46 definition, GĆ4 equipment required, AĆ44ćAĆ46 definition, GĆ4

222PS Operator Manual IĆ5 222PS Operator Manual IĆ5

Index Index

displaying, 3Ć21ć3Ć22 definition, GĆ5 displaying, 3Ć21ć3Ć22 definition, GĆ5

magnified signal, 3Ć29 RT, AĆ32 magnified signal, 3Ć29 RT, AĆ32
saved waveform, 3Ć52ć3Ć54 RX, AĆ32 saved waveform, 3Ć52ć3Ć54 RX, AĆ32
store mode, 3Ć61 store mode, 3Ć61
stored waveform, 2Ć8 stored waveform, 2Ć8
trigger level, 3Ć69 trigger level, 3Ć69
turning off, 2Ć12
vertical, 2Ć6, 2Ć8
S turning off, 2Ć12
vertical, 2Ć6, 2Ć8
S
READY, AĆ19 safety, symbols, 1Ć3 READY, AĆ19 safety, symbols, 1Ć3
rear panel, 2Ć14 sample rear panel, 2Ć14 sample
recalling a setup, button, 2Ć12 definition, GĆ5 recalling a setup, button, 2Ć12 definition, GĆ5
recalling a stored waveform, button, interval, definition, GĆ5 recalling a stored waveform, button, interval, definition, GĆ5
2Ć11 sampling rate 2Ć11 sampling rate
record timeĆbase mode, 3Ć27 definition, GĆ5 record timeĆbase mode, 3Ć27 definition, GĆ5
definition, GĆ4 to avoid aliasing, 3Ć27 definition, GĆ4 to avoid aliasing, 3Ć27
REF1, AĆ14, AĆ17 SAVE button, 2Ć12, 3Ć52 REF1, AĆ14, AĆ17 SAVE button, 2Ć12, 3Ć52
REF1ĊREF4, AĆ16 saving a setup, button, 2Ć12 REF1ĊREF4, AĆ16 saving a setup, button, 2Ć12
reference card, AĆ79 saving a waveform, button, 2Ć12 reference card, AĆ79 saving a waveform, button, 2Ć12
remote communication, 2Ć14, scale factor remote communication, 2Ć14, scale factor
AĆ9ćAĆ36 AĆ9ćAĆ36
horizontal, 2Ć9, AĆ1 horizontal, 2Ć9, AĆ1
repair, 3Ć31 repair, 3Ć31
vertical, 2Ć7, AĆ1 vertical, 2Ć7, AĆ1
packaging for shipment, 3Ć33 packaging for shipment, 3Ć33
screen, 2Ć2, 2Ć6, 3Ć21ć3Ć24 screen, 2Ć2, 2Ć6, 3Ć21ć3Ć24
replacing the battery, 3Ć39 replacing the battery, 3Ć39
brightness, 2Ć15, 3Ć23 brightness, 2Ć15, 3Ć23
RSĆ232, 2Ć14, AĆ9ćAĆ36 RSĆ232, 2Ć14, AĆ9ćAĆ36
focus, 2Ć14 focus, 2Ć14
command command
intensity, 3Ć23 intensity, 3Ć23
colon, AĆ13 colon, AĆ13
delimiter, AĆ13 markings on, AĆ1 delimiter, AĆ13 markings on, AĆ1
format, AĆ13 scroll timeĆbase mode, 3Ć27ć3Ć28 format, AĆ13 scroll timeĆbase mode, 3Ć27ć3Ć28
semicolon, AĆ19 and magnified signals, 3Ć29ć3Ć30 semicolon, AĆ19 and magnified signals, 3Ć29ć3Ć30
terminator, AĆ13, AĆ19 with singleĆsequence trigger terminator, AĆ13, AĆ19 with singleĆsequence trigger
commands, AĆ13, AĆ14 mode, 3Ć16 commands, AĆ13, AĆ14 mode, 3Ć16
communication parameters, AĆ32 scrollĆscan timeĆbase mode, 3Ć28 communication parameters, AĆ32 scrollĆscan timeĆbase mode, 3Ć28
error codes and magnified signals, 3Ć29ć3Ć30 error codes and magnified signals, 3Ć29ć3Ć30
communication, AĆ28 definition, GĆ5 communication, AĆ28 definition, GĆ5
diagnostic, AĆ28 scrolling timeĆbase mode, definition, diagnostic, AĆ28 scrolling timeĆbase mode, definition,
error type, AĆ29 GĆ5 error type, AĆ29 GĆ5
error types, error codes, AĆ29 SEC/DIV knob, 2Ć5, 3Ć26 error types, error codes, AĆ29 SEC/DIV knob, 2Ć5, 3Ć26
interconnection cables, AĆ34 seconds per division, 3Ć27ć3Ć28 interconnection cables, AĆ34 seconds per division, 3Ć27ć3Ć28
queries, AĆ13, AĆ18 definition, GĆ5 queries, AĆ13, AĆ18 definition, GĆ5
responses, AĆ13, AĆ18 fast settings of, 3Ć27 responses, AĆ13, AĆ18 fast settings of, 3Ć27
specifications, AĆ32 knob, 2Ć5 specifications, AĆ32 knob, 2Ć5
status messages, AĆ28 readout, 2Ć9 status messages, AĆ28 readout, 2Ć9
RSĆ232 setting, 3Ć26 RSĆ232 setting, 3Ć26
cable, AĆ80 slow settings of, 3Ć27 cable, AĆ80 slow settings of, 3Ć27

IĆ6 Index IĆ6 Index

 Index Index

stored waveform, 2Ć8 store mode, 3Ć28, 3Ć61ć3Ć62 stored waveform, 2Ć8 store mode, 3Ć28, 3Ć61ć3Ć62
selected channel, definition, GĆ6 and normal trigger mode, 3Ć72 selected channel, definition, GĆ6 and normal trigger mode, 3Ć72
selecting an acquisition mode, and singleĆsequence mode, 3Ć61 selecting an acquisition mode, and singleĆsequence mode, 3Ć61
3Ć3ć3Ć4 and trigger position, 3Ć70 3Ć3ć3Ć4 and trigger position, 3Ć70
self cal tests, AĆ39ćAĆ41 button, 2Ć11 self cal tests, AĆ39ćAĆ41 button, 2Ć11
selfĆcalibration definition, GĆ6 selfĆcalibration definition, GĆ6
how to perform, 3Ć9ć3Ć12 readout, 2Ć9, 3Ć61 how to perform, 3Ć9ć3Ć12 readout, 2Ć9, 3Ć61
menu, 3Ć11 storing the instrument, 3Ć40 menu, 3Ć11 storing the instrument, 3Ć40
when to perform, 3Ć9 STR1, AĆ17 when to perform, 3Ć9 STR1, AĆ17
serial number, 2Ć14, 3Ć31 synchronizing signals, 3Ć66 serial number, 2Ć14, 3Ć31 synchronizing signals, 3Ć66
service manual, AĆ80 service manual, AĆ80
servicing, 3Ć13, 3Ć31 servicing, 3Ć13, 3Ć31
setĆup, 3Ć5ć3Ć8 setĆup, 3Ć5ć3Ć8
setup setup
definition, GĆ6
T definition, GĆ6
T
erasing, 3Ć58 Tektronix National Marketing Center, erasing, 3Ć58 Tektronix National Marketing Center,
recalling, 2Ć12, 3Ć57ć3Ć60 1Ć1, AĆ79 recalling, 2Ć12, 3Ć57ć3Ć60 1Ć1, AĆ79
saving, 2Ć12, 3Ć39, 3Ć51, temperature saving, 2Ć12, 3Ć39, 3Ć51, temperature
3Ć55ć3Ć60 and charging battery, 3Ć37 3Ć55ć3Ć60 and charging battery, 3Ć37
horizontal position and, 3Ć55 horizontal position and, 3Ć55
and instrument calibration, 3Ć9 and instrument calibration, 3Ć9
trigger level and, 3Ć55 trigger level and, 3Ć55
vertical position and, 3Ć55 test equipment required, AĆ44 vertical position and, 3Ć55 test equipment required, AĆ44
SETUP button, 2Ć12 test signal, 3Ć15 SETUP button, 2Ć12 test signal, 3Ć15
SGND, AĆ32 tilt stand, 2Ć16 SGND, AĆ32 tilt stand, 2Ć16
shipping the instrument, packaging time base, 3Ć27ć3Ć28 shipping the instrument, packaging time base, 3Ć27ć3Ć28
for, 3Ć33 definition, GĆ6 for, 3Ć33 definition, GĆ6
side panel, 2Ć13 fast settings of, 3Ć27 side panel, 2Ć13 fast settings of, 3Ć27
signals, AĆ32 slow settings of, 3Ć27 signals, AĆ32 slow settings of, 3Ć27
sine wave, definition, GĆ6 with continuous envelope acquisiĆ sine wave, definition, GĆ6 with continuous envelope acquisiĆ
singleĆsequence trigger mode, tion, 3Ć2 singleĆsequence trigger mode, tion, 3Ć2
3Ć15ć3Ć16, 3Ć28, 3Ć73 with envelope acquisition, 3Ć2 3Ć15ć3Ć16, 3Ć28, 3Ć73 with envelope acquisition, 3Ć2
and store mode, 3Ć61 time out, 2Ć12, 3Ć37 and store mode, 3Ć61 time out, 2Ć12, 3Ć37
definition, GĆ6 definition, GĆ7 definition, GĆ6 definition, GĆ7
singleĆshot trigger mode, definition, disabling, 3Ć38ć3Ć39 singleĆshot trigger mode, definition, disabling, 3Ć38ć3Ć39
GĆ6 slow time bases with, 3Ć26 GĆ6 slow time bases with, 3Ć26
singleĆsweep trigger mode, definiĆ timeĆbase mode, 3Ć27ć3Ć28 singleĆsweep trigger mode, definiĆ timeĆbase mode, 3Ć27ć3Ć28
tion, GĆ6 and trigger mode, 3Ć16 tion, GĆ6 and trigger mode, 3Ć16
SLOPE button, 2Ć4 definition, GĆ6 SLOPE button, 2Ć4 definition, GĆ6
SOURCE button, 2Ć5, 3Ć64 equivalentĆtime, 3Ć27 SOURCE button, 2Ć5, 3Ć64 equivalentĆtime, 3Ć27
STA?, AĆ18 record, 3Ć27 STA?, AĆ18 record, 3Ć27
start bits, AĆ32 scroll, 3Ć27ć3Ć28 start bits, AĆ32 scroll, 3Ć27ć3Ć28
stop bits, AĆ32 scrollĆscan, 3Ć28 stop bits, AĆ32 scrollĆscan, 3Ć28
STORE button, 2Ć11 top panel, 2Ć11 STORE button, 2Ć11 top panel, 2Ć11

222PS Operator Manual IĆ7 222PS Operator Manual IĆ7

Index Index

transfer options, AĆ30 position, AĆ7 transfer options, AĆ30 position, AĆ7
via cable, AĆ30 button, 2Ć12 via cable, AĆ30 button, 2Ć12
via modem, AĆ30 definition, GĆ7 via modem, AĆ30 definition, GĆ7
TRG, AĆ19 in magnified signals, 3Ć29 TRG, AĆ19 in magnified signals, 3Ć29
in store mode, 3Ć70ć3Ć71 in store mode, 3Ć70ć3Ć71
TRG?, AĆ18 menu, 3Ć71 TRG?, AĆ18 menu, 3Ć71
TRIG COM connector, 2Ć15, 3Ć66 MID, 3Ć70ć3Ć71 TRIG COM connector, 2Ć15, 3Ć66 MID, 3Ć70ć3Ć71
TRIG POS button, 2Ć12, 3Ć71 not in store mode, 3Ć70ć3Ć71 TRIG POS button, 2Ć12, 3Ć71 not in store mode, 3Ć70ć3Ć71
trigger POST, 3Ć70ć3Ć71 trigger POST, 3Ć70ć3Ć71
controls, 2Ć4, 3Ć63 PRE, 3Ć70ć3Ć71 controls, 2Ć4, 3Ć63 PRE, 3Ć70ć3Ć71
coupling, 3Ć69 setting, 3Ć71 coupling, 3Ć69 setting, 3Ć71
definition, GĆ7 slope, AĆ8 definition, GĆ7 slope, AĆ8
definition, GĆ7 button for, 2Ć4 definition, GĆ7 button for, 2Ć4
definition, GĆ7 definition, GĆ7
external probe, AĆ80 external probe, AĆ80
negative, 3Ć69 negative, 3Ć69
external source, 2Ć15 positive, 3Ć69 external source, 2Ć15 positive, 3Ć69
level, 2Ć5, 3Ć15 readout, 2Ć9 level, 2Ć5, 3Ć15 readout, 2Ć9
and probe configuration, 3Ć45 source, 3Ć18 and probe configuration, 3Ć45 source, 3Ć18
definition, GĆ7 and vertical position, 3Ć76 definition, GĆ7 and vertical position, 3Ć76
indicator, 3Ć69 button for, 2Ć5 indicator, 3Ć69 button for, 2Ć5
knob for, 2Ć5 CH1, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 knob for, 2Ć5 CH1, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
readout, 2Ć9, 3Ć69 CH2, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 readout, 2Ć9, 3Ć69 CH2, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
setting an explicit, 3Ć69 channel 1, 3Ć15, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 setting an explicit, 3Ć69 channel 1, 3Ć15, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
setting automatically, 3Ć70 channel 2, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 setting automatically, 3Ć70 channel 2, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
light, 2Ć5, 3Ć16, 3Ć63, 3Ć66 definition, GĆ7 light, 2Ć5, 3Ć16, 3Ć63, 3Ć66 definition, GĆ7
definition, GĆ7 external, 3Ć66 definition, GĆ7 external, 3Ć66
mode, 3Ć27ć3Ć28, 3Ć71ć3Ć74 external, ground, 3Ć66 mode, 3Ć27ć3Ć28, 3Ć71ć3Ć74 external, ground, 3Ć66
auto baseline, 3Ć28 menu, 3Ć64ć3Ć65 auto baseline, 3Ć28 menu, 3Ć64ć3Ć65
auto level, 3Ć28, 3Ć72ć3Ć73 setting, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 auto level, 3Ć28, 3Ć72ć3Ć73 setting, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
button for, 2Ć4 VERT, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 button for, 2Ć4 VERT, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
definition, GĆ7 vertical, 3Ć64ć3Ć66 definition, GĆ7 vertical, 3Ć64ć3Ć66
menu, 3Ć73ć3Ć74 triggering menu, 3Ć73ć3Ć74 triggering
normal, 3Ć15 and amplitude, 3Ć76 normal, 3Ć15 and amplitude, 3Ć76
setting, 3Ć73ć3Ć74 setting, 3Ć73ć3Ć74
automatically, 3Ć72ć3Ć73 automatically, 3Ć72ć3Ć73
singleĆsequence, 3Ć15ć3Ć16, singleĆsequence, 3Ć15ć3Ć16,
when, 3Ć72 when, 3Ć72
3Ć73 3Ć73
turning on the instrument, 3Ć42 turning on the instrument, 3Ć42
motor, 3Ć67 motor, 3Ć67
TX, AĆ32 TX, AĆ32
typical characteristics typical characteristics
defined, AĆ76 defined, AĆ76
listed, AĆ76 listed, AĆ76

U U
uncalibrated channel, 2Ć8, 3Ć76 uncalibrated channel, 2Ć8, 3Ć76
definition, GĆ7 definition, GĆ7

IĆ8 Index IĆ8 Index

 Index Index

user messages, AĆ33 stored, 2Ć11, 3Ć39, 3Ć51ć3Ć60, AĆ2 user messages, AĆ33 stored, 2Ć11, 3Ć39, 3Ć51ć3Ć60, AĆ2
channel coupling, 2Ć8 channel coupling, 2Ć8
clearing, 3Ć53, 3Ć54 clearing, 3Ć53, 3Ć54
horizontal position of, 3Ć25 horizontal position of, 3Ć25
magnified, 3Ć29 magnified, 3Ć29
V memory location of, 2Ć8 V memory location of, 2Ć8
readout, 2Ć8 readout, 2Ć8
version number, firmware, 3Ć31 recalling, 2Ć11 version number, firmware, 3Ć31 recalling, 2Ć11
identifying, 3Ć31ć3Ć33 saving, 2Ć12 identifying, 3Ć31ć3Ć33 saving, 2Ć12
vertical axis, definition, GĆ8 seconds per division, 2Ć8 vertical axis, definition, GĆ8 seconds per division, 2Ć8
vertical controls, 2Ć3, 3Ć75 uncalibrated, 2Ć8, 3Ć76 vertical controls, 2Ć3, 3Ć75 uncalibrated, 2Ć8, 3Ć76
definition, GĆ7 definition, GĆ7
vertical position, and trigger source, vertical position, and trigger source,
3Ć76 wfrm data, AĆ14 3Ć76 wfrm data, AĆ14
vertical scale, with AUTO SETUP, 3Ć6 byte count, AĆ15 vertical scale, with AUTO SETUP, 3Ć6 byte count, AĆ15
virtual instrument software package, checksum, AĆ15 virtual instrument software package, checksum, AĆ15
AĆ11, AĆ80 fp data, AĆ14 AĆ11, AĆ80 fp data, AĆ14
volt, definition, GĆ8 mode byte, AĆ15 volt, definition, GĆ8 mode byte, AĆ15
volts per division waveform data, AĆ15 volts per division waveform data, AĆ15
and probe configuration, 3Ć45 WP200, AĆ80 and probe configuration, 3Ć45 WP200, AĆ80
definition, GĆ8 definition, GĆ8
readout, 2Ć7 readout, 2Ć7
variable, 3Ć76ć3Ć78, AĆ7 variable, 3Ć76ć3Ć78, AĆ7
X X
XY mode XY mode
button, 2Ć12 button, 2Ć12
W definition, GĆ8
W definition, GĆ8
WARNING, statement in manual, 1Ć2 entering, 3Ć79ć3Ć80 WARNING, statement in manual, 1Ć2 entering, 3Ć79ć3Ć80
Warranted Characteristics exiting, 3Ć80 Warranted Characteristics exiting, 3Ć80
Listed, AĆ72 horizontal positioning in, 3Ć80 Listed, AĆ72 horizontal positioning in, 3Ć80
Performance Conditions for, AĆ72 magnified displays and, 3Ć29 Performance Conditions for, AĆ72 magnified displays and, 3Ć29
warranted characteristics, defined, positioning waveforms, 3Ć80 warranted characteristics, defined, positioning waveforms, 3Ć80
AĆ71 using, 3Ć79 AĆ71 using, 3Ć79
warranty, 3Ć31 warranty, 3Ć31
waveform waveform
averaged, 3Ć1, 3Ć3 averaged, 3Ć1, 3Ć3
enveloped, 3Ć2ć3Ć3 enveloped, 3Ć2ć3Ć3
frequency, 3Ć26ć3Ć27 frequency, 3Ć26ć3Ć27
inverting, 3Ć22ć3Ć23 inverting, 3Ć22ć3Ć23
normal, 3Ć1, 3Ć3 normal, 3Ć1, 3Ć3
recalling, 3Ć53ć3Ć60 recalling, 3Ć53ć3Ć60
saving, 2Ć12, 3Ć51ć3Ć54 saving, 2Ć12, 3Ć51ć3Ć54

222PS Operator Manual IĆ9 222PS Operator Manual IĆ9

Index Index

IĆ10 Index IĆ10 Index